View original document

The full text on this page is automatically extracted from the file linked above and may contain errors and inconsistencies.

Financial Stability
Oversight Council
2011 Annual Report

Financial Stability Oversight Council

The Financial Stability Oversight Council (Council) was established by the Dodd-Frank Wall
Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act (Dodd-Frank Act) and is charged with three primary
purposes:
1.	 To identify risks to the financial stability of the United States that could arise from the
material financial distress or failure, or ongoing activities, of large, interconnected bank
holding companies or nonbank financial companies, or that could arise outside the
financial services marketplace.
2.	 To promote market discipline, by eliminating expectations on the part of shareholders,
creditors, and counterparties of such companies that the U.S. government will shield them
from losses in the event of failure.
3.	 To respond to emerging threats to the stability of the U.S. financial system.
Pursuant to the Dodd-Frank Act, the Council consists of 10 voting members and 5 nonvoting
members and brings together the expertise of federal financial regulators, state regulators, and
an insurance expert appointed by the President.
The voting members are:
•	

the Secretary of the Treasury, who serves as the Chairperson of the Council;

•	

the Chairman of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System;

•	

the Comptroller of the Currency;

•	

the Director of the Bureau of Consumer Financial Protection;

•	

the Chairman of the Securities and Exchange Commission;

•	

the Chairperson of the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation;

•	

the Chairperson of the Commodity Futures Trading Commission;

•	

the Director of the Federal Housing Finance Agency;

•	

the Chairman of the National Credit Union Administration Board; and

•	

an independent member with insurance expertise who is appointed by the President and
confirmed by the Senate for a six-year term.

The nonvoting members, who serve in an advisory capacity, are:
•	

the Director of the Office of Financial Research;

•	

the Director of the Federal Insurance Office;

•	

a state insurance commissioner designated by the state insurance commissioners;

•	

a state banking supervisor designated by the state banking supervisors; and

•	

a state securities commissioner (or officer performing like functions) designated by the
state securities commissioners.

The state insurance commissioner, state banking supervisor, and state securities commissioner
serve two-year terms.

Statutory Requirements for the Annual Report
Section 112(a)(2)(N) of the Dodd-Frank Act requires that the Annual Report address the
following:
(i)	 the activities of the Council;
(ii)	 significant financial market and regulatory developments, including insurance and
accounting regulations and standards, along with assessment of those developments on
the stability of the financial system;
(iii)	potential emerging threats to the financial stability of the United States;
(iv)	all determinations made under § 113 or title VIII, and the basis for such determinations;
(v)	 all recommendations made under § 119 and the result of such recommendations; and
(vi)	recommendations—
(I) to enhance the integrity, efficiency, competitiveness, and stability of United States
financial markets;
(II) to promote market discipline; and
(III) to maintain investor confidence.

Approval of the Annual Report
This Annual Report was approved unanimously by the voting members of the Council on July
22, 2011.

Abbreviations for Federal Member Agencies of the Council
•	

Department of the Treasury (Treasury)

•	

Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (Federal Reserve)

•	

Comptroller of the Currency (OCC)

•	

Bureau of Consumer Financial Protection (CFPB)

•	

Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC)

•	

Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC)

•	

Commodity Futures Trading Commission (CFTC)

•	

Federal Housing Finance Agency (FHFA)

•	

National Credit Union Administration Board (NCUA)

•	

Office of Financial Research (OFR)

•	

Federal Insurance Office (FIO)

Letter from the Chair

The institutions, markets, and infrastructure that make up the U.S. financial system provide
essential services to the U.S. and global economies—helping to allocate funds from savers to
borrowers, allowing households and businesses to plan for the future and manage their risks
over time, and facilitating the enormous volume of financial transactions necessary to support
real economic activity and employment on a daily basis.
Three years after the worst financial crisis in generations, our financial system is now on more
solid ground, less prone to excessive leverage and risk-taking, more transparent to investors,
creditors, and regulators, and more resilient to unexpected adverse events. Financial institutions
hold substantially more capital relative to risk than they did before the crisis and fund themselves
more conservatively. We have withdrawn most of the emergency actions we took to resolve the
crisis and recovered most of the investments we made to stabilize the financial system.
The Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act (Dodd-Frank Act) made
important and fundamental changes to the structure of the U.S. financial system to strengthen
safeguards for consumers and investors and to provide better tools for limiting risk in the major
financial institutions and the financial markets. The core elements of the law were designed
to build a stronger, more resilient financial system—less vulnerable to crisis, more efficient in
allocating financial resources, and less vulnerable to fraud and abuse.
•	

•	

Stronger consumer protection. The Dodd-Frank Act created the Bureau of Consumer
Financial Protection to concentrate authority and accountability for consumer protection
in a single federal agency, with the ability to enforce protections on banks as well as other
types of firms involved in the business of consumer finance.

•	

Comprehensive oversight of derivatives. The Dodd-Frank Act created a new regulatory
framework for the over-the-counter derivatives market to increase oversight, transparency,
and stability in this previously unregulated area.

•	

Transparency and market integrity. The Dodd-Frank Act included a number of measures
that increase disclosure and transparency of financial markets, including new reporting
rules for hedge funds, trade repositories to collect information on derivatives markets, and
improved disclosures on asset-backed securities.

•	

	

Tougher constraints on excessive risk taking and leverage across the financial
system. To lower the risk of failure of large financial institutions and reduce the damage
to the broader economy of such failures, the Dodd-Frank Act provided authority for
regulators to impose more conservative limits on risk that could threaten the stability of the
financial system.

Orderly liquidation authority. The Dodd-Frank Act created a new orderly liquidation
authority to break up and wind down a failing financial firm in a manner that protects
taxpayers and the economy.

Letter from the Chair

i

•	

Accountability for stability and oversight across the financial system. The Dodd-Frank
Act established the Financial Stability Oversight Council (Council) to coordinate across
agencies in monitoring risks and emerging threats to U.S. financial stability, and the Office
of Financial Research to improve data quality and facilitate access to and analysis of data
for the Council and its member agencies.

The Council will play an important role in implementing and overseeing these reforms and
mitigating current and potential future threats to financial stability.
In our regulatory framework, a significant number of independent agencies are responsible for
specific aspects of the challenge of promoting financial stability, including overseeing the safety
and soundness of banking organizations, safeguarding the stability of financial infrastructure,
promoting disclosure and market integrity, and protecting investors and consumers against
abuse. Each of these individual responsibilities is critical to a stable and well-functioning financial
system, but as the crisis demonstrated, threats to financial stability are often manifested across
a range of markets and institutions and may not always be effectively mitigated by any one
agency alone.
The Dodd-Frank Act established the Council to create joint accountability for identifying and
mitigating potential threats to the stability of the financial system. By creating the Council,
Congress recognized that financial stability will require the collective engagement of the entire
financial regulatory community.
This is an inherently difficult exercise. No financial crisis emerges in exactly the same way as its
predecessors, and the most significant future threats will often be the ones that are hardest to
diagnose and preempt. Aspects of the financial system that appear to make markets more liquid
and financial institutions more prosperous in normal times may be the same ones that make the
world more dangerous in crisis. Actions taken to preemptively mitigate threats may appear at
the time to be more dangerous than the problems they are designed to address.
We cannot predict the precise threats that may face the financial system. The best way to
prepare for this uncertainty is to continue to build the shock absorbers and safeguards that
improve the resilience of the financial system. We need to recognize that policy and regulation
will often be behind the curve of innovation, and we must meet assumptions of ongoing stability
with a heavy dose of skepticism. Our best plan is to plan for constant change and the potential
for instability, and to recognize that the threats will constantly be changing in ways we cannot
predict or fully understand.
Reducing threats to financial stability will require persistence, creativity, and a willingness
to adapt more quickly to changes in markets. We must work to ensure that the regulatory
framework keeps pace with the evolving global financial system. We cannot wait until we have
passed the point of no return to strengthen safeguards against the type of race to the bottom in
credit terms or underwriting standards that often characterizes periods of financial expansion.
We need to be willing to act prudently and preemptively in the face of emerging vulnerabilities or
imbalances.
This task will be made easier if we are able to better marshal the power of market discipline.
Financial market participants and investors should no longer operate with the expectation that
government assistance will be available to save the stakeholders in financial institutions from
the consequences of their own mistakes. And the regulatory community needs to continue to
work hard to improve the information available to investors and the public about the nature and
magnitude of the risks individual institutions are taking.

ii

2011 FSOC Annual Report

The challenge of maintaining a stable financial system is exacerbated by the difficulty of
balancing the benefits of regulation against the costs of excessively restraining prudent risktaking behavior. If we were to set the overall combination of margin, liquidity, and capital
requirements too high, we could handicap the ability of the financial system to support
economic growth. Further, financial activity would inevitably move more quickly to firms,
markets, and countries where the intensity of regulation is weaker. So we need to continue
to strive for a careful balance between the imperatives of creating a more stable system and
promoting a level of innovation and dynamism.
Measures of risk in the financial system before the crisis provided little warning of the force of
the storm to come. Many of the standard observable measures of risk were very low; indeed the
real warning sign was that neither credit ratings nor the pricing of a range of financial products
showed any expectation of the fragility of the global financial system to a fall in U.S. house prices.
This should make us all humble about our ability to make judgments about the future, even as
we strive to acquire better data and quantitative metrics. Nonetheless, there is a strong case
for improving the quality of information available to the public, supervisors, and regulators about
risks in financial institutions and markets. With our new authorities, we are working to build a
broader set of quantitative metrics to assess not just what is happening in individual institutions
and markets, but throughout the whole system.
The information we collect and the analysis we undertake will allow us to measure more
accurately the nature of risk in individual firms and across the system, but it must be
complemented with a forward-looking perspective that analyzes evolving market practices
and activities and tests the resilience of the financial system to a wide set of future events.
This perspective requires careful assessments of the relative likelihood of a range of potential
outcomes, including assessing the potential impact on the functioning of the financial system
and understanding where reforms to markets, firms, and infrastructure may mitigate threats.
And it requires an ongoing focus on incentives within the financial system that might create or
exacerbate vulnerabilities.
Working through the Council, we will focus our efforts in four distinct areas:
•	

•	

	

The ongoing interaction between the financial system and the economy. We need
to continue to strengthen our analysis of the interactions between the financial system
and the economy, including the impact that financial sector decisions have on the
economy. We also need to better assess how potential external shocks could be amplified
by structural weaknesses and imbalances in the financial system. Stress testing is an
important tool in making such assessments. It is also important to develop techniques
that give us the ability to analyze the destabilizing second-round effects of shocks across
financial institutions and markets. While it is impossible for stress tests to capture all
potential threats, the discipline of repeatedly stressing institutions and networks against
low-likelihood adverse scenarios will help temper overly optimistic assumptions that might
otherwise lead to harmful behaviors and outcomes.
The buildup of systemwide leverage and funding mismatches. It is crucial to
complement the evaluation of the safety and soundness of individual institutions with
an assessment of leverage in the financial system and imbalances between funding and
assets across the financial industry. It is hard to detect vulnerabilities that can build in the
interconnections between firms and markets. Thus, we need to work to ensure that the
capital buffers and liquidity safeguards available to the system are sufficient.

Letter from the Chair

iii

•	

The ongoing evolution of financial market activity and practices. We will need to
be attentive to the implications of very rapid growth in types of financial activity and
new products. This is true in consumer product innovation, but also in the institutional
markets where large institutions and firms interact. Innovation is an essential element of a
healthy system, but rapid growth in products and activities untested by time and adversity
necessarily entails challenges and requires more care and attention.

•	

The potential opportunities for regulatory arbitrage. Where the opportunity and
incentive exist to avoid regulation and supervision, financial activity will migrate to areas of
the system where there are gaps in authority or inconsistencies in regulatory standards. A
substantial buildup in risk and leverage outside the regulated core of the financial system
can increase threats to the system as a whole. We must also work to eliminate meaningful
opportunities for arbitrage between countries, particularly in the key areas of capital and
liquidity, derivatives, and resolution authority.

A stable financial system cannot be maintained by regulation and oversight alone. Those in
positions of leadership in the financial sector will need to establish and maintain much higher
standards for integrity and a more sophisticated understanding of the risk inherent in the
business of finance than prevailed before and during this crisis.
This will require continued improvements in management structure and corporate governance
practices. Compensation must be structured to create better incentives for robust risk
management. Risk management officers in financial firms need to have a strong voice in
decision making. Boards of directors need to actively engage with management and represent
stakeholder interests by ensuring an appropriately long horizon and a broad perspective in
making strategic choices. With improved disclosure and transparency, firms that take this longterm perspective should prosper in the long run, while those that do not will face higher funding
costs and less indulgent investors.
In this first annual report, we describe the current state of the U.S. financial system and some
of the major forces that will shape its development going forward. The Council and its members
will continue to implement the Dodd-Frank Act on a coordinated basis to enhance the integrity,
efficiency, transparency, competitiveness, and stability of U.S. financial markets. The report
also includes recommendations for additional steps that should be taken to complement these
efforts and further strengthen the financial system.

Timothy F. Geithner
Secretary of the Treasury
Chairperson, Financial Stability Oversight Council

iv

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Table of Contents
1	 Member Statement ............................................................................... 1
2	 Executive Summary .............................................................................. 3
3	 Annual Report Recommendations ..................................................... 11
4	 Macroeconomic Environment ............................................................ 17
	

Box A: U.S. Dollar as the International Reserve Asset ...................................................34

	

Box B: Municipal Debt Market .....................................................................................38

	

Box C: Country Support Developments in Europe ........................................................42

5	 Financial Developments ..................................................................... 45
	

Box D: Money Market Funds .......................................................................................50

	

Box E: Exchange Traded Funds ...................................................................................66

	

Box F: Improvements in Regulatory Capital and Accounting Measures of Assets ...........72

	

Box G: Analytical Basis for Basel III Capital Standards ..................................................84

	

Box H: Improving Capital Planning ...............................................................................88

	

Box I: Addressing Issues Related to Large Complex Financial Institutions ....................112

6	 Progress in the Implementation of the Dodd-Frank Act;
	 Council Activities ............................................................................. 115
7	 Potential Emerging Threats to U.S. Financial Stability .................... 131
	

Box J: Measuring Systemic Risk ................................................................................132

	

Box K: Stress Testing as a Forward-Looking Risk Mitigation Tool ................................134

	

Box L: Improvements in the Monitoring of Risks to Financial Stability ..........................139

	
Glossary .........................................................................................................................151
Abbreviations ..................................................................................................................165
Notes on the Data ...........................................................................................................171
List of Charts ..................................................................................................................173

1	 Member Statement
The Honorable John A. Boehner
Speaker of the House
United States House of Representatives

The Honorable Joseph R. Biden, Jr.
President of the Senate
United States Senate

The Honorable Nancy Pelosi
Democratic Leader
United States House of Representatives

The Honorable Harry Reid
Majority Leader
United States Senate

The Honorable Mitch McConnell
Republican Leader
United States Senate
In accordance with Section 112(b)(2) of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act,
for the reasons outlined in the annual report, I believe that additional actions, as described below, should
be taken to ensure that the Council, the Government, and the private sector are taking all reasonable steps
to help ensure financial stability and to mitigate systemic risk that would negatively affect the economy: the
issues and recommendations set forth in the Council’s annual report should be fully addressed; the Council
should continue to build its systems and processes for monitoring and responding to emerging threats to
the stability of the United States financial system, including those described in the Council’s annual report;
the Council and its member agencies should continue to implement the laws they administer, including
those established by, and as amended by, the Dodd-Frank Act through efficient and effective measures; and
the Council and its member agencies should exercise their respective authorities for oversight of financial
firms and markets so that the private sector employs sound financial risk management practices to mitigate
potential risks to the financial stability of the United States.

Timothy F. Geithner
Secretary of the Treasury
Chairperson, Financial Stability Oversight Council

Ben S. Bernanke
Chairman
Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System

John Walsh
Acting Comptroller of the Currency
Office of the Comptroller of the Currency

Mary L. Schapiro
Chairman
Securities & Exchange Commission

Martin J. Gruenberg
Acting Chairman
Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation

Gary Gensler
Chairman
Commodity Futures Trading Commission

Edward J. DeMarco
Acting Director
Federal Housing Finance Agency

Debbie Matz
Chairman
National Credit Union Administration

	

Member Statement

1

2	 Executive Summary

The efficient provision of financial services is critical to the nation’s economic growth and
prosperity. A stable financial system can continue to provide financial services while absorbing
a range of shocks. A stable financial system should not be the source of, nor amplify the impact
of, shocks.
The Financial Stability Oversight Council is charged with identifying risks to the financial
stability of the United States, promoting market discipline, and responding to emerging threats.
Council members have many tools at their disposal to accomplish these goals, owing to their
involvement in supervision and regulation, consumer and investor protection, and market and
infrastructure oversight.

Macroeconomic Environment
The U.S. economy continues to heal from the 2007–09 recession (the
longest since the Great Depression). Consumer spending and business
investment have increased, but housing markets remain depressed
and the unemployment rate is elevated. The global economy is also
recovering, albeit at varying rates across advanced and emerging
economies.
The financial crisis produced great upheaval in the U.S. financial
sector, but the impact on the economy was even more devastating.
At the height of the crisis, credit conditions tightened for households
and businesses, as well as for financial firms of all sizes, reflecting
severe disruptions to a range of financial markets that proved far more
damaging than the disruptions from the initial credit losses themselves.
Credit conditions have improved significantly from the depths of
the crisis. Recently, credit flows have shown signs of recovery, with
large corporate borrowers facing favorable financing conditions and
households experiencing an increase in credit. Corporate balance
sheets deteriorated significantly during the crisis, primarily as a result of
falling asset values, but they have recovered since mid-2009 as cash
flows and profits have increased. Corporate bond markets have also
recovered for both investment-grade and non investment-grade issuers.
The outlook is more challenging for small businesses, which tend to
borrow against real estate assets. They report weak demand for their
products and services, as well as borrowing constraints, although the
number of small businesses reporting difficulties obtaining credit has
declined since the crisis.

	

Executive Summary

3

Nonmortgage lending to consumers has grown recently after declining
for several years. Household balance sheets are recovering, partly
because of the rebound in stock prices, but they remain challenged
by the weak labor market, slow income growth, and declines in real
estate values. As a result of the fall in home values, a significant number
of homeowners now have low or negative equity in their properties,
and record numbers of homes have entered the foreclosure process.
However, low interest rates have helped mitigate some of the costs of
mortgage debt and, in the aggregate, households’ ability to meet debt
payments has improved since 2007.
Government budgets, both federal and nonfederal, have been strained
by the cyclical response of revenues and expenditures to a weak
economy as well as the fiscal actions taken to ease the recession
and aid the recovery. The federal government deficit grew from 1.2
percent of GDP in 2007 to 8.9 percent in 2010, and net publicly held
federal debt outstanding rose from $5 trillion to $9 trillion. This public
borrowing largely replaced private borrowing in the credit markets,
and global financial markets readily accommodated the increase in
federal debt. Even after economic conditions return to normal, the
federal government faces a long-run imbalance between revenues and
expenditures. This need for long-run fiscal sustainability has been a
focus of recent attention from credit rating agencies. Achieving longrun sustainability of the national budget is crucial to maintaining global
market confidence in U.S. Treasury securities and the financial stability
of the United States.
State and local government revenues were severely affected by the
economic downturn. While state finances started to improve in the
second half of 2010, several quarters into the economic recovery, local
governments remain challenged. The municipal debt market exhibited
evidence of considerable stress last year.
Sovereign and banking sector strains are evident among a number of
advanced economies. Three countries in the European Monetary Union
have required financial assistance as markets have priced elevated
sovereign credit risk into their debt. The relatively new phenomenon
of differentiated compensation for sovereign credit risk in advanced
countries has added to volatility in global markets. It has also exposed
tensions within the European Monetary Union and limitations in the
pre-crisis set of tools available to European policymakers to respond to
economic and financial stress.
In contrast, most emerging economies have recovered relatively quickly
from the crisis, partly because of their lack of financial imbalances
before the financial crisis. However, emerging economies face
challenges from robust capital inflows and the potential for overheating.
Recent instability in North Africa and the Middle East and the natural
disaster in Japan have added to uncertainty in the international
environment.

4

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Financial Developments
At the peak of the financial crisis, the U.S. government introduced
unprecedented support for financial markets, injecting hundreds of
billions of dollars of capital and liquidity into the financial sector. As
market confidence has returned, private funding has gradually replaced
those support programs: many financial institutions have returned
the government’s capital; the Federal Reserve is no longer offering
extraordinary liquidity support to financial markets; and the FDIC
guarantees for bank senior debt will expire in 2012.
Funding has not returned to the private securitized mortgage market,
which financed a significant portion of household borrowing in the first
decade of the 2000s. In the past, the government’s role encouraged
housing purchases and real estate investment over other sectors
and ultimately left taxpayers responsible for much of the risk incurred
by a poorly supervised housing market. This led to the two large
government-sponsored enterprises, Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac, being
placed into federal conservatorship. These entities and the Federal
Housing Administration now dominate mortgage lending, guaranteeing
or insuring over 90 percent of mortgage loan originations. This is not a
viable long-term solution, but, given the current fragility of the real estate
market, the transition back to more private involvement will require time
and care.
Profitability has returned in the banking sector and for many other
financial institutions. Investors purchased large amounts of new
equity in the largest bank holding companies in 2009 and 2010, partly
responding to the results of the 2009 supervisory-run stress test. U.S.
banking institutions now have substantially stronger capital and liquidity
buffers than before the crisis. However, smaller banks, particularly those
with large commercial real estate exposures, have not recovered as
quickly as larger banks and have continued to fail at elevated rates. At
the same time, in taking prudent measures to conserve their capital
and liquidity, many banks have been slow to expand their direct lending
activity since the financial crisis.
Assets have grown at insured depository institutions relative to other
financial institutions since the crisis, following a long period in which
financial activities moved from banks to markets. In particular, money
market fund assets declined as investors transferred significant funds
into insured bank deposits during the crisis. At the same time, the
crisis reinforced the trend toward concentration and globalization in the
banking industry, and foreign banking organizations have expanded
their activities in the United States in recent years.
The financial system is less leveraged than it was before the crisis. Four
of the five largest independent investment banks, all highly leveraged
institutions, were acquired by or converted their charters to become
bank holding companies in 2008, and the fifth failed. The specialty
finance sector, which also relied heavily on market financing, is now

	

Executive Summary

5

smaller and more stable. Several of the largest companies in the
specialty finance sector also became bank holding companies
during the crisis to expand their funding options. These and other
companies have reduced their leverage significantly below the levels
before the crisis.
Short-term wholesale funding markets provide liquidity for financial
institutions to support their activities, but the financial crisis showed
that these markets can be fragile and subject to runs by risk-averse
investors. In response to unprecedented strains in these markets,
the Federal Reserve, the FDIC, and the Treasury took extraordinary
steps to support market functioning. The crisis also revealed, in
particular after the freezing of Lehman Brothers’ prime brokerage
assets in London, that differences in international bankruptcy
regimes can accelerate runs on short-term wholesale funding
markets. Activity in several of these markets remains significantly
below pre-crisis levels, as investors and supervisors have a new
sensitivity to potential liquidity risks and other risks.
The credit risk transfer markets that contributed to the financial
crisis—specifically, those for credit default swaps and collateralized
debt obligations—are now significantly smaller, partly owing to new
regulatory and accounting rules. Derivatives markets generally will be
subject to greater supervisory oversight under the Dodd-Frank Act.
Supervisors and market participants are more aware of the potential
for extreme market fluctuations in the future and the need to
maintain a stronger set of shock absorbers in individual institutions
and in markets to absorb the impact of such events. These issues
are particularly relevant when market participants are highly
leveraged or when derivatives or other complex instruments are
involved.
In general, the pricing of risk in important markets appears to be
in line with historical averages. For example, the price-to-earnings
ratios for corporate equities are well within historical ranges, and
the credit risk premium on high-yield corporate debt is in the
lower part of its long-run historical range. Prices for commodities
and agricultural land have risen strongly but do not appear to be
associated with high debt levels.
Compensation practices that incented financial institution
employees to take excessive risks are widely acknowledged to have
been a contributing factor in the financial crisis. Under pressure from
regulators and investors, financial institutions are reforming their
compensation practices to better align the interests of managers,
traders, and other employees with the long-term health of the firm,
although more needs to be done.
Following the rebound in equity markets, aggregate assets in mutual
funds and hedge funds have recovered to pre-crisis levels. Assets
in defined contribution plans have also recovered, although many

6

2011 FSOC Annual Report

pension plans for state and local government employees appear to face
funding shortfalls over the long run. Investors have increasingly turned
to exchange traded funds, which offer low fees and intraday liquidity.
Regulatory reforms and advances in technology have altered the
landscape for financial infrastructure, providing financial markets with
advances in efficiency and transparency. While this infrastructure and
the markets that it supports have generally performed their primary
functions in an orderly fashion during and since the crisis, there were
exceptions. One was the so-called flash crash of May 2010, when
equities and equity futures markets plunged more than 5 percent and
then rebounded in a matter of minutes. This incident illustrates some of
the risks associated with increasingly complex and connected financial
markets interacting with ever-faster automated trading systems. Poor
functioning in mortgage servicing and the tri-party repo market were
also identified during the crisis, and regulators are taking steps to
address them.

Progress of Regulatory Reform
In the period after the financial crisis, the legal, regulatory, and
accounting framework of our financial system has changed significantly.
The Dodd-Frank Act, which created the Council, closed gaps in the
financial regulatory framework and strengthened supervisory, risk
management, and disclosure standards in important ways. The new
Basel III international standards for banks, negotiated with major input
from U.S. regulators, will require banks globally to hold more capital,
particularly when they take market risk, and will subject banks to a
liquidity standard for the first time, and new accounting rules will serve
to limit financial institutions’ off-balance-sheet activities.
For the first time, information on trading in swaps will be available
through trade repositories. In addition, standardized derivatives will
have to be traded on regulated trading platforms and centrally cleared,
improving price transparency and reducing counterparty credit risk for
market participants. Once regulators complete the implementation of
the Dodd-Frank Act, the mix of complex structured credit products,
derivatives, and short-term wholesale funding that helped produce the
financial crisis is unlikely to reappear in its previous form.
U.S. regulators continue to work out the details of several important
initiatives, including those mandated by the Dodd-Frank Act and those
agreed to with their international counterparts. For example, the Council
has defined the characteristics under which it will designate systemically
important financial market utilities for enhanced supervision. The Council
is also in the process of defining the characteristics under which it will
designate nonbank financial institutions for Federal Reserve supervision,
and the Federal Reserve, in consultation with other Council member
agencies, is establishing tougher supervisory guidelines for large
financial institutions. Regulators are also developing new reporting and
disclosure requirements for designated nonbank financial companies.
	

Executive Summary

7

The Dodd-Frank Act also established a new framework for resolving
large complex financial institutions, limiting the expectation that the
government will bail out such institutions in a crisis. As part of the
enhanced supervisory standards, designated nonbank companies and
large bank holding companies will be required to maintain detailed
resolution plans. Until the Dodd-Frank Act is fully implemented, the
public will not receive the full set of protections provided by the
improved regulatory system. In addition, to maximize all the benefits of
the new regulatory framework, it is imperative that relevant regulatory
agencies be funded at levels consistent with their expanded missions.
Regulators are also working with their international counterparts to
promote consistency in global regulatory reform, particularly with
regard to implementing the new Basel III capital and liquidity standards;
strengthening the supervision of, designing capital surcharges for,
and developing a framework for the resolution of large, globally active
financial institutions; promoting harmonization for the oversight of
derivatives markets; and regulating global financial infrastructures.

Potential Emerging Threats to U.S. Financial Stability
Assessing future threats to financial stability will require attention to
the broad forces driving the evolution of the financial system, which
determine the profit opportunities available to market participants
and financial institutions along with the risks they take. In addition to
these long-run challenges to maintaining financial stability, a number
of possible shocks and vulnerabilities could produce more immediate
threats to U.S. financial stability.
Globalization and technological innovation are among the most
important forces that could affect future financial stability. While the rise
of international banking and the important role of foreign banks in U.S.
financial markets allow risks to be transferred more broadly across the
global economy, they also increase the links across economies and add
to the complexity of the financial system. Global interconnectedness
is heightened by the role of the U.S. dollar as the international reserve
currency and the funding needs of large foreign firms that hold U.S.
dollar-denominated assets.
Financial product innovation and growth is crucial to support a vibrant
economy, but at times it can result in dramatic changes in business
models and can introduce increased complexity, thereby altering the
evolution of linkages among firms. Three such products examined in the
report are exchange traded funds, structured notes, and collateralized
commercial paper. While the level of activity in these products in the
United States is not high enough to represent a threat, the level of
activity abroad and the links to derivatives have led regulators in other
countries to focus special attention on them.
The functioning of the U.S. financial system has proven resilient to the
impact of a number of recent shocks, such as the natural disaster in
Japan and the fluctuating concerns over European sovereign debt.
8

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Further, increases in trading volumes and enhanced market liquidity
have been fostered, in part, by the increasing use of electronic trading.
This liquidity can evaporate in stressed environments, as the flash crash
demonstrated. New technology has helped strengthen the resilience of
payment systems, data repositories, and other financial infrastructure.
This has given firms the tools to handle increasingly intricate
transactions, including transactions in short-term wholesale funding
markets that can provide hundreds of billions of dollars overnight to
cover daily funding needs. Operational risk events, along with recent
high-profile cyberattacks, are important reminders that both regulators
and firms need to continuously upgrade the resilience of their electronic
systems and networks.
There is significant market uncertainty in Europe, notably associated
with the sovereign credit risk of Greece, Ireland, and Portugal. U.S.
financial institutions have very limited net direct exposure to these
three countries. They have larger exposure and important ties to
major financial institutions elsewhere in Europe that in turn have large
exposures to Greece, Ireland, and Portugal.
Some major European banks obtain substantial short-term wholesale
U.S. dollar funding from U.S. money market funds. Further, money
market funds remain an important supplier of cash to the tri-party repo
market. Structural vulnerabilities in money market funds and tri-party
repo amplified a number of shocks in the financial crisis. Reforms
undertaken since the crisis have improved resilience, and money market
funds report de minimis exposure to Greece, Ireland, and Portugal;
however, amplification of a shock through these channels is still
possible.
The impact on the U.S. financial system of events in Europe depends
on how the peripheral European sovereign debt crisis evolves and on
the resilience of U.S. financial institutions and markets. If the crisis, now
affecting Greece, Ireland, and Portugal, were to intensify significantly
or spread more broadly across the euro area, then the impact on the
U.S. financial system would be greater. Supervisors have for some time
been working with U.S. financial institutions to improve their ability to
withstand a variety of possible financial contagion stress scenarios
emanating from Europe. The Council and its member agencies will
continue to carefully monitor the potential risks that could emerge from
the peripheral European sovereign debt crisis.
Real estate-related exposures remain a significant risk for many U.S.
financial institutions. However, the improvement in capital across the
financial system provides an important buffer against further declines
in real estate prices and larger losses; this makes it less likely that
U.S. financial institutions will have to reduce assets or reduce growth
in lending in response to a more prolonged period of weakness in the
housing market or in the U.S. economy more generally. On the other
hand, the transition path back to a greater role for private capital in the
housing finance system remains uncertain.

	

Executive Summary

9

The weakness of the current recovery has delayed monetary policy
normalization and exacerbated the unsustainable fiscal trajectory in
the United States. Despite the sustained low interest rate environment,
there is limited evidence of major U.S. market participants “reaching for
yield.” One possible exception has been in some of the activity in the
markets for non investment-grade bonds and loans.
Both monetary policy normalization and fiscal consolidation will have
important consequences for the business models of many financial firms
that are currently funding large holdings of government securities and
reserves at the Federal Reserve with low-cost deposits. Uncertainty
over the pace of monetary policy normalization and fiscal consolidation
has the potential to generate shocks; however, with appropriate
planning and risk diversification, the financial market impact of such
shocks should be absorbed without affecting the functions of the
system.
The capital and liquidity of the largest U.S. financial institutions have
improved substantially. However, many large U.S. financial institutions
currently receive the highest credit rating for short-term funding partly
because of a presumption of possible government support in stressed
conditions. Further, the Federal Reserve, in its Comprehensive Capital
Analysis and Review, found a number of weaknesses in the capital
planning processes at many large banking institutions. These factors
highlight some of the challenges still ahead in building a stronger
financial system.
The recent financial crisis provides a stark illustration of how quickly
confidence can erode and financial contagion can spread, as well as
how challenging and expensive it is to repair the damage. This lesson
is important to bear in mind in the current debate over the increase in
the federal government’s debt limit. It is vital to the stability of the U.S.
financial system and the global financial system for the debt limit to be
raised in a timely manner to avoid creating any risk of default on U.S.
obligations.

10

2011 FSOC Annual Report

3	 Annual Report Recommendations

The Dodd-Frank Act requires the Council to make annual recommendations to (1) enhance
the integrity, efficiency, competitiveness, and stability of U.S. financial markets; (2) promote
market discipline; and (3) maintain investor confidence. The Council fulfills this requirement by
recommending (1) heightened risk management and supervisory attention in specific areas; (2)
further reforms to address structural vulnerabilities in key markets; (3) steps to address reform of
the housing finance market; and (4) coordination on financial regulatory reform.
The Council recommendations work together to balance the stated requirements of integrity,
efficiency, competition, market discipline, and investor confidence, while maintaining
financial stability. For instance, recommendations to improve capital and liquidity planning,
address vulnerabilities in the money market fund and tri-party repo markets, and coordinate
implementation of the Dodd-Frank Act will improve the stability of the financial system. To
promote market discipline, the Council recommends responsible credit underwriting standards;
housing finance reforms, including mortgage servicing standards and servicer compensation;
and effective implementation of orderly liquidation authority for the largest financial firms. To
maintain investor confidence, the Council also recommends that market participants keep
pace with infrastructure and technological advances and conduct heightened due diligence on
emerging financial products. Collectively, the Council recommendations address the identified
vulnerabilities in the system and emerging threats to financial stability. Regulatory agencies
and market participants should take these steps to enhance the resilience and integrity of the
system. The discussion below outlines the Council recommendations and their fulfillment of the
Council’s statutory mandate.

I. Heightened Risk Management and Supervisory Attention
In the following areas, market participants should employ heightened
risk management, and Council member agencies should enhance
ongoing supervisory attention to determine whether any of these market
dynamics rises to a level that merits a regulatory response.
•	

	

Construct robust capital, liquidity, and resolution plans. To
support stability in the financial system, financial institutions
should ensure that they have in place robust capital, liquidity,
and resolution planning processes. The Federal Reserve’s
Comprehensive Capital Analysis and Review exercise found that
all of the largest banking companies need to bolster their capital
planning processes. The largest financial institutions must also
incorporate within their planning processes contingencies for
resolution that would facilitate resolvability under bankruptcy
without government assistance. In addition, the largest banks

Annual Report Recommendations

11

should plan further improvement in their capital levels and liquidity
risk profiles to support funding models without any assumption of
government assistance and their continued smooth transition to
new global standards.
•	

•	

Employ appropriate due diligence for emerging financial
products. Council agencies are highly attentive to the emergence
and growth of financial products, particularly those that may be
designed to arbitrage new capital and accounting standards by
moving financial activities outside the regulated core. A robust
financial system should facilitate innovation. Market participants,
as issuers or investors, should work to ensure that they have
an adequate understanding of the risks that products such as
exchange traded funds and structured notes present, including
impacts under strained market conditions.

•	

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Maintain discipline in credit underwriting standards. Although
it is difficult to make definitive determinations regarding the
appropriateness of risk pricing, there have been some indicators
that credit underwriting standards might have overly eased
in certain products, such as leveraged loans, reflecting the
dynamics of competition among arranging bankers. Greater
market discipline can be supported through robust due diligence
practices and processes for monitoring and responding to
developments in credit underwriting standards, including deal
features that may allow borrowers to take on excessive risk.
Sound underwriting standards, which were abandoned in the runup to the crisis, will encourage greater investor confidence and
stability in the market.

•	

12

Bolster resilience to unexpected interest rate shifts. In
light of a sustained, historically low interest rate environment,
market participants should work to ensure that they have robust
processes for measuring and, where necessary, mitigating their
exposure to a range of interest rate scenarios. Preparedness to
face unexpected rate changes or yield curve shifts will enable
market participants to make a stable transition to a new rate
environment, minimizing potential disruption to the system.

Keep pace with competitive, technological, and regulatory
market structure developments. Equity trading markets in the
United States have experienced changes in market structure over
the past several years, including an expansion of the number of
trading venues and the rise of electronic trading. The flash crash of
May 6, 2010 demonstrated that regulators and market participants
should continue to monitor these changes and take action as
necessary to help ensure that the market structure regulatory
framework and operational policies keep pace with changes
to trading and other market practices. Regulators and market
participants should also continue to foster investor confidence by
promoting market integrity, efficiency, and competition.

II. Additional Reforms to Address Structural Vulnerabilities
Financial systems are vulnerable to shocks that can be exacerbated
by weaknesses in the structure of financial institutions, markets, and
infrastructure.
The Council recommends reforms to address structural vulnerabilities
in the tri-party repo market, for money market mutual funds, and in
mortgage servicing:
•	

•	

Implement structural reforms to mitigate run risk in money
market funds. When the SEC adopted new rules for money
market funds (MMFs) in February 2010, it noted that a number
of features still make MMFs susceptible to runs and should be
addressed to mitigate vulnerabilities in this market. To increase
stability, market discipline, and investor confidence in the MMF
market by improving the market’s functioning and resilience, the
Council should examine, and the SEC should continue to pursue,
further reform alternatives to reduce MMFs’ susceptibility to runs,
with a particular emphasis on (1) a mandatory floating net asset
value (NAV), (2) capital buffers to absorb fund losses to sustain a
stable NAV, and (3) deterrents to redemption, paired with capital
buffers, to mitigate investor runs.

•	

	

Elimination of most intraday credit exposure and reform of
collateral practices in the tri-party repo market to strengthen
the market. Given the vital importance and size of tri-party
repo financing and the broad array of financial institutions
active in this market, the regulatory community should exert its
supervisory authority over the industry’s reform efforts to ensure
that the Tri-Party Repo Infrastructure Reform Task Force meets
its commitments as promptly as possible. The Task Force’s
efforts should ultimately improve market functioning, but several
important structural reform issues require coordinated supervisory
and regulatory attention. Chief among these priorities are
enhancing dealer liquidity risk management practices, alleviating
the propensity of cash investors to withdraw funding and exit the
market when risk surfaces, and implementing mechanisms to
manage a potential dealer default. The fragility of broader market
liquidity facilities and the constraints on the types of collateral that
certain investors are prepared to take (particularly money market
funds) heightens the risk of contagion in the market. Reform
efforts should practically eliminate intraday credit exposures
of clearing banks to borrowers and strengthen collateral
management practices to improve the stability of this critical shortterm funding market.

Improve the overall quality of mortgage servicing by
establishing national mortgage servicing standards and
servicer compensation reform. The mortgage servicing
industry was unprepared and poorly structured to address the
rapid increase in defaults and foreclosures. To address this
Annual Report Recommendations

13

structural vulnerability, regulators should establish national
mortgage servicing standards and promote alternative servicer
compensation models.
»»

National mortgage servicing standards should provide clarity
to borrowers and investors, and servicers should be held to
the same quality and responsiveness standards regardless of
whether the loans being serviced are held on the originator’s
books, have been sold, or have been securitized. National
standards would align incentives and provide clarity and
consistency to borrowers and investors, especially in the case
of delinquency. These standards will enhance the integrity and
efficiency of mortgage servicing and help reestablish investor
confidence in the housing finance market.

»»

Today, the structure of servicing compensation generally
does not adjust to reflect the amount of servicing effort
and expense required. This flat-fee structure does not
appropriately incent servicers to invest the time and effort to
work with borrowers to avoid default or foreclosure. The FHFA
and the Department of Housing and Urban Development
should continue to coordinate a review of the structural flaws
in the current mortgage servicing compensation model and
should consider alternatives.

III. Housing Finance
The U.S. housing finance system required extraordinary federal
government support during the crisis. Over 90 percent of the market
continues to function on the basis of this government support
and without sufficient return of private capital. This dynamic is not
sustainable over the long term. The Council member agencies and
the Department of Housing and Urban Development should continue
their work to strengthen the housing finance system, which includes
developing a framework for the return of private capital to the system.
The framework should include regulatory activities that set forth
standards and guidelines for participants in the housing finance system,
and other actions that strengthen mortgage underwriting. To give further
confidence to the market and provide long-term stability to the U.S.
financial system, the Council believes Congress must pass responsible
legislation to reform the housing finance system. The reform efforts
should not further destabilize the fragile housing market.

IV. Financial Regulatory Reform
Council member agencies are committed to implementation of financial
regulatory reform. While important steps have been taken, both
domestically and in the international policy arena, much work remains
to be done. The agencies are approaching reform carefully, mindful
of the need for sufficient public comment and the risks of unintended
consequences.

14

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Coordinated implementation of regulatory reform will enhance the
integrity, efficiency, competitiveness, and stability of U.S. financial
markets; promote market discipline; and maintain investor confidence by
closing regulatory gaps that contributed to the crisis and previous market
dislocations.

Dodd-Frank Act
The Dodd-Frank Act provides comprehensive reforms and protections
across the financial regulatory system. These reforms include the creation
of a regulatory framework for the over-the-counter derivatives market;
investor protection measures that increase disclosure, transparency,
and confidence; reporting for managers of hedge funds and other
private funds; and the establishment of a single agency dedicated to
ensuring consumer financial protection and the integrity of the market
for consumer financial products and services. The Dodd-Frank Act also
requires regulators to impose heightened prudential standards on certain
large financial firms to help foster market discipline and stability, and
to make clear that no firm will be considered too big to fail, by creating
a new authority to break up and wind down a failing financial firm in a
manner that protects taxpayers and the economy. In addition, the DoddFrank Act created the Council to monitor risks that could build across
the system in a way that threatens the stability of the financial markets in
the United States, and the OFR to collect data on the Council’s behalf,
working closely with supervisors.
The Council member agencies have made significant progress in
implementing the many reforms that the Dodd-Frank Act requires.
The Council and its member agencies recognize that successful
implementation of reform across complex areas of the financial system
requires independent agencies to coordinate their efforts, even if
such consultation is not statutorily required. Coordination is critical to
implementing reforms that not only work together in a sensible, coherent
way, but also appropriately balance market efficiencies, competitiveness,
and stability while providing for innovation. To meet the challenges
of designing and enforcing these new rules, the quality and scale of
resources dedicated to financial oversight must increase. Agencies must
have sufficient resources to attract and retain talented individuals and
invest in systems to monitor market activity and enforce the new rules.

International Coordination
At the September 2009 summit in Pittsburgh, the G-20 heads of state
agreed that reforms were needed to build high-quality capital and
mitigate pro-cyclicality in the financial system; improve compensation
practices to support financial stability; reform the over-the-counter
derivatives markets for greater transparency and risk management; and
address cross-border resolutions and systemically important financial
institutions. The implementation of the Dodd-Frank Act will accomplish
many of these goals within the United States, but international
coordination is required to ensure that similar reforms are applied
consistently across the global financial system to mitigate regulatory gaps

	

Annual Report Recommendations

15

and level the playing field. Council member agencies are committed to
working with their international counterparts to implement these reforms
in a timely manner. Key reforms include the following:
•	

•	

Derivatives markets. A core element of the international
framework for reform of the over-the-counter derivatives market is
a requirement for standardized derivatives to be centrally cleared.
While there will continue to be bilaterally executed derivatives
transactions that are not cleared, there is international agreement
that non-centrally cleared derivatives should be subject to higher
capital requirements. In addition, Council member agencies
are committed to working with international counterparts to
develop global standards for central counterparties and margin
requirements for swaps and security-based swaps that are not
centrally cleared. Other key elements of reform are the reporting
of over-the-counter derivatives to trade data repositories and the
trading of standardized over-the-counter derivatives on exchanges
or electronic trading platforms. In each of these areas, Council
member agencies are committed to working with international
counterparts to harmonize requirements.

•	

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Globally active systemically important banks. The Financial
Stability Board, a global body of finance ministers, central bankers,
and supervisors, has been working to develop guidelines for
cooperation in the supervision of large, globally active financial
institutions, and to develop a consistent international framework
for the orderly resolution of such companies. These initiatives
complement Dodd-Frank Act requirements, and Council members
are actively supporting efforts to promote international consistency
on resolution frameworks.

•	

16

Capital and liquidity standards. In 2010, central banks and
supervisors reached agreement on the core elements of new
global capital and liquidity standards, Basel III. As a result of
this agreement, internationally active banks will have to hold
substantially more capital in the form of common equity against
the risks they take. This agreement was the foundation of a
comprehensive new capital framework to further stabilize global
markets, but it left open several areas for further analysis, including
the size and composition of additional capital requirements to
impose on the largest global institutions, how to implement the new
liquidity standards, and how to bring more consistency to the risk
weighting of assets across countries.

Infrastructure. International authorities have released revised
standards for financial market infrastructures that provide a single
set of principles (CPSS-IOSCO Principles for financial market
infrastructures) for greater consistency in the oversight and
regulation of financial infrastructures worldwide, including enhanced
requirements for governance and risk management practices, and
new standards on transparency and general business practices.
These principles should provide greater consistency in the oversight
and regulation of financial infrastructures worldwide and thus
enhance the integrity of markets and global investor confidence.

4 Macroeconomic Environment

The U.S. economy expanded at a moderate pace in 2010 and early 2011. The economy is
healing slowly from the lingering effects of the extraordinary financial market dislocations
in 2008–09 and the severe declines in employment and output (Chart 4.0.1). Businesses
have increased investment, and consumers have increased spending (Chart 4.0.2).
However, construction and housing demand remain depressed, the unemployment
rate is elevated, and the gains in total employment have been insufficient to raise the
employment-population ratio.
Chart 4.0.1 Real GDP Growth and the Unemployment Rate

Chart 4.0.2 Real GDP Growth and Its Components

4.0.2 Real GDP Growth and Its Components

Most foreign economies also continue to
recover from the most severe global downturn
since the Great Depression, albeit at differing
paces. Emerging economies, which suffered
fewer financial disruptions from the crisis, have
been able to recover more quickly, and many of
those economies have returned to or exceeded
their previous trend growth rate. Recovery in
the advanced economies has been slowed
by the weakness of the financial sector, and
many have not yet reached their pre-crisis
level of economic activity. With interest rates in
advanced economies at historically low levels to
support economic growth, funds have flowed to
emerging markets, where returns are relatively
higher. Political tensions in North Africa and the
Middle East, and the natural disaster in Japan
added to uncertainty in the first half of 2011.
The recession depressed tax revenues and
required additional public sector spending,
leading to substantial increases in government
debt in many advanced economies
(Charts 4.0.3 and 4.0.4). For the most
part, financial markets have been able to
smoothly accommodate elevated government
borrowing, as private savers have increased
their demand for government debt. However,
certain governments and financial institutions
in peripheral Europe have encountered
severe difficulties in maintaining access to
private financial market funding. As the global
economy continues to recover, governments
Macroeconomic Environment

17

Chart 4.0.3 United States Nonfinancial Net Debt Flows

face the challenge of rebalancing revenue and
expenditures.

4.1 Provision of Financial
Services to the Real Economy
Functions of the Financial System
The financial system has three primary
functions: (1) credit flow facilitation, (2) risk
transfer, and (3) transaction and payment
services.

Chart 4.0.4 Euro Area Nonfinancial Net Debt Flows

Credit flows: A primary function of the financial
system is to facilitate the flow of funds from
savers to borrowers at prices that appropriately
compensate all parties for the inherent riskiness
of lending; hence, financial markets and their
participants play a key role in price discovery.
Risk transfer: Another key function of the
financial system is to facilitate the efficient
allocation of risk across households and
businesses.
Transaction and payment services: The
financial system is also responsible for providing
reliable and robust transaction and payment
services to the real economy.
4.1.1 Credit Flows

Chart 4.1.1 Net Debt Outstanding as a Percent of GDP

The reduction in credit flows to households
and businesses during the crisis reflected both
a decline in demand for credit and a reduction
in the supply of available credit. Combined
credit flows to businesses and households
have started to increase. However, persistent
weakness in real estate markets continues to
restrain demand for and supply of mortgage
credit.
Before the financial crisis, many households
and financial market participants increased
their debt loads. Some of this credit flowed
to borrowers with limited ability, and at times
limited incentives, to repay their loans. Further,
some companies that originated mortgages and
sold them for securitization were compensated
on the basis of volume and did not always
retain a stake in the mortgages. This meant
that they had less incentive than traditional

18

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 4.1.2 Bank Business Lending Standards and Demand
4.1.2 Bank Business Lending Standards and Demand

originate-to-hold lenders to underwrite loans to
high standards.
The crisis triggered significant reductions
in the flow of credit and an unprecedented
deleveraging by consumers, businesses, and,
most dramatically, the financial sector itself.
Even as the recession stressed government
budgets, public borrowing largely replaced
private borrowing in the credit markets
(Chart 4.1.1). These trends have begun to
moderate, and net flows of credit to the private
nonfinancial sector have turned marginally
positive owing to increases in both demand for
and supply of credit.
Credit Flows to the Corporate Sector

Chart 4.1.3 Corporate Bond Market Issuance

Chart 4.1.4 Corporate Bond Spreads

The nonfinancial corporate sector continues
to recover as increased demand and low labor
costs contribute to profitability. In the aggregate,
corporate borrowers are experiencing more
favorable financing conditions from banks,
bond markets, and syndicated loan markets,
which allow large corporate firms to finance
their activities on better terms. For instance,
bank underwriting standards have eased from
the extremely tight conditions at the peak of the
crisis (Chart 4.1.2).
Credit intermediation for large corporations
in the United States is characterized by a
high degree of funding through debt capital
markets rather than through banks. Debt
capital markets, somewhat impaired during the
crisis, are again functioning well. Corporate
bond markets have recovered, and issuance
of investment-grade and speculative-grade
bonds has been robust in recent months (Chart
4.1.3). Spreads between yields on corporate
bonds and comparable-maturity U.S. Treasury
securities have narrowed, although they remain
above the very low pre-crisis levels (Chart
4.1.4). In addition, new equity issuance has
been robust lately and M&A activity has picked
up, indicating that credit has become more
available.
Corporate leveraged buyouts (LBOs) remain
well below the elevated levels seen during the
last credit cycle, although they have increased
somewhat as credit conditions have improved

Macroeconomic Environment

19

Chart 4.1.5 North American Completed LBOs

(Chart 4.1.5). Private equity firms continue to
hold high levels of committed but uninvested
capital available for LBO activity.
Credit Flows to the Small Business Sector

Chart 4.1.6 Proxy for Small Business Lending

Chart 4.1.7 Nonmortgage Consumer Credit Flows

Banks are a large source of credit for small
businesses: banks provide these businesses
with term loans, credit cards, credit lines,
commercial mortgages, and capital leases.
Regulatory data on business loans less than
$1 million and agricultural loans less than
$500,000 suggest that small business lending
had increased solidly in the years leading up to
2008, before declining by more than 10 percent
through 2010 (Chart 4.1.6). A number of
related factors explain the decline, including the
general dislocation of credit during the crisis,
the adverse effect of the crisis on borrowers’
balance sheets and on the value of their
available collateral, and the reduced demand
for credit in light of lower inventory investment
and cuts in investment and payrolls as these
businesses have experienced weak demand
and stagnant prospective sales.
In the National Federation of Independent
Business (NFIB) June 2011 Small Business
Survey, the number of small businesses
reporting that credit is “harder to obtain” has
declined to mid-2008 levels. Small businesses
continue to cite weak demand for their products
or services as the main factor limiting growth.
Additionally, with more than half of credit to
small businesses secured by some form of real
estate, borrowing capacity is limited by the
ongoing stress in real estate.
Credit Flows to the Household Sector
Consumer spending has risen at a moderate
pace since mid-2009, contributing to overall
economic growth. However, consumer credit
flows, which fell sharply during the crisis, have
only recently begun to recover. The modest
recovery of these flows reflects restraints on
the availability of consumer credit as well as
subdued demand as households face weaker
income prospects. Nonmortgage lending to
consumers, which declined for several years,
began growing in 2010, driven by nonrevolving
credit (Chart 4.1.7). The amount of revolving
credit available to consumers has been

20

2011 FSOC Annual Report

4.1.8 Credit Card Limit and Outstanding Balance
Chart 4.1.8 Credit Card Limitand Outstanding Balance

substantially reduced, although aggregate
borrowing capacity remains considerable
(Chart 4.1.8). Demand for auto financing
has risen along with the increase in vehicle
purchases from the lows of the crisis. Student
loan volumes increased during the downturn
in part because of rising enrollments and
increased tuition costs; these volumes have
been increasingly supported by governmentguaranteed loan programs.
Real Estate and Mortgage Markets

Chart 4.1.9 Single-Family New Home Starts and Sales

Chart 4.1.10 Distressed Sales Share of Total Home Sales

The housing sector remains depressed. To
date, real residential investment has fallen
nearly 60 percent since its peak in early 2006.
Housing starts and sales of new homes have
remained near record low levels, and distressed
sales have increased, recently comprising 46
percent of all sales (Charts 4.1.9 and 4.1.10).
As a result of the pullback in mortgage lending
and an elevated level of charge-offs, overall
mortgage debt outstanding contracted for two
years (Chart 4.1.11).
Home prices face continued downward
pressure from excess inventory, lackluster
demand, and distressed sales, in part coming
from foreclosures. After stabilizing in late
2009 and early 2010, home prices have
fallen further since the summer of 2010. The
CoreLogic repeat sales home price index,
which is representative of conforming and
non-conforming mortgages, is back down to
its mid-2003 levels, about one-third below its
2006 peak (Chart 4.1.12). The Federal Reserve
Board’s Senior Loan Officer Opinion Survey for
April 2011 showed that demand for residential
mortgages at banks continued to decrease.
Some of the housing market fundamentals
have shown signs of improvement. Indexes of
affordability based on current interest rates,
median incomes, and median home prices have
risen to historic highs (Chart 4.1.13). The very
low levels of new home construction in recent
years have helped trim the backlog of excess
new homes for sale. In addition, the unusually
low levels of household formation over the past
several years could reverse once the labor
market improves sufficiently, suggesting the
possibility of pent-up demand for housing.
Macroeconomic Environment

21

Chart 4.1.11 Net Consumer Sector Credit Flows

Chart 4.1.12 National Repeat Sales Home Price Indexes

More than offsetting the developments in these
fundamentals, ongoing operational deficiencies
and legal challenges in the processing of
foreclosure filings have significantly slowed
the foreclosure process, adding to a growing
inventory of distressed properties. Moreover,
the government-sponsored enterprises (GSEs)
Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac, as well as the
Federal Housing Administration (FHA) and
the Department of Veterans Affairs (VA)—
which together account for the guarantee
and insurance of more than 90 percent of
originations—have tightened their underwriting
standards. Standards have been tightened
across product, credit score, and loan-tovalue (LTV) spectrums, and fewer loans with
low down payments are being guaranteed.
FICO scores on mortgage originations have
risen sharply, reflecting the tighter underwriting
standards as well as the characteristics of
borrowers who are applying for credit (Chart
4.1.14).
On the other hand, FHA/VA loans, which
typically have higher LTVs and hence greater
risk compared with GSE loans, have gained a
larger share of the market, rising from 3 percent
of total market originations in 2005 to more
than 30 percent in mid-2010.

4.1.13 Housing Affordability Index
Chart 4.1.13 Housing Affordability Index

National commercial real estate (CRE)
markets also weakened dramatically during
the credit crisis and recession. Moody’s/
REAL commercial property price index fell
by about 45 percent from its 2007 peak
(Chart 4.1.15). Sales activity also decreased
sharply: commercial property transactions
fell 89 percent to $66 billion in 2009 from a
peak of $579 billion in 2007. A combination of
weaker cash flows, lower collateral values, and
tightened underwriting standards since 2008
has made it more difficult for CRE owners to
refinance their debt, putting further stress on
the market. Since mid-2008, bank lending to
finance commercial property has fallen by 50
percent. One-quarter of recent CRE activity
has involved distressed properties.
Commercial mortgage-backed security (CMBS)
issuers account for nearly 25 percent of the
total CRE debt. Reflecting the credit crisis

22

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 4.1.14 Median Credit Score at Mortgage Origination

4.1.15 Commercial Property Price Indexes
Chart 4.1.15 Commercial Property Price Indexes

and economic stress, issuance of CMBS
in the United States was only $2.7 billion in
2009 and $11.6 billion in 2010, well below the
approximately $200 billion issued in both 2006
and 2007 (Chart 4.1.16).
Recently, the commercial property market has
shown tentative signs of recovery, with more
sales activity among higher quality, well-leased
properties in major metropolitan markets, as
well as signs of increased demand for and
supply of commercial property loan financing.
The Senior Loan Officer Opinion Survey for
April 2011 showed that about 35 percent of
domestic banks on net had seen increased
demand for CRE loans, and a few large banks
and foreign banks had eased their lending
standards somewhat, although outstanding
bank commercial property loans have continued
to fall.
Securitization Markets
Much of the large increase in credit leading
up to the financial crisis was driven by an
expansion of securitized credit, particularly in
the mortgage market. During this time, financial
market participants and regulators tended to
view securitization favorably: it allowed banks
to reduce their exposure to certain types of
loans, redistributing those risks to investors
who were more willing to handle them and
lowering the borrowing costs for households
and businesses.

Chart 4.1.16 CMBS New Issuance

However, the crisis revealed deep flaws in
the implementation of securitization. For
example, banks and other firms that originated
mortgages and packaged them into residential
mortgage-backed securities (RMBS) for sale
to investors often did not retain an interest in
those mortgages and, thus, had no incentive
to adequately monitor the performance of the
originated mortgages. In the years before the
crisis, underwriting standards deteriorated and
nontraditional mortgage products proliferated
(Chart 4.1.17).
The private-label (non-GSE) RMBS market
collapsed in 2007 after house prices began to
fall, which led to greater and more correlated

Macroeconomic Environment

23

Chart 4.1.17 Private-Label RMBS Gross Issuance
4.1.17 Private-Label RMBS Gross Issuance

Chart 4.1.18 GSE and Private-Label RMBS Gross Issuance

delinquencies of nontraditional mortgages
and thus reduced the value of these securities
considerably. This market remains severely
impaired and has affected other assetbacked securities markets. In the absence
of strong offsetting developments, the lack
of a meaningful rebound to overall private
sector securitization activity is likely to have
implications for the types of lending or feebased activities that banks will choose to
engage in and, in turn, for the future cost and
level of credit intermediation (Chart 4.1.18).
For nearly all asset classes, securitization
activity remains at levels well below those that
prevailed before the crisis. Recent issuance
has been concentrated in securitizations of
consumer auto loan and lease receivables, as
well as resecuritizations of real estate mortgage
investment conduits, which are repackaged
CMBS and RMBS.
4.1.2 Risk Transfer
The financial system provides risk transfer
services to the economy through a wide
range of insurance and derivatives products.
Certain credit risk transfer products played
an important role in exacerbating the financial
crisis and have not returned to their pre-crisis
form.
A key role of financial markets and institutions
is to allocate risk efficiently across households
and businesses. The insurance market is a
key market in financial risk transfer. Unlike
most cases of credit intermediation, in which
borrowers receive a large payment at the
start and then repay the obligation over time,
insurance policies typically involve upfront
customer payments (premiums) in exchange for
a contractual promise from the insurer to pay
benefits upon a specified event in the future.
The traditional U.S. insurance market largely
functioned without disruption in payments to
consumers throughout the financial crisis and
the recovery.
Derivative contracts have become another
important source of risk transfer in the financial
system. The market for these contracts, which

24

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 4.1.19 OTC Derivatives
4.1.19 OTC Derivatives

Chart 4.1.20 OTC Derivatives Growth

may be traded on exchanges or over the
counter (OTC), has grown significantly over the
past 10 years. Gross notional volume amounts
of OTC derivatives contracts peaked in June
2008 at over $670 trillion. Derivatives—whose
value can be based on interest rates, foreign
exchange, credit, equities, and commodities—
have long been used by financial and
nonfinancial institutions for both risk insurance
(hedging) and risk acquisition (speculation)
purposes, enabling risks to be traded globally
(Charts 4.1.19, 4.1.20, and 4.1.21). While
OTC derivatives markets, with the exception of
credit risk transfer products, were not a central
cause of the crisis and did not experience any
specific clearing or settlement failures, they
were a factor in the propagation of risks, as
their complexity and opacity contributed to
excessive risk taking and a lack of clarity about
the ultimate distribution of risks, exacerbating a
loss in confidence.
Credit Risk Transfer Products

Chart 4.1.21 Distribution of OTC Derivatives

The rapid growth in the private-label RMBS
market in the years preceding the financial
crisis was enabled by two market innovations:
collateralized debt obligations (CDOs), which
are instruments to bundle pieces of previously
issued asset-backed securities, and credit
default swaps, which are credit derivatives.
By allocating credit risks in complex ways that
market participants, credit rating agencies,
and regulators did not understand well, these
products contributed to the buildup of the
housing boom, the severity of the subsequent
bust, and the broadening of the financial crisis
beyond its origins in the subprime mortgage
market.
Private-label RMBS and CDOs shared two key
characteristics. First, they combined many
assets into pools, which should have helped
diversify the risks of loss. Second, they were
sold to investors in tranches that varied in
risk and return, with payments going first to
senior tranche investors. The independent
credit rating agencies played an important
role in this process by giving the vast majority
of these securities their highest rating (e.g.,
AAA), anticipating that junior tranche investors

Macroeconomic Environment

25

Chart 4.1.22 Private-Label Residential MBS Exposures
4.1.22 Private-Label Residential MBS Exposures

Chart 4.1.23 Ownership of Investment Grade Subordinates in
RMBS and ABS CDOs (June 2007)

4.1.24 ABS Structured Finance CDO Issuance
Chart 4.1.24 ABS StructuredFinanceCDO Issuance

would cover expected losses based on the low
historical default rates for residential mortgages,
the diversification of the asset pools, and the
assumption that house prices would generally
continue to rise.
During the mortgage boom, senior tranches
of RMBS attracted broad classes of investors,
including banks, insurance companies, and
GSEs (Chart 4.1.22). The riskier juniorinvestment-grade tranches of RMBS were
typically pooled by investment banks and
purchased by CDOs (Chart 4.1.23). Although
most of the securities issued by these CDOs also
received the highest credit rating (again, based
on the presumed benefits of diversification),
senior CDO tranches had a very different investor
base from senior RMBS tranches. They were
typically retained by the originating bank or sold
with liquidity or credit guarantees provided by
the originating bank or with insurance written by
a segment of the insurance industry known as
financial guarantors. In many cases, the credit
rating agencies based their high ratings on these
securities on the availability of these guarantees.
Junior-investment-grade CDO tranches were
typically purchased by other CDOs.
An important component in maintaining this
structure during the mortgage boom was credit
default swaps (CDS). Financial institutions and
investors purchased CDS to help manage their
risks from RMBS and CDO securities. The
insurance conglomerate AIG was a large seller
of these CDS. In addition, synthetic CDOs grew
rapidly during the pre-crisis period. These were
derivative-linked CDOs that packaged long
positions in CDS referencing RMBS or CDO
securities; if the underlying securities did not
perform, the synthetic CDO investors would
lose money as if the CDOs owned positions in
actual securities (Chart 4.1.24).
The result of this complex and opaque system
was that a surprising amount of the credit risk
in the mortgage market was concentrated in
senior CDO tranches held or guaranteed by
the banks that created CDOs and by a small
number of financial guarantors. These large
institutions and other investors in MBS and
CDOs suffered billions of dollars in losses

26

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 4.1.25 Impaired MBSand CDO Securities
4.1.25 Impaired MBS and CDO Securities

when mortgage defaults across the country
exceeded expectations and the performance of
diverse pools of RMBS turned out to be highly
correlated. By the end of 2009, $319 billion of
subprime and Alt-A MBS had been materially
impaired, as had $479 billion of CDOs that
invested in MBS (Chart 4.1.25).
The market for CDOs has not recovered since
the crisis. The financial guarantors, with one
exception, are not currently providing such
guarantees and appear unlikely to return to the
market in the near term. However, the broader
market for CDS referencing the risk of default
by corporate entities remains robust.
4.1.3 Transactions and Payment Services to
Households and Businesses

4.1.26 Noncash Retail Payments: 2006
Chart 4.1.26 Noncash RetailPayments: 2006

4.1.27 Noncash Retail Payments: 2009
Chart 4.1.27 Noncash RetailPayments: 2009

Transaction and retail payment services, which
facilitate a high volume of payments across
the financial system, functioned well during
the crisis.
Depository institutions provide a variety of
retail payment services to consumers and
businesses, such as check, debit card, credit
card, automated clearing house, and prepaid
card transaction services. Retail payments,
which are characterized by high volumes
but low average dollar transaction values,
have undergone significant technological and
financial innovation in recent years, changing
how they are transacted. According to the
most recent Federal Reserve Payments
Study, the estimated number of noncash
payments totaled $109 billion in 2009, with a
total value of approximately $72 trillion. More
than three-quarters of these retail payments,
by volume, were made electronically, a 9.3
percentage point increase since 2006 (Charts
4.1.26 and 4.1.27). Retail payments depend
critically on consumer and business accounts
at depository institutions that are used for
transaction purposes.
While there have been a number of bank, thrift,
and credit union failures—including several highprofile failures or near-failures of large complex
financial institutions—the FDIC and the NCUA
were able to prevent any disruptions in retail

Macroeconomic Environment

27

4.1.28 Money Market Funds and Checking Deposits
Chart 4.1.28 Money Market Funds and Checking Deposits

payments and transaction services as a result
of the failure, or fear of failure, of an insured
depository institution. In contrast, certain parts
of the financial system, such as prime money
market funds, experienced the equivalent of a
bank run in late 2008 (Chart 4.1.28).
The Transaction Account Guarantee Program
(TAGP) brought stability and confidence to
deposit accounts that are commonly used
for payroll and other business transaction
purposes. Through the TAGP, the FDIC
guaranteed, for a fee, noninterest-bearing
transaction accounts held at participating
insured depository institutions. More than 7,100
banks and thrifts, or 86 percent of FDIC-insured
institutions, initially opted into the program.
The Dodd-Frank Act replaced TAGP with a
provision mandating unlimited deposit insurance
coverage without a separate fee through
December 2012 for certain noninterest-bearing
accounts at all insured depository institutions.

4.2 Private Nonfinancial Sector
Balance Sheets
The ability of households and businesses
to repay loans depends on the income they
generate from productive activities and on
their net worth: the value of their assets less
liabilities. If income from productive activities
does not meet expectations, as occurred during
the recession, the ability to repay falls more
heavily on net worth.
Corporate income has recovered more quickly
than household and small business income,
and corporate balance sheets were less
exposed to the decline in real estate values. The
decrease in real estate and other asset values
has increased the leverage of the household
sector, the debt levels of which had increased
in the years before the crisis. Low interest rates
and extended unemployment benefits have
mitigated some of the loss of income and the
decline in asset values.
4.2.1 Business Sector
The levels of debt to net worth in the
corporate and noncorporate business sectors,

28

2011 FSOC Annual Report

4.2.1 Corporate Credit Market Debt Net Worth
Chart 4.2.1 Corporate CreditMarket Debt toto Net Worth

which spiked during the downturn as a result
of deteriorating asset values, remain elevated
but are showing modest improvement.
Corporate
Nonfinancial corporate balance sheets
deteriorated significantly during the downturn,
as leverage reached historical highs, primarily
because of unprecedented declines in the
value of assets held by these firms. Corporate
balance sheets have recovered somewhat
over recent quarters. Nevertheless, leverage
has decreased only modestly and remains at
elevated levels, as the value of assets in the
sector have increased only moderately faster
than liabilities (Chart 4.2.1).

Chart 4.2.2 Financial Ratios for Nonfinancial Corporations

Chart 4.2.3 Nonfinancial Corporate Bond Default Rate

Since mid-2009, corporations have generated
strong profit growth and improved cash flow,
reflecting the impact of aggressive cost-cutting,
moderate revenue growth, and lower interest
costs. This has driven equity market valuations
back to near pre-crisis levels and has allowed
nonfinancial corporations to increase capital
through retained earnings. These developments
have also allowed corporations to significantly
bolster their liquidity (Chart 4.2.2).
Nonfinancial corporate balance sheets were in
relatively good condition entering the crisis. As
a result, the corporate bond default rate, which
spiked to a similar level as that in the previous
recession, was lower than expected given the
severity of this recession, particularly compared
with the level implied from bond prices in early
2009 (Charts 4.1.4 and 4.2.3). Since the
crisis, high-yield issuers have improved their
ability to cover their debt payments out of
cash flow. These firms also have only a limited
amount of debt maturing over the near term
and (as discussed in Section 4.1.1) benefit from
improved financing conditions.
Noncorporate
Balance sheets in the noncorporate sector,
composed primarily of small businesses, were
adversely affected by the credit crisis and
recession owing to poor sales, declines in asset
values, and a reduction in credit availability.

Macroeconomic Environment

29

Chart 4.2.4 Noncorporate Assets

Chart 4.2.5 Noncorporate Credit Market Debt to Net Worth

In the aggregate, the assets of small businesses
are composed primarily of real estate (Chart
4.2.4). Consequently, the sharp drop in real
estate values during the crisis had a severe
impact on the balance sheets of many small
businesses and led to a sharp increase in
the measured leverage of small businesses.
Leverage in this sector has fallen only modestly
since then and remains well above its pre-crisis
levels (Chart 4.2.5).
Small businesses generally have less access
than corporations to capital markets and thus
depend more on bank financing. Therefore,
the improvements in the functioning of
corporate bond markets have had little direct
positive impact on the small business sector.
Also, continued strains in the banking sector,
particularly for smaller community banks,
have constrained credit availability for small
businesses. According to the Federal Reserve
Board’s Senior Loan Officer Opinion Survey,
loan standards to small firms, which were
tightened sharply during the crisis, have not
been loosened to any significant extent over the
past year.
The Senior Loan Officer Opinion Survey also
indicates that the demand for bank loans from
small businesses has not picked up much
over the past year. The weakness in demand
probably reflects two main factors. First,
because many small business loans are secured
by real estate collateral, declines in real estate
prices have affected available collateral, which
may prevent small businesses from seeking
loans. Second, small businesses still report
weak sales; in the latest NFIB survey, nearly
one-quarter of respondents cited poor sales as
their primary problem.
4.2.2 Household Sector
Household net worth increased over the year
through the first quarter of 2011, as equity
values increased and debt levels decreased
modestly. The burden of debt payments
relative to income has improved. However,
mortgage-related debt remains high relative to
the value of housing. Households have taken
on more debt to fund college education.

30

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 4.2.6 Household and Nonprofit Balance Sheets

4.2.7 Share of Owners’ Equity in Household Real Estate
Chart 4.2.7 Share of Owners’Equity in Household Real Estate

In the aggregate, household balance sheets
are recovering, with net worth increasing
moderately over the year through the first
quarter of 2011 after large falls in 2008
and 2009. Declines in housing wealth have
restrained the increase in aggregate net worth,
which has been driven primarily by a rebound in
stock values from their March 2009 lows (Chart
4.2.6). However, the recovery in household
balance sheets has not been evenly distributed
across income levels, particularly for lower
income households that do not have much
participation in equity markets. Because of the
continued weakness in home prices, owners’
equity in housing has remained near a record
low of approximately 40 percent since mid2008, more than 20 percentage points lower
than its average over 1990–2005 (Chart 4.2.7).
Consumer debt outstanding, driven primarily by
mortgages, peaked in 2008 and has declined
by about $1 trillion. In part, this decline is the
result of households’ active efforts to reduce
their debt levels. But it also reflects the impact
of foreclosures, which have removed mortgage
debt from household balance sheets.
Many homeowners who were delinquent on
their mortgages have been able to lower their
payments through government and private
modification programs. Nearly five million
mortgage modification arrangements were
started between April 2009 and the end of April
2011, which is more than double the number
of foreclosure completions for the same period
(2.1 million), although some homeowners
may have received help from more than one
program. More than 730,000 homeowners
have received permanent modifications under
the Troubled Asset Relief Program’s Home
Affordable Modification Program, with estimated
median savings of about 37 percent, or $525
per month per homeowner. Others have been
helped by government programs to modify
second liens or to encourage foreclosure
alternatives, such as short sales and deedsin lieu. Still, with about 2.5 million mortgages
entering the foreclosure process annually
in recent years, many homeowners remain
financially stressed.

Macroeconomic Environment

31

4.2.8 Household Debt Service Ratio
Chart 4.2.8 Household Debt Service Ratio

4.2.9 Household Financial Obligations Ratio
Chart 4.2.9 Household Financial Obligations Ratio

Deleveraging by households, along with
low interest rates and the extension of
unemployment benefits, has helped households
meet their debt obligations. The household
debt service ratio (the ratio of household debt
payments to disposable income) has fallen
sharply, highlighting the improved ability of
households to make debt payments (Chart
4.2.8). The financial obligations ratio (which
measures a household’s ability to service a
broader measure of commitments, including rent
payments and homeowners’ insurance) has also
fallen since 2007. These declines signal that,
overall, both homeowners and renters are better
able to meet their financial commitments than
they were in the pre-crisis period (Chart 4.2.9).
Education loans are the only major consumer
debt category to have increased over the
past three years (Chart 4.2.10). Increased
college tuition costs and a finite pool of grants
have, in part, resulted in increased demand
for student loans. Repayment ability depends
on both the completion rate of educational
programs and labor market conditions over the
repayment period. Unlike revolving credit card
debt, student loan debt generally cannot be
discharged in bankruptcy. Education lending
has been increasingly provided by federal
government-guaranteed loan programs.

4.3 Government Balance
Sheets
Chart 4.2.10 Outstanding Balances of Consumer Loans

The recent recession produced a marked
deterioration in finances at all levels of
government in the United States. Global
financial markets have been able to readily
accommodate the substantial increase in U.S.
federal debt. With interest rates low, the current
financing costs of government debt are small.
All levels of government face challenges in
achieving and maintaining sustainable budgets,
particularly with growing future obligations as
the baby boom generation ages and retires.
4.3.1 Federal
Federal government debt has increased for a
number of reasons, including the direct effects
of the recession and the fiscal interventions to
prevent a deeper recession.

32

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 4.3.1 Total Treasury Market Turnover

4.3.2 Federal Government Debt Held by the Public

Chart 4.3.2 Federal Government Debt Held by the Public

Chart 4.3.3 Outlays and Revenues Using CBO Projections

The U.S. federal government is the largest
issuer of debt in the world. This mainly reflects
the large size of the U.S. economy relative to
the rest of the world. The size of the market
for U.S. debt, its liquidity, and the long-term
stability and flexibility of the U.S. economy
have made the U.S. dollar the dominant global
reserve asset (see Chart 4.3.1 and Box A:
U.S. Dollar as the International Reserve
Asset).
In fiscal year (FY) 2007, the federal government
had a deficit of 1.2 percent of GDP and net
debt outstanding of $5.02 trillion. In FY2010,
the deficit increased to 8.9 percent of GDP;
it is projected to remain around this level in
FY2011. At the end of FY2010, net public debt
outstanding reached $9.01 trillion, 62 percent
of GDP (Chart 4.3.2). Total public outstanding
debt increased from $9.00 trillion in FY2007 to
$13.56 trillion in FY2010. In May 2011, total
Treasury debt reached the limit set by Congress
in February 2010.
Much of the increase in the debt was driven
by the direct effects of the recession on
revenues and expenditures, and the use of
fiscal policy to mitigate some of the risks of a
deeper recession. A small part of the increase
in debt is due to direct government assistance
to the financial sector, mainly in the form of
capital provided to Fannie Mae and Freddie
Mac, the two large GSEs. The Congressional
Budget Office estimates that the net cost of
the Troubled Asset Relief Program will be less
than 0.25 percent of GDP. The assistance to
the financial sector resulted in the government
accumulating financial assets.
Even before the recession and the attendant
increase in the deficit, government finances
were acknowledged to be on an unsustainable
path, partly owing to the increased expenditures
for Medicare and Social Security anticipated
with the aging of the baby-boom generation.
The unsustainable path of government debt
under the continuation of certain revenue
and expenditure policies is widely recognized
(Charts 4.3.2 and 4.3.3). The need for longrun fiscal balance has been a focus of recent

Macroeconomic Environment

33

Box A: U.S. Dollar as the International Reserve Asset
The United States and the rest of the global financial system continue to receive important benefits from the role
of the dollar as the principal international reserve asset.
The U.S. dollar is the world’s most actively traded
currency in foreign exchange markets and the main
reserve asset held by foreign central banks and finance
ministries. This has been true since the end of World
War II.
The attraction of U.S. assets for foreign investors
reflects the large size and stability of the U.S. economy
and the relative stability of U.S. economic and political
institutions. It also reflects the fact that the United
States has the world’s largest and most liquid financial
markets. One measure of this liquidity is average daily
trading volume in the Treasury market, which remained
robust through the financial crisis (Chart 4.3.1). These
characteristics are highly valued by global investors and,
in times of financial market turmoil such as the recent
crisis, investors often use U.S. assets as a safe haven.
The dollar’s share of “known allocated” global reserves
adjusted for exchange rate fluctuations has generally
exceeded 70 percent. Without adjusting for valuation
effects from exchange rate fluctuations, the share has
declined over the past decade from approximately
70 percent to just over 60 percent (Chart A.1). The

Chart A.1 U.S. Dollar Share of Allocated Reserves

A.1 U.S. Dollar Share of Allocated Reserves

Chart A.2 Currencies in Allocated Global Reserves

dollar has maintained its dominant role even as global
reserve assets have increased rapidly in the last 10
years (Chart A.2).
The value of all U.S. securities held by foreign investors,
public and private, totaled $10.7 trillion as of June
2010, an increase of $1.1 trillion from June 2009.
Some of this increase represented net purchases,
while valuation changes in bonds and equities also
contributed. Foreign holdings of all U.S. securities were
estimated at $11.3 trillion as of April 2011, and foreign
holdings of U.S. Treasury securities totaled $4.5 trillion,
or just under half of publicly held net federal government
debt. These large holdings lower the cost of funding
the current U.S. account deficit. In fact, net investment
income received by the United States from the rest of
the world was estimated to be $174 billion in 2010.
The U.S. and global financial systems receive important
benefits from the role of dollar assets. While foreign
investors benefit from the liquidity in U.S. financial
markets, they are also an important source of that
liquidity. High demand from abroad for Treasuries lowers
the cost of funding for the U.S. government.

34

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 4.3.4 Interest Rate Payer Skew
4.3.4 Interest Rate Payer Skew

Chart 4.3.5 Interest Outlays and Average Maturity

Chart 4.3.6 Outright Holdings of Domestic Assets in the SOMA

attention from credit rating agencies. Current
pricing of U.S. government debt implies that
markets assume a long-term solution to the
fiscal imbalance will be found and that, in the
short run, the debt limit will be raised without
disrupting market functioning (Chart 4.3.4).
Despite the large increase in public debt
outstanding, net interest costs as a percentage
of GDP fell to 1.34 percent in FY2010, below
the 2.97 percent average observed in the 1990s
(Chart 4.3.5). This decline reflects the fact
that interest rates have fallen considerably and
remain near historically low levels. The average
maturity of marketable debt outstanding has
risen in the past two years from a low of 49
months to its current level of 62 months. This
is modestly above the 30-year average of 58
months but below the average maturity of
outstanding debt in other developed countries.
Over the past three years, the balance sheet
of the Federal Reserve has also grown. At first,
much of this growth was driven by liquidity
support to the financial sector; recently, growth
has been sustained by the monetary policy tool
of large-scale asset purchases (Chart 4.3.6).
During the financial crisis, the Federal Reserve
was granted immediate authority to pay
interest on reserve balances held by depository
institutions. As of June 30, 2011, reserve
balances stood at about $1.62 trillion. While
the current interest rate on these reserves is 25
basis points, it is below the average interest rate
(across all Treasury debt maturities) of around
3 percent paid by the federal government.
Incorporating these liabilities would lower the
average maturity of the federal government’s
debt obligations.
4.3.2 State and Local
Municipal governments experienced varying
degrees of stress during the downturn.
States are rebalancing budgets as federal
government support is withdrawn; local
governments are recovering more slowly. The
municipal debt market has been strained amid
concerns about state and local government
finances. Longer term challenges associated
with retirement benefits owed to government
employees remain.
Macroeconomic Environment

35

Chart 4.3.7 Municipal Liabilities as a Percent of GDP

State constitutions generally require balanced
operating budgets, but states and localities
may issue long-term debt to finance activities
such as investments in bridges, schools, and
other public infrastructure projects. In addition,
certain public and quasi-private authorities can
issue municipal debt to finance their activities.
Total outstanding municipal debt from all
sources is $3 trillion, which is about 20 percent
of GDP, up from record lows in 2000 but in
line with average levels from the mid-1980s to
the mid-1990s (Chart 4.3.7). The annual rate
of increase in total state and local debt has
slowed markedly from an average of 9 percent
in 2001–07 to an annual average rate of less
than 4 percent since 2008, although some
municipalities’ debt loads have increased much
more than the average.
Municipal bonds are broadly divided into
general obligation (G.O.) and revenue bonds.
G.O. bonds, with approximately $1 trillion
outstanding, are secured by the full faith and
credit of the issuer, meaning that the issuer
(typically a government with the power to levy
taxes) is committed to raising revenue sufficient
to repay. Revenue bonds are more common,
with approximately $2 trillion outstanding; they
are secured by a defined stream of revenues
from a particular project and possibly by the
project itself. Revenue bonds are the principal
instrument for special-purpose and quasiprivate entities. Because of their narrower and
less certain revenue support, municipal projects
that depend on increases in use (e.g., new toll
roads) or increases in property values (e.g.,
tax increment bonds), or those with a tie to a
corporate entity (e.g., industrial development
bonds), are generally riskier than revenue bonds
related to the provision of essential services
(e.g., water/sewer revenue bonds).
States rely on cyclically sensitive income and
sales taxes for over half of their revenue. The
lower level of economic activity during the
recession had a significant adverse effect on
these revenues from 2007 through the first half
of 2010. Part of the decrease was absorbed
by the federal government, which provided,
on average, $53 billion in annual support to
municipalities from FY2009 to FY2011, and

36

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 4.3.8 State Tax Revenue

Chart 4.3.9 City General Fund Revenues and Expenditures

bridged approximately a third of state budget
shortfalls in 2010. Tax revenue is recovering
and states are going through the process
of rebalancing revenues and expenditures
as federal government support is withdrawn
(Chart 4.3.8).
Local governments and smaller municipal
issuers are more vulnerable as they have
smaller tax bases than states and are less
able to raise revenue (Chart 4.3.9). Cities are
currently facing reductions in state aid, on
which they have historically relied for 30 percent
of their funding. They also face declining
property tax collections, traditionally their
largest independent source of revenue, due to
the sustained declines in real estate values and
lower sales tax revenue (Chart 4.3.10). Funding
has also become more difficult to obtain
for single-purpose entities such as hospital
authorities.
Despite the strains induced by the recession,
municipal bond defaults are historically low.
Defaults are associated with smaller municipal
entities in geographic areas hardest hit by the
housing crisis and recession. Also, defaults
are more common for municipal projects that
relied on future growth that did not materialize,
or revenue bonds backed by issuers with
corporate credit characteristics, such as
industrial development bonds, pollution control
bonds, or bonds in the health care sector (see
Box B: Municipal Debt Market).

Chart 4.3.10 City General Fund Tax Receipts

State and local governments face longer term
challenges associated with the unfunded
portion of future benefits owed to their
employees. With high equity valuations in
2000, state pension systems were considered
more than adequately funded; however, by
2008, declines in asset values led to significant
underfunding, and approximately 80 percent of
states failed to make their actuarially required
contributions to their pension funds. Estimates
of the unfunded portion of state and local
retirement liabilities range from $1 trillion to
$3 trillion. Other postemployment benefits
represent an additional $0.5 trillion to $0.9
trillion in unfunded liabilities. The widening
unfunded portion of pension obligations

Macroeconomic Environment

37

Box B: Municipal Debt Market
The municipal bond market provides a critical source of private capital for state and local governments and
certain nongovernment issuers.
Municipal bonds may be exempt from federal, state,
and local taxes if the proceeds of such bonds are used
by a government unit for its own purposes and if the
property financed by the bonds will be owned by the
government unit. Generally, with some exceptions,
bonds that do not meet these standards are considered
private activity bonds and are not tax-exempt.
Furthermore, some types of private activity bonds that
are exempt from the regular tax may be subject to the
alternative minimum tax.
Most municipal debt issuance is tax-exempt (Chart
B.1), which has made it an attractive class for retail
investors. As a result of the financial crisis, the market
has undergone significant structural changes that have
left it even more dependent on retail demand.

The auction rate securities (ARS) and tender option
bond (TOB) programs were large pre-crisis sources of
liquidity in the long end of the municipal bond market.
Like other off-balance-sheet maturity transformation
vehicles, these were almost completely eliminated in the
financial crisis, as banks and other investors became
less willing to assume the associated credit and interest
rate risks. As a result, many municipal bond issuers
replaced auction rate debt and insured VRDOs with
uninsured VRDOs supported by liquidity facilities. These
facilities generally have terms of three years, and many
of the facilities originated in 2008–09 are currently up
for renewal (Chart B.2).
Chart B.2 ARS and VRDO Funding of Long-Term Muni Bonds

Municipal bonds may have fixed or variable interest
rates, or they may be zero coupon bonds. Many
variable rate municipal bonds give investors the right
to put the bond back to the issuer. Such securities are
known as variable rate demand obligations (VRDOs).
If the investor exercises the put, a remarketing agent
sells the bonds to another investor. If the bonds cannot
be resold, either a bond insurer or a liquidity facility
provides the funds for the issuer to purchase the bonds.
Chart B.1 Issuance by Tax Status

Following significant dislocations experienced by the
municipal market in 2008 and early 2009, the federal
government launched the Build America Bonds (BAB)
program to stimulate infrastructure spending and ease
the pressure on the municipal bond market. The BAB
program was designed to broaden the municipal bond
investor base beyond those who typically invest in
municipal bonds by providing a federal subsidy that
allowed municipal borrowers to issue long-term taxable
bonds. Specifically, municipal borrowers could issue
long-term taxable bonds for capital expenditure instead

38

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Box B: Municipal Debt Market

of tax-exempt bonds, with the federal government
rebating 35 percent of the taxable interest expense
directly back to the issuer.
The program played an important role in increasing
the investor base for municipal bonds and indirectly
provided support for the long-term tax-exempt
municipal market by limiting the amount of taxexempt supply. During the first three quarters of 2010,
borrowing costs for 30-year municipal issuance fell by
45 basis points, and nearly $500 million flowed into
municipal bond mutual funds.
However, in advance of the BAB program’s expiry on
December 31, 2010, expectations that supply would
shift back to the tax-exempt market pressured yields
higher. At the same time, widespread press and analyst
commentary on the credit conditions of state and local
governments began to trigger sharp outflows from retail
municipal bond mutual funds (Chart B.3). Muni-toTreasury yields, which had already become increasingly
differentiated, rose further for some issuers to levels
well above their long-term average of 85 percent (Chart
B.4). Even though most municipal bond investors
generally employ negligible levels of leverage, there
were reports of forced selling at distressed levels as
some mutual funds struggled to meet redemptions.

The increasing speed of redemptions created concern
about municipalities’ ability to issue certain short-term
debt instruments called revenue anticipation notes,
which cover the mismatch between revenue collections
and operating expenditures. However, relatively
attractive valuations induced investors to enter the taxexempt space, and demand from crossover institutional
buyers helped counteract redemptions from tax-exempt
mutual funds, although these have since recovered.
Going forward, structural issues with the municipal
bond investor base remain. Long-term debt generally
is not attractive to retail investors. As VRDOs expire,
and without maturity transformation structures such as
ARS and TOB, it is unclear how cost-effective longer
term funding will be sourced through the municipal
bond market.
Chart B.4 Municipal Tax-Exempt Bond Ratios

Chart B.3 Municipal Bond Flows

Macroeconomic Environment

39

Chart 4.4.1 Indebtedness andLeverage in Selected Advanced
4.4.2 Indebtedness and Leverage in Selected Advanced
Economies (April 2011)
Economies (April 2011)

increases the likelihood of changes in fiscal
policy, such as increases in tax revenues or
service reductions to close funding gaps.

4.4 External Environment
Many advanced economies face high debt
levels and an uneven recovery. Growth in
emerging market economies has rebounded
more quickly, with implications for capital flows
and the potential for overheating.

Chart 4.4.2 Real GDP Growth

The United States was not alone among
advanced countries in experiencing a large
increase in government debt during the financial
crisis, while private sector debt shrank or grew
at much slower rates than in previous years
(Charts 4.0.3 and 4.0.4). For some countries,
the direct cost of support to the financial sector
has been a large contributor to the increase in
government debt.
Starting in early 2010, financial markets
began to apply additional pressure on certain
peripheral European countries through sharply
higher government funding costs. Amid
considerable market turmoil in the spring of
2010, concerns over sovereign credit risk
came to the forefront (Chart C.2). European
authorities working with the International
Monetary Fund have developed financial
assistance packages for three countries and
established mechanisms to resolve future debt
problems in the euro area (see Box C: Country
Support Developments in Europe).

Chart 4.4.3 Emerging Markets: Public Debt to GDP

40

2011 FSOC Annual Report

The abilities of advanced countries to service
their debts without provoking sharp market
concerns are not exclusively related to total
public debt or current fiscal deficits. The size
of a country’s net external liabilities, the size
of the financial sector relative to GDP, and the
share of government debt held externally are
other considerations (Chart 4.4.1). Lingering
balance sheet weaknesses in the advanced
economies are limiting the pace of their
recoveries. The natural disaster in Japan has
not had widespread impacts on capital flows,
as markets effectively absorbed this exogenous
shock; but it has interrupted some international
supply chains.

4.4.4 Emerging Markets: Current Account
Chart 4.4.4 Emerging Markets:CurrentAccount

4.4.5 Private Capital Flows to Emerging Markets

Chart 4.4.5 Private Capital Flows to Emerging Markets

In contrast, most emerging market economies
(EMEs) have recovered strongly from the global
recession (Chart 4.4.2). Moreover, most EMEs
currently do not exhibit the macroeconomic
and balance sheet vulnerabilities that have
been associated with past EME crises, such as
large fiscal or current account deficits, banking
sector weaknesses, heavy debt burdens, or
significant currency and maturity mismatches.
However, some countries in emerging Europe
are still working through the aftermath of abrupt
reversals in financial and economic conditions
(Charts 4.4.3 and 4.4.4).
Nonetheless, prospects for sustained strong
capital inflows and moderately strong credit
growth in some EMEs present challenges. A
number of EMEs are now experiencing record
private capital inflows, spurred by their strong
growth prospects and by low interest rates in
the advanced economies (Chart 4.4.5).
To head off the risks of overheating, authorities
in many EMEs are tightening policy through
a number of channels, including interest rate
increases and macroprudential measures
such as restrictions on LTV ratios, stricter
lending criteria, and restraints on credit growth.
However, some policy actions pose difficult
trade-offs; for example, they may encourage
further capital inflows. Against this backdrop,
many countries continue to add to their large
holdings of foreign exchange reserves while
running current account surpluses, reflecting a
desire to limit currency appreciation against the
U.S. dollar (Chart 4.4.6).

Chart 4.4.6 EM Foreign Exchange Reserves Coverage

Macroeconomic Environment

41

Box C: Country Support Developments in Europe
In the wake of the financial crisis, several European countries have experienced severe macroeconomic and
financial challenges. These challenges have exposed tensions within the European Monetary Union and
limitations in the pre-crisis set of tools available to European policymakers to respond to economic and
financial stress.
The European Union (EU), supported by the International Monetary Fund (IMF), committed to lend €255.5
billion to help Greece, Ireland, and Portugal address their vulnerabilities through adjustment programs.
In addition, European leaders have agreed on a more comprehensive response that includes increased
emergency financing, new EU economic governance rules, and member country commitments to take
measures to support fiscal sustainability and competitiveness.
Vulnerabilities differ across the supported European
countries. Greece’s crisis has stemmed from
unsustainable growth in the public sector, fueled by
low-cost cross-border finance that has led to very large
fiscal deficits and public debt (Chart C.1). Portugal’s
public debt is more moderate, but its private and bank
debt is large. Even during periods of vibrant global
expansion, Portugal’s growth rates have been anemic,
and the structure of the economy is skewed toward
low value added industries. In Ireland, the collapse
of the property sector and a deep and prolonged
recession produced very large banking sector losses
and structural fiscal deficits. Irish government support
for the banking system has amounted to 46 percent of
GDP, which along with large fiscal deficits, has pushed
public debt close to 100 percent of GDP.
As of early 2008, markets were not significantly
differentiating among euro area countries, with 10year yields for Greece, Portugal, and Ireland trading at
just 10 to 30 basis points above those for Germany.
But Greek bond spreads surged following a late 2009
announcement by the Greek government that its budget
deficit would be more than three times the original
forecast (Chart C.2). Spreads have since increased
sharply in Ireland and Portugal. Markets remain attentive
to the risk of further contagion.
In May 2010, Europe launched a multipronged effort
to address the crisis, making two emergency financing
vehicles available to member states: the European

42

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart C.1 2009 Gross General Government Debt & Deficits

Financial Stability Facility (EFSF), with an initial effective
lending capacity of €255 billion, and the European
Financial Stability Mechanism (EFSM), with a capacity of
€60 billion. Adjustment programs are to be undertaken
jointly with the IMF.
In March 2011, European leaders announced
broad agreement on a more comprehensive debt
crisis response, which must be ratified by national
parliaments. The agreement covers three broad areas:
(1) an increase in emergency financing; (2) new EU
economic governance rules; and (3) a commitment by
countries to take additional policy measures on fiscal
sustainability and competitiveness.

Box C: Country Support Developments in Europe

Leaders committed to raise the EFSF’s lending capacity
to its notional cap of €440 billion. The European Stability
Mechanism (ESM) will become the permanent financing
vehicle in 2013, with €500 billion in lending capacity.
Lending under both the EFSF and the ESM requires
unanimous agreement by member countries and an
adjustment program with IMF participation.
Leaders agreed to enhanced EU surveillance of fiscal
sustainability and economic imbalances and to a broader
array of potential sanctions for noncompliance. Member
states also agreed to undertake structural reforms to
boost competitiveness, fiscal sustainability, employment,
and financial stability to safeguard the common currency.

In December 2010, Europe and the IMF committed
€67.5 billion to Ireland for budget support and to
finance a fundamental restructuring of the banking
sector. In May 2011, Portugal entered into a €78 billion
IMF/EU program for fiscal consolidation and extensive
structural reforms to boost growth.

Chart C.2 European Sovereign 10-year Spreads

Meanwhile, Europe and the IMF are extending financing
to the three countries most affected by the crisis.
Greece is receiving €110 billion in IMF and EU loans
while it undertakes fiscal adjustment and structural
reforms. Despite concerns about domestic support for
reform, the government enacted a fiscal consolidation of
5 percent of GDP last year, even as the economy shrank
by 4.4 percent.

Macroeconomic Environment

43

5	 Financial Developments

Over the past 30 years, the inner workings of the U.S. financial system grew increasingly
complex and interconnected amid technological advances and globalization. These
developments were generally intended to further facilitate the allocation of risk, increase
liquidity, and enhance pricing in order to improve the provision of financial services. But
the financial crisis illustrated that complex new forms of financial activity also can produce
instability and imbalances that can pose extraordinary costs to the real economy.
Most observers only became aware of these powerful destabilizing forces in the summer
of 2007, when the interbank market seized up (Chart 5.0.1). It took more than two years
of unprecedented interventions for financial markets to return to more normal functioning.
Chart 5.0.1 The Financial Crisis in the Interbank Market

5.1 Restoration of Private
Sector Funding and Capital
To maintain the key functions of the financial
system during the extraordinary disruptions
of the crisis, governments provided
unprecedented liquidity, guarantees, and capital
support to markets and institutions. With the
exception of housing finance, most of the
explicit U.S. government support has been
replaced by private sector sources.
Government support proved effective in
reducing the severity of the crisis. Congress
passed the Dodd-Frank Act to address the
weaknesses in the financial system revealed
during the financial crisis and to help prevent
another crisis. As Section 6 of this report
outlines, implementation of the Dodd-Frank Act
is progressing. The Dodd-Frank Act requires
enhanced capital requirements for financial
institutions and stronger supervision, risk
management, and disclosure standards for
the largest firms that pose the greatest risk to
the system. It also requires the establishment
of an orderly liquidation regime for financial
companies that otherwise might be perceived
as “too big to fail.” At the same time, the
Dodd-Frank Act eliminated several avenues
of government support for firms in a crisis to
improve market discipline.
Financial Developments

45

Chart 5.1.1 Federal Reserve Balance Sheet: Assets

Chart 5.1.2 Federal Reserve Facilities

Chart 5.1.3 US$ FX Swap Facility Usage Since Inception

5.1.1 Liquidity Support
Official support was first provided to banks to
address liquidity pressures. Liquidity programs
broadened to directly or indirectly support
the firms and related secondary markets that
had increasingly facilitated risk transfer in the
global financial system leading up to the crisis.
Liquidity support wound down in 2009 as
secondary markets returned to more normal
functioning.
The Federal Reserve provided substantial
liquidity support to global markets and
institutions (Chart 5.1.1). That support at first
was in the form of extended discount window
lending in new ways to banks and, then,
emergency lending to independent investment
banks that traditionally did not have access
to the discount window. Later, facilities were
introduced to deal with malfunctioning in
specific secondary markets—such as those
for repurchase agreements (repos), assetbacked commercial paper, and asset-backed
securities—and to support certain institutions.
Federal Reserve facilities were designed to
provide collateralized funding at rates above
those prevalent for creditworthy borrowers
when markets were functioning normally, but
below rates available to such borrowers when
markets were functioning poorly. Thus, as
secondary markets normalized, private sector
funding naturally replaced government funding.
Use of the facilities relative to announced
capacity varied widely, and some of them
stabilized markets with little or no drawdown
(Chart 5.1.2).
The first facilities, the Term Auction Facility
(TAF) and the central bank liquidity swap lines,
were introduced in late 2007 amid pronounced
strains in short-term wholesale funding markets.
The TAF provided term funding to depository
institutions with access to the Federal Reserve’s
primary credit facilities through an auction
process and helped to address domestic dollar
funding pressures.
The swap lines gave foreign central banks the
capacity to provide U.S. dollar funding directly
to institutions in their jurisdictions, enhancing

46

2011 FSOC Annual Report

5.1.4 EUR-USD FX Implied Basis Spreads
Chart 5.1.4 EUR-US$FX Implied Basis Spreads

U.S. financial stability by relieving pressures
in U.S. dollar funding markets and reducing
incentives for foreign financial institutions to
sell dollar assets at fire-sale prices. The swap
lines expired on February 1, 2010, as market
conditions normalized and the pricing of
funds from the facility became unattractive.
However, the Federal Open Market Committee
reauthorized currency swap lines in May 2010 in
response to the reemergence of strains in shortterm U.S. dollar funding markets associated
with the fiscal crisis in the peripheral euro area.
Use of the swap lines has been minimal since
May 2010, reaching a peak of $9.2 billion
compared with a previous peak of $586 billion
(Charts 5.1.3 and 5.1.4).

5.1.5 CPFF Support of Commercial Paper Market

Among the many new facilities that were
introduced at the height of the crisis, the
Commercial Paper Funding Facility (CPFF)
and Term Asset-Backed Securities Loan
Facility (TALF) involved a wide range of market
participants. For example, the CPFF helped
financial and nonfinancial firms meet short-term
funding requirements by offering collateralized
liquidity directly to both secured and unsecured
commercial paper (CP) issuers when private
markets were frozen after the failure of Lehman
Brothers in September 2008. The CPFF selfliquidated according to plan, falling from
20 percent of the market at its peak to less
than 1 percent by late 2009 (Chart 5.1.5).
Improvements in market conditions over time,
evidenced by contracting spreads, allowed
some borrowers to obtain financing from private
investors (Chart 5.1.6). However, decreased
use of the CPFF was also driven by a significant
decline in the supply of commercial paper, as
issuers reduced the size of CP programs and
other sources of funding became available.

Chart 5.1.5 CPFF Support of Commercial Paper Market

5.1.6 30-Day CP Rates Less 1-Month OIS Rates
Chart 5.1.6 30-Day CP Rates Less 1-Month OIS Rates

As the recovery progressed, unsecured
domestic financial issuers exited the CPFF
first, followed by European banks and finally
by issuers of asset-backed commercial paper
(ABCP). For unsecured domestic financial
issuers, the facility was a critical temporary
source of funding through the worst of the
crisis. European banks required more time
to exit the CPFF, because they had limited

Financial Developments

47

Chart 5.1.7 Nonmortgage ABS Issuance

Chart 5.1.8 ABS Issuance

Chart 5.1.9 Securitized Auto ABS Spreads

5.1.9 Securitized Auto ABS Spreads

options to meet dollar funding needs. For ABCP
issuers, the CPFF provided a safety net that
allowed them to gradually downsize their ABCP
programs with minimal market disruption.
The TALF was established in 2008 as a
temporary facility to address the severe
deterioration of liquidity in securitized markets
that provide critical sources of funding for
consumer, small business, and commercial
real estate lenders. Unlike subprime residential
mortgage securitizations, the seizure in market
functioning in the nonmortgage asset-backed
security (ABS) and commercial real estate
mortgage-backed security (CMBS) markets was
not driven by credit concerns but rather by a
lack of liquidity. Investors fled indiscriminately
from all securitized credit, even though ABS
and CMBS structures generally performed
well during the crisis. Liquidity provided by
TALF helped finance three million auto loans,
one million student loans, and 900,000 small
business loans. TALF-levered investors led
renewed demand for consumer ABS and
CMBS. Later, as secondary and then primary
market spreads narrowed in these markets,
issuance became increasingly less reliant on
TALF. This restoration of private funding is most
clearly seen in the nonmortgage ABS market
(Charts 5.1.7, 5.1.8, 5.1.9, and 5.1.10).
All Federal Reserve loans extended during the
crisis were well collateralized. A large fraction of
TALF loans have been repaid early. Remaining
loans are current in their payments and well
collateralized. All other loans were repaid on
time, in full, with interest.
5.1.2 Guarantee Support
Temporary programs to guarantee deposits,
unsecured bank debt, and investor assets in
money market mutual funds helped stabilize
investor confidence.
In October 2008, at the peak of the financial
crisis, the FDIC introduced the Temporary
Liquidity Guarantee Program (TLGP). In addition
to the Transaction Account Guarantee Program,
the TLGP guaranteed, for a fee, unsecured
debt with a term of up to three years issued
by financial entities participating in its Debt

48

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 5.1.10 CMBS AAA Spread

5.1.10 CMBS AAA Spread

Chart 5.1.11 Debt Spreads vs. 3-year U.S. Treasury Securities

5.1.11 Debt Spreads vs. 3-year U.S. Treasury Securities

Guarantee Program (DGP). The issuance of
new guaranteed debt expired on October 31,
2009, and the guarantee on outstanding debt
expires on December 31, 2012. The NCUA also
introduced temporary guarantees to stabilize
the corporate credit union system.
The DGP enabled financial institutions to
meet their financing needs during a period
of systemwide turmoil and record-high credit
spreads. On January 7, 2009, less than three
months after the first TLGP medium-term note
was issued, the spread between a composite
of three-year TLGP debt and three-year U.S.
Treasury securities was 88 basis points, while
the comparable spread on nonguaranteed bank
debt was 458 basis points (Chart 5.1.11). By
the end of the DGP issuance period on October
31, 2009, these spreads had decreased by
about two-thirds.
Banks and their holding companies are now
issuing nonguaranteed debt at volumes
comparable to pre-crisis levels. At the peak of
the TLGP, the FDIC guaranteed almost $350
billion of debt outstanding. As of June 30,
2011, the total amount of remaining FDICguaranteed debt outstanding was $236.9
billion, of which $70.7 billion will mature in
2011 and the remaining $166.2 billion will
mature in 2012 (Chart 5.1.12). The majority
of the debt exposure resides within the largest
financial entities.

Chart 5.1.12 Total Debt Outstanding for TLGP Firms

The Treasury Department announced its
temporary money market fund guarantee
program on September 19, 2008, to stop the
run on money market funds (MMFs) (Chart
5.1.13). Certain structural features of MMFs
can produce incentives for investors to cash
in shares if they fear that a fund will suffer a
loss (see Box D: Money Market Funds).
The temporary guarantee program provided
coverage to shareholders for amounts they held
in participating MMFs at the close of business
on September 19, 2008. The guarantee would
have been triggered if a participating fund’s
net asset value fell below $0.995 per share.
The temporary guarantee, along with Federal
Reserve facilities aimed at stabilizing markets
linked to MMFs, was successful in restoring

Financial Developments

49

Box D: Money Market Funds
The run on money market funds (MMFs) added considerably to market stress during the financial crisis. Some of
the key features of MMFs that make them susceptible to runs remain today.
Money market funds are mutual funds that offer
individuals, businesses, and governments a convenient
way to pool investments in money market instruments.
MMFs provide an economically important service
by acting as intermediaries between shareholders
who desire liquid investments, often for cash
management, and borrowers who seek term funding.
The composition of MMF assets has recently remained
stable among various government and short-duration
assets (Chart D.1).
Chart D.1 Money Market Fund Assets

management, monitoring, and diversification services
that MMFs provide. However, several of these MMF
features contribute to their fragility.

Investors’ Incentives and the Fixed NAV
The stable, rounded $1 NAV fosters an expectation that
MMF share prices will not fluctuate. However, when
shareholders perceive that a fund may suffer losses,
each shareholder has an incentive to redeem shares
before other shareholders, causing a run on the fund.
Such redemptions can accelerate the likelihood of a
break-the-buck event to the extent that the fund’s asset
sales to meet redemptions significantly depress the
market value of the fund’s remaining assets. In such a
scenario, the ability of early redeemers to receive the full
$1 NAV is essentially subsidized by the losses absorbed
by remaining shareholders.

Maturity Transformation and Liquidity

MMFs generally invest in the highest rated (A1/P1-rated)
short-term collateral. SEC Rule 2a-7 places stringent
limitations on MMF holdings of lower rated securities.
MMFs must comply with the rule, which permits these
funds to maintain a stable net asset value (NAV) per
share, typically $1, through the use of amortized cost
accounting and rounding. However, if the mark-tomarket per share value of a fund’s assets falls more
than one-half of 1 percent, or below $0.995, the fund
must reprice its shares, an event known as “breaking
the buck.” MMF investors benefit from the simplicity and
convenience of the stable NAV feature and from the risk

50

2011 FSOC Annual Report

MMFs offer shares that are payable on demand, but
they invest in cash-like instruments and in short-term
securities that are less liquid. Redemptions in excess of
the cash-like assets (or liquidity buffer) may force funds
to sell their less liquid assets. When money markets
are strained, funds may not be able to obtain full value
(that is, amortized cost) for such assets in secondary
markets and may incur losses. Investors thus have an
incentive to redeem shares before a fund has depleted
its cash-like liquidity buffer.

Low Risk Tolerance
Risk-averse investors are attracted to MMFs because
they offer yield above that of a risk-free asset yet
have a history of maintaining stable value and
meeting all withdrawal requests on demand. These
investors are prone to flight when losses appear
possible. In particular, institutional investors, which
currently account for about two-thirds of assets under
management in MMFs, exhibit extreme aversion to
absorbing even small losses. Institutional investors tend

Box D: Money Market Funds

to be less tolerant of fluctuations in share prices, have
larger amounts at stake, and are quicker to respond to
events that may threaten the stable NAV.

Expectation of Sponsor Support
MMFs invest in assets that may lose value, but funds
have no formal capital buffers or insurance to absorb
loss and maintain their stable NAV. When losses do
occur, MMFs have historically relied on discretionary
sponsor support to maintain a stable NAV and preserve
the franchise value of fund management businesses
(Chart D.2). That support may come in the form of
capital contributions or the purchase of assets that have
lost value, for example.
Chart D.2 Money Market Fund Sponsor Support

Sponsors do not commit to support an MMF in
advance, however, because an explicit commitment
may require the sponsor to consolidate the fund on
its balance sheet. Thus, although investors ostensibly
bear the risk of an MMF breaking the buck, sponsors
have in the past borne that risk themselves, fostering
the perceived safety of MMF investments. Moreover,
the uncertainty about the availability and sufficiency
of such support during crises, and the fact that many

MMFs lack deep-pocketed sponsors, contribute to their
susceptibility to runs.

Expectation of Government Support
Given the unprecedented government support of
MMFs during the crisis in 2008 and 2009, even
sophisticated institutional investors and fund managers
may have the impression that the government would
be ready to support the industry again with the same
tools. This expectation may give fund managers
incentives to take greater risks than are prudent and
may reduce sponsors’ incentives to support funds in
times of stress. Such expectations may be particularly
misaligned given that Congress has since prohibited
the Treasury from using the fund that it used to
support the MMFs for this purpose.
In February 2010, the SEC adopted new rules for
MMFs to make these funds more resilient to market
volatility and to credit and liquidity risk. First, the SEC
introduced new risk-limiting restrictions, including
increased liquidity requirements, restrictions on the
ability of MMFs to purchase lower quality securities, and
maturity restrictions that reduce the maximum allowable
weighted average maturity of funds’ portfolios. Funds
also are required to stress test their ability to maintain a
stable NAV. Second, the SEC’s new rules permit a fund’s
board—if it determines that the fund’s NAV per share is
at imminent risk of falling, or has fallen, below $1—to
suspend redemptions promptly and liquidate its portfolio
in an orderly manner to limit contagion effects on other
funds. Finally, the new rules impose requirements to
disclose portfolio holdings and mark-to-market (shadow)
NAV, which gives the SEC a window on MMF activity
and helps investors impose strong market discipline.
Although these new rules are a positive first step, the
SEC recognizes that they address only some of the
features that make MMFs susceptible to runs, and that
more should be done to address systemic risks posed by
MMFs and their structural vulnerabilities.

Financial Developments

51

Chart 5.1.13 Prime Money Market Fund Assets

5.1.13 Prime Money Market Fund Assets

investor confidence; it expired in September
2009 without any claims.
5.1.3 Capital Support
Government capital injections were required
to stabilize regulated financial entities at
the peak of the crisis. Many U.S. financial
institutions were able to replace government
capital with private sources as investors
gained confidence from the Supervisory
Capital Assessment Program (SCAP), financial
conditions normalized, and the economy
began to recover.

Chart 5.1.14 The Financial Panic in the Interbank Market

5.1.14 The Financial Panic in the Interbank Market

Chart 5.1.15 Price-to-Book Ratio of 6 Large Complex BHCs
5.1.15 Price-to-Book Ratio 6 Large Complex BHCs

52

2011 FSOC Annual Report

During the financial panic in September 2008,
market participants became acutely concerned
about the solvency of the nation’s regulated
banking institutions, particularly after the failure
of the largest thrift institution and the acquisition
of the fourth-largest bank holding company
(BHC) by the fifth-largest BHC. One measure
of the extent of concern is the behavior of
the LIBOR-OIS spread, which captures the
premium that banks require to lend to each
other in the short-term money market (Chart
5.1.14). This spread jumped from under 100
basis points to over 350 basis points. With wellfunctioning secondary markets and the absence
of counterparty solvency fears, this spread is
typically under 25 basis points (Chart 5.0.1).
To restore confidence and directly bolster
the capital base of the banking system, the
Treasury Department drew on the $700 billion
that Congress had made available through
the Troubled Asset Relief Program (TARP) to
address the market dislocation. It immediately
injected $125 billion of capital into nine
institutions. Over the next few months, the
Treasury Department injected a total of $204.9
billion of capital through the Capital Purchase
Program and invested $40 billion through the
Targeted Investment Program. Despite the
massive government intervention to support the
banking system, access to private capital was
severely limited. Many large banks had market
capitalizations well below their book value
(Chart 5.1.15), and measures of default risk
were exceptionally high (Chart 5.1.16).

Chart 5.1.16 CDS Spreads of 6 Large Complex BHCs

5.1.16 CDS Spreads of 6 Large Complex BHCs

Chart 5.1.17 Aggregate Large BHC Total Equity Capital

5.1.17 Aggregate Large BHC Total Equity Capital

In 2009, the SCAP provided an assessment of
the capital needs of the 19 largest BHCs under
alternative macroeconomic scenarios to ensure
that they could continue to provide key financial
services, even if the recession was longer and
deeper than the consensus forecast. Ten of the
19 BHCs were told that they needed to raise
additional capital of $75 billion in the aggregate.
The presence of an additional government
backstop of capital to banks and the
confidence-enhancing clarity produced by the
SCAP assessment reopened the equity market
for most of the large banks. As of first quarter
2011, banks had raised over $300 billion in
equity from the market and conversions and
returned $220 billion of their TARP funds to the
Treasury (Chart 5.1.17).
5.1.4 Housing Finance Support
The housing finance market was the first
and biggest market to lose liquidity during
the financial crisis. Substantial government
intervention sustained the market during the
crisis and remains in place today.
Mortgage-related losses led to capital shortfalls
at the two government-sponsored enterprises
(GSEs), Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac, and
a sharp decline in net income at the Federal
Home Loan Bank System (FHLB). The federal
government injected capital into Fannie Mae
and Freddie Mac to stabilize the mortgage
market, and the FHFA placed restrictions on
capital distributions at several Federal Home
Loan Banks.
Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac reported a $109
billion combined net loss in 2008 owing to rising
defaults on loans underlying the mortgagebacked securities (MBS) they had guaranteed
in their securitization businesses (agency MBS)
and to losses on their direct investments in
MBS. These losses eroded the two companies’
capital and led to a steep widening of spreads
in the MBS market relative to Treasury yields,
which in turn increased the cost of new
mortgage loans to homeowners.

Financial Developments

53

Chart 5.1.18 Fannie Mae Option-Adjusted Spreads

5.1.18 Fannie Mae Option-Adjusted Spreads

Chart 5.1.19 GSE: Net Income and Losses

5.1.20 FHLB Bank Advances
Chart 5.1.20 FHLB Bank Advances

54

2011 FSOC Annual Report

To stabilize the mortgage market, FHFA
placed Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac into
conservatorship, and Treasury entered into a
senior preferred stock purchase agreement
in September 2008 to ensure that these
two GSEs would have a positive net worth.
Joint action by the FHFA and the Treasury
Department, coupled with large purchases in
the agency MBS market by Treasury and the
Federal Reserve, stabilized the agency MBS
market. These combined actions resulted in a
sharp improvement in spreads and restored a
measure of calm to the agency MBS market
(Chart 5.1.18).
Treasury and FHFA increased the funding
commitment to $200 billion for each GSE in
May 2009, then amended the agreement again
in December 2009. The December amendment
added flexibility to the funding commitment by
setting it at $200 billion plus any cumulative
deficiency amount determined for quarters in
calendar years 2010, 2011, and 2012, less
any amount by which assets exceed liabilities
at December 31, 2012, and less any existing
amount of funding under the commitment. This
ensured that the GSEs would have a positive
net worth as losses continued to mount.
Treasury holdings of GSE preferred stock as of
first quarter 2011 totaled $162.4 billion at a net
cost after dividend payments of $138.2 billion.
The funding commitment will become fixed
again on December 31, 2012 (Chart 5.1.19).
The FHLBs fared better than Fannie Mae
and Freddie Mac, and became an important
source of funding for many struggling financial
institutions during the crisis. Since peaking
at the end of 2008, FHLB advances have
declined sharply (Chart 5.1.20). Despite the
increase in advances in 2008, net income
for the consolidated system declined by 57
percent in 2008 compared with 2007, primarily
because of losses on private-label securities
at 6 of the 12 banks. Net losses were reported
by three Federal Home Loan Banks in 2008
and four in 2009. Several of the banks became
subject to restrictions on dividends and capital
because of their weakened financial condition.

Chart 5.2.1 Origin of Private Nonfinancial Debt Outstanding

5.2 Evolution of the Financial
System
Over the past 30 years, market-based
intermediation of credit, such as securitization,
increased relative to bank-based intermediation,
such as direct lending (Chart 5.2.1). Many of
these market-based intermediation channels
became severely disrupted during the financial
crisis and shrank in size (Chart 5.2.2).
Meanwhile, the crisis reinforced the secular
increase in the concentration of the banking
sector and changes in its business model.

Chart 5.2.2 Bank vs. Market Intermediated Credit Outstanding

5.2.2 Bank vs. Market Intermediated Credit Outstanding

Economic growth, demographics, and financial
innovation have been factors behind the large
increases in the financial asset holdings of
U.S. households and businesses. While most
asset management firms, pension funds, and
insurance institutions were only indirectly
affected by the crisis, the crisis highlighted their
importance in providing both short-term and
long-term funding to the financial sector.
Technological advances, changes in regulation,
and globalization have produced dramatic
changes in trading and market-making
practices. The greater complexity of the
financial system has been supported in part
by developments in financial infrastructure and
the increasing use of electronic payments and
computerized record keeping.

Part I. Institutions
5.2.1 Bank Holding Companies
The financial crisis has changed the landscape
for the largest BHCs. While the income of
BHCs has improved significantly over the past
two years, it remains substantially below the
pre-crisis level. Assets held by foreign banking
organizations (FBOs) in the United States have
increased notably since the crisis.
Most commercial banks in the United States
are owned by a BHC, which can own other
subsidiaries, such as a broker-dealer. Bank
holding companies are regulated by the Federal
Reserve on a consolidated basis and are
subject to capital standards similar to those
of banks. There are nearly 5,000 BHCs in the
United States, with aggregate assets of about
Financial Developments

55

Chart 5.2.3 Large Bank Holding Company Pre-Tax Income

$17 trillion. Most of these companies own only
one commercial bank. There are 75 companies
with assets over $10 billion which, combined,
account for over 85 percent of all BHC assets.
Pretax net income across all BHCs totaled
$116.7 billion in 2010 (Chart 5.2.3). While
this was a significant improvement over the
previous two years, it was nearly 40 percent
below the 2006 level. Net revenue (net interest
income plus noninterest income) held up fairly
well through the crisis. However, as asset
quality deteriorated, provisions for loan losses
increased sharply.

5.2.4 Independent Broker-Dealer Assets
Chart 5.2.4 Independent Broker-Dealer Assets

Chart 5.2.5 SCAP Bank Noninterest Income

The financial crisis had a profound effect on
large complex financial institutions (LCFIs).
Several large banking organizations were
acquired by LCFIs as a result of mergers or
FDIC-assisted transactions. Additionally, four
of the five largest independent broker-dealers
were either acquired by or converted to BHCs
in 2008 (Chart 5.2.4). These developments
added more than $2 trillion to total BHC assets
and had implications for the business models of
the largest BHCs, as they now derive a higher
share of income from investment banking and
trading activities (Chart 5.2.5).
The assets held by FBOs in the United States
have increased notably since the financial
crisis (Chart 5.2.6). The percentage of U.S.
commercial banking deposits held by FBOs has
been relatively constant over the past decade.
Primarily through acquisitions, they expanded
their presence in activities less dependent on
deposit financing, such as repo, securities and
derivatives trading, prime brokerage, and other
investment banking activities. FBOs hold a large
and increasing percentage of their U.S. assets
outside of domestically chartered BHCs.
5.2.2 Insured Depository Institutions
The commercial banking industry has become
increasingly concentrated over recent
decades among fewer, larger institutions, a
trend that has accelerated since the financial
crisis. While revenue held up fairly well, the
industry set aside nearly one-third of revenue
in loan loss provisions over the past two years.

56

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 5.2.6 Assets of Foreign Bank Branches and Agencies

5.2.6 Assets of Foreign Bank Branches and Agencies

5.2.7 Asset Distribution of FDIC-Insured Institutions
Chart 5.2.7 Asset Distribution ofFDIC Insured Institutions

Chart 5.2.8 Assets of the Ten Largest Depository Institutions

Commercial Banks and Thrifts
The banking industry is composed of more than
7,500 commercial bank and thrift institutions.
Of these, more than 6,900 institutions have
assets less than $1 billion, while 88 institutions
have assets between $10 billion and $100
billion, and 19 institutions have assets over
$100 billion (Chart 5.2.7). Over the past few
decades, the industry has become increasingly
concentrated among fewer, larger institutions as
they expanded to achieve economies of scale
and branched across state lines, and as federal
legislation enabled them to conduct trading and
other investment banking activities. Failures,
mergers, and subdued new chartering activity
during and after the crisis have contributed to
further consolidation. Over the past decade, the
number of institutions has fallen by 25 percent,
and the 10 largest institutions now hold
approximately 50 percent of industry assets
(Chart 5.2.8). Overall, there has been a steady,
long-term increase in assets at commercial
banks and thrifts as population and wealth rose.
Over the past decade, industry assets have
risen from 75 percent of GDP to 90 percent.
Despite the rising concentration over recent
years, the U.S. banking industry remains much
less concentrated than banking in many other
countries, and the size of the largest banks
relative to GDP is still low when compared to
other countries (Chart 5.2.9). Small banks
and credit unions remain an important source
of financing for consumers and businesses,
particularly small businesses, in communities
across the country.
Pretax net income for the U.S. banking industry
totaled $122.5 billion in 2010 (Chart 5.2.10).
While this was a significant improvement over
the previous two years, it was 44 percent
below the 2006 level. Industry net revenue
held up fairly well throughout the crisis, rising
each year from 2006 to 2010, but provisions
for loan losses increased sharply beginning in
2007 and peaked in 2009, when they absorbed
103 percent of the industry’s net revenue. The
industry set aside nearly $625 billion in loan loss
provisions between 2008 and 2010, which was
nearly one-third of industry net revenue.

Financial Developments

57

Chart 5.2.9 Largest 4 Banking Institutions as Percent of GDP

Chart 5.2.10 Commercial Bank and Thrift Pre-Tax Income

Chart 5.2.11 FDIC-InsuredFailed Institutions
5.2.11 FDIC-Insured Failed Institutions

As the crisis has unfolded, 370 bank and
thrift failures have occurred through June 30,
2011, or 4.5 percent of institutions operating
at the beginning of 2008. While the level of
bank and thrift failures remains elevated, the
rate is beginning to decline. Although fewer
institutions have failed since the beginning
of the financial crisis compared with failures
during the savings and loan crisis of the late
1980s and early 1990s, the value of failed-bank
assets has been much higher this time (Chart
5.2.11). At the end of first quarter 2011, the
number of institutions on the FDIC’s “problem”
list (institutions with financial, operational, or
managerial weaknesses that threaten their
continued financial viability) was 888, nearly 12
percent of all institutions.
The nation’s largest banking institutions (those
with over $100 billion in assets) have recovered
from the financial crisis to a greater extent than
community banks (institutions with less than
$1 billion in assets). Pretax net income is down
nearly 75 percent at community banks from
the 2006 level, while it is down by 12 percent
at the largest institutions (Charts 5.2.12 and
5.2.13). Although both the largest institutions
and community banks have benefited from
reductions in loan loss provisions, community
banks have experienced a smaller increase
in net revenue than large banks. In addition,
community banks continue to deal with credit
problems associated with their still-sizable
commercial real estate portfolios.
Credit Unions
Credit unions are nonprofit, cooperative
financial institutions. Members pool their funds,
and these funds are then lent to members.
Credit unions differ from commercial banks
and thrifts in that the members are also the
owners. Currently, there are nearly 7,300 retail
credit unions with approximately $940 billion in
assets and 26 corporate credit unions, which
are organized to provide services to the retail
credit unions.
The credit union experience was similar to that
of commercial banks: the system experienced
a deterioration of asset quality during the
financial crisis, although delinquency rates and

58

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 5.2.12 Large Bank Pre-Tax Income

Chart 5.2.13 Community Bank Pre-Tax Income

provisions have been less severe than those
in the banking industry (Chart 5.2.14). Credit
union net revenue totaled $4.6 billion in 2010,
up significantly from the previous two years but
20 percent below the 2006 level. Net income
rose by 33 percent from 2006 to 2010, while
provisions for loan losses peaked in 2009, when
they absorbed nearly 20 percent of net income.
As in the banking industry, assets in the credit
union system have increased and the system
has become more concentrated, although less
so than commercial banking (Chart 5.2.15).
Assets of the credit union system rose from 4.4
percent of GDP to 6.2 percent over the past
decade. The number of credit unions has fallen
by nearly 30 percent over the same period,
with the 10 largest institutions now holding
nearly 15 percent of system assets. The severe
economic downturn led to losses at retail
credit unions and the failure of several large
corporate credit unions, as a result of declines
in the value of mortgage-related assets held by
these institutions. To address these failures and
reform the corporate credit union system, key
regulatory reforms have been implemented to
improve capital, restrict investments, enhance
asset-liability management, and enhance
corporate governance provisions.
5.2.3 Specialty Lenders

Chart 5.2.14 Federally Insured CreditUnion Income
5.2.14 Federally Insured Credit Union Income

Specialty lenders are important providers of
credit to a number of markets that have not
been fully served by the traditional banking
industry. Specialty lenders struggled through
the financial crisis because of their heavy
reliance on the capital funding markets, but
they have recovered to a large extent and are
continuing to serve their customer base.
The specialty lending sector, which plays a
significant role in market-based intermediation,
grew dramatically before the crisis as marketbased intermediation expanded. Much of the
growth was in mortgage lending backed by
Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac, the two large
GSEs. Finance companies and real estate
investment trusts (REITs)—tax-advantaged legal
entities that are required to hold 75 percent of
their assets in and generate 75 percent of their
income from mortgages and mortgage-related

Financial Developments

59

Chart 5.2.15 Assets of the Ten Largest Credit Unions

Chart 5.2.16 Finance Company Mortgage Assets

Chart 5.2.17 Real Estate Investment Trust (REIT) Assets

5.2.17 Real Estate Investment Trust (REIT) Assets

holdings—played an increasing role (Charts
5.2.16 and 5.2.17). Mortgage lending by these
firms contracted sharply following the collapse
of the securitization business model. Recently,
however, REITs have attracted private capital
for agency MBS investment because of the high
dividend yields they offer, facilitated by the lowrate environment and steep yield curve.
With the government’s conservatorship of
the two large GSEs, the remaining specialty
lending sector can be split into three broad
types: small niche firms, finance entities that
are captive to a manufacturer, and large
diversified firms. Specialty lenders remain an
important provider of credit to households and
businesses for the purchase and leasing of a
wide variety of goods and services, including
automobiles, household durables, education,
office equipment, and commercial aircraft.
At year-end 2010, finance companies owned
or managed approximately $600 billion in
nonmortgage consumer loans and leases and
approximately $500 billion in business loans
and leases (Charts 5.2.18 and 5.2.19).
The sector is concentrated; for example,
approximately three-quarters of consumer
receivables on the balance sheet of finance
companies at the end of 2010 were held by
only 10 companies. The larger specialty lenders
generally are either captive subsidiaries of major
manufacturing firms that provide financing
for the purchase of the parents’ products
or diversified entities involved in a variety of
consumer and commercial business lines.
Captives and diversified specialty lenders’
businesses are generally global in scope.
Specialty lenders have traditionally relied heavily
on the debt markets for funding, because they
have only limited deposit offerings, usually
through a wholly owned thrift subsidiary or
an industrial loan corporation. The traditional
business model for many of the large finance
companies depends on access to markets
for secured and unsecured debt, as well as
support from parent manufacturing companies
(Chart 5.2.20). During the financial crisis,
certain specialty nonmortgage lenders adopted
a BHC structure, which made them eligible to
receive government assistance under the TARP.

60

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 5.2.18 Consumer Loans Outstanding

Small specialty lenders, numbering in the
thousands, are primarily focused on a specific
industry niche or geographic area. These firms
obtain financing mainly through bank loans and
equity capital; therefore, they may be vulnerable
to changes in bank underwriting standards as
well as the creditworthiness of their customers.
In general, these lenders serve higher risk
segments of the economy.
5.2.4 Insurance

Chart 5.2.19 Business Loans Outstanding

Chart 5.2.20 Finance Company Liabilities

The insurance industry is an important source
of long-term funding to the economy through
its investment of premium income. Insurance
companies, with some notable exceptions,
generally withstood the financial crisis and
have since strengthened their balance sheets.
Their investment portfolios have improved
along with general financial market conditions.
The segment of the industry that provided
financial guarantees on mortgages and
mortgage-related assets experienced severe
difficulties.
Insurance companies are broadly classified into
two primary groups: life insurance companies,
which sell life insurance, annuities, and other
retirement products; and property/casualty
insurance companies, which sell personal,
professional, and commercial liability insurance.
In order to meet future insurance payouts,
all insurers invest their premium income in
a wide range of assets, thereby providing
important long-term funding to the economy.
The different asset and capital composition of
the life and property/casualty industries reflects
distinct claim and benefit payment patterns. In
particular, property/casualty companies tend
to hold higher credit quality instruments and
have greater liquidity needs than life insurance
companies (Charts 5.2.21 and 5.2.22).
Insurers faced challenges during the financial
crisis as asset prices fell sharply and some
noncore activities such as securities lending
produced large losses. However, the industry
withstood the financial crisis quite well in terms
of providing insurance services to consumers
and businesses. Only 28 of approximately 8,000
insurers became insolvent in 2008 and 2009,

Financial Developments

61

Chart 5.2.21 Property and Casualty Insurance: Assets

Chart 5.2.22 Life Insurance: Assets

Chart 5.2.23 Property and Casualty Insurance: Capital and Income

and those insurers are being resolved pursuant
to applicable state law. The improvement
in financial markets has strengthened the
insurance sector’s balance sheet and the sector
generally is financially healthy.
The property/casualty industry has been in
a soft market cycle for the past few years,
characterized by highly competitive markets and
reduced insurer pricing power. The industry as a
whole realized positive net income in 2009 and
2010 (Chart 5.2.23), and net investment income
has remained relatively stable. The industry faced
higher than usual claims exposure for the first six
months of 2011 due to severe weather in parts
of the United States. Similarly to the property/
casualty industry, the life insurance sector has
experienced reduced premium volumes along
with an increase in both policyholder claims
and administrative expenses (Chart 5.2.24).
However, these effects were somewhat offset by
increases in investment income.
During 2010, general financial market conditions
improved and were reflected in insurance
company investment portfolios in several
ways. Valuation concerns have diminished.
Comparisons of fair value to carrying value are
less negative, reducing the pressure to take
impairments. Improved market conditions also
led to more flexibility in managing portfolios
without the negative impact of realized losses.
However, insurers, state regulators, and
the FIO are carefully monitoring exposures
to commercial real estate, residential MBS
(RMBS), municipal bonds, securities lending,
euro area exposures, and derivatives.
The financial guaranty and mortgage guaranty
segments of the industry, which are a relatively
small portion of the industry as measured by
premium income, experienced severe difficulties
associated with the decline in house prices
and market activity, the increased volume in
residential real estate foreclosures, and the
impairment in the RMBS market. In particular,
due to severe losses, the future viability of the
financial guaranty segment (monoline insurers)
remains uncertain, with only one monoline
group actively writing insurance.

62

2011 FSOC Annual Report

5.2.5 Asset Management

Chart 5.2.24 Life and Other Insurance: Capital and Income

The U.S. asset management industry, with
more than $35 trillion under management,
is an integral part of the financial system. It
has grown with the long-run increase in U.S.
household financial assets. A wide range of
asset management vehicles, including pension
funds and hedge funds, play an important role
in the financial system as providers of capital.
The U.S. household sector has built a large
stock of financial assets over the past three
decades (Chart 5.2.25). Equity holdings
increased over this period and now make up
a sizable percentage of both financial assets
and GDP (Chart 5.2.26). Demographic trends
should continue to support asset growth, as the
baby-boom generation, with its increasing life
expectancy, continues to accumulate assets for
retirement over the next few years. The aging of
the population eventually may have implications
for asset allocations.

Chart 5.2.25 Household Financial Assets

Savers have access to a wide array of
investment products through many types of
asset managers and vehicles, including money
market funds and mutual funds, insurance and
retirement funds, and private equity and hedge
funds (Chart 5.2.27).
Mutual Funds and Closed-End Funds

Chart 5.2.26 Household Equity Holdings
5.2.26 Household Equity Holdings
t

Mutual funds are open-end investment
companies, registered and regulated under the
Investment Company Act of 1940. According
to the Federal Reserve’s Flow of Funds report,
mutual fund assets under management as of
first quarter 2011 were about $11 trillion, with
approximately $2.7 trillion in MMFs and $8.3
trillion in other mutual funds. Among nonmoney-market funds, 65 percent of assets are
in equity funds and 35 percent are in bond or
hybrid funds.
The MMF sector has grown significantly in
recent decades and now plays a dominant role
in some short-term credit markets (see Box
D: Money Market Funds). While total assets
under management have declined since their
peak in 2009, MMFs continue to purchase a
large share of private short-term debt issuance.

Financial Developments

63

Chart 5.2.27 Investment Management Industry

Chart 5.2.28 U.S. Mutual Fund and ETF Assets

Other mutual fund assets, excluding MMFs,
have increased 60 percent since year-end 2008,
driven more by increases in the value of assets
than by fund flows. Over this period, there have
been large net inflows to emerging market
equity funds, while net flows to domestic and
other advanced country equity funds have been
flat. Bond funds have seen net inflows over
recent years: $900 billion has flowed into bond
and hybrid funds since May 2008.
Mutual funds are liquid, holding at least 85
percent of their assets in liquid securities, and
are required to redeem investors’ shares for
cash within seven days of an investor’s request
for redemption. Exchange traded funds (ETFs),
shares of which can be bought and sold on an
intraday basis in secondary markets, have taken
market share from mutual funds (see Chart
5.2.28 and Box E: Exchange Traded Funds).
The use of leverage by mutual funds is
generally constrained by statutory restrictions.
Specifically, mutual funds’ explicit leverage
is limited by an applicable asset coverage
ratio of 300 percent. Mutual funds may take
on additional implicit leverage via derivatives,
although the SEC places limits on this activity.

5.2.29 Retirement Funds by Type
Chart 5.2.29 Retirement Fundsby Type

The closed-end fund sector is much smaller,
with assets under management of $250 billion
as of the end of first quarter 2011. These funds
issue nonredeemable equity securities that are
traded on an exchange; thus, unlike mutual
fund investors, closed-end fund shareholders
look to the secondary market for liquidity in
their shares. Under their regulations, closed-end
funds are able to undertake greater leverage
than mutual funds.
Retirement Funds
Retirement funds constitute an important
category of U.S. household financial assets
and are a source of long-term funds for the
financial system. As of year-end 2010, the
combined assets under management of private
and public pensions stood at over $14.0 trillion.
Government-managed pension plans make up
just over one-quarter of total retirement funds
(Chart 5.2.29). There are three main types of
retirement funds: funds privately managed by

64

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 5.2.30 Pension Fund Assets Allocated to Equities

Chart 5.2.31 State and Local Government Pension Plans

Chart 5.2.32 Private Defined Benefit Pension Plans

individuals (for example, IRAs); defined benefit
pension plans, in which certain future benefits
are promised to beneficiaries; and defined
contribution plans, which do not guarantee
future benefits.
Retirement funds have traditionally divided their
assets among fixed-income securities (whose
cash flows are managed to match the likely
schedule of payouts in retirement), mutual
funds, and equities (which offer the benefit of
higher expected return). Between 1990 and
2006, the allocation to equities increased in
state and local government defined benefit
plans as well as private ones. Since the crisis,
private defined benefit plans have sharply
decreased their allocation to equities, while
state and local government funds, which
are typically defined benefit plans, have not
adjusted their allocation (Chart 5.2.30).
The declines in equity market valuations from
2007 levels led to substantial investment losses
across retirement fund types (Charts 5.2.31,
5.2.32, and 5.2.33). As a result of these losses
and the decline in the assumed discount rates
for these plans, the market value of assets
fell significantly below the present value of
liabilities for many private and public defined
benefit plans. Public pension funds face more
significant funding shortfalls than their corporate
counterparts owing to their larger, longer term
liabilities, lower sponsor contributions in recent
years, and the challenges facing state and local
sponsors in making adequate plan contributions
in the current fiscal environment (Chart 5.2.34).
Investment Managers
Investment managers oversee approximately
$8 trillion in separately managed accounts. This
number has rebounded from $6 trillion at the
end of 2008 but is still below the peak of $8.6
trillion in 2007.
In separately managed accounts, investment
losses fall solely on the account owner,
so these accounts generally do not raise
direct financial stability concerns. However,
investment managers who pursue similar
strategies across accounts and in associated
managed funds (in part to capture economies

Financial Developments

65

Box E: Exchange Traded Funds
Exchange traded funds (ETFs) have grown to account for an increased share of the fund management sector.
While regulations restrict synthetic-based ETFs in the United States, they are an important part of the European
ETF market.
ETFs are generally passively managed, index-tracking
funds traded on an exchange. While ETFs are relatively
low-margin products for fund sponsors and market
makers, they are rapidly gaining popularity as a means
of achieving low-cost exposure to nearly any market
index, including emerging markets and commodities.
Additionally, unlike traditional open-end mutual funds,
ETF shares can be bought and sold on an intraday
basis in liquid secondary markets. Since their inception
in the 1990s, ETFs have grown to account for more
than $1 trillion in assets, or approximately 13 percent of
the long-term mutual funds industry (Chart E.1).

Chart E.2 Major ETF Divergence From Net Asset Value (NAV)

E.2 Major ETF Divergence From Net Asset Value (NAV)

ChartU.S. Exchange TradedFunds (ETFs)
E.1 E.1 U.S. Exchange Traded Funds (ETFs)

The U.S. ETF market generally provides long,
unleveraged exposure to an underlying asset or
asset class. Some ETFs enter into securities lending
transactions to supplement returns and lower fees,
which may somewhat increase their leverage and
liquidity risk.

U.S.-domiciled funds make up approximately twothirds of global offerings. About 97 percent of total net
assets of U.S.-domiciled ETFs are passively managed,
seeking to mimic market or sector indexes such as the
S&P 500. For the most part, these index funds hold a
portfolio of underlying securities that replicate the return
of the index, though they may exhibit small divergences
from their net asset value (NAV) as a result of cash
management or portfolio sampling issues (Chart E.2).
While tracking errors may be small, such deviations
could lead to inefficiencies for institutional investors that
are using ETFs to put on large hedged positions.
66

2011 FSOC Annual Report

About 3 percent of total U.S.-domiciled ETF assets
are synthetic, offering 2–3 times leverage through the
use of derivatives. Synthetic ETFs have experienced
limited growth in the United States, partly because
strict regulatory standards limit the use of derivatives
to replicate underlying indexes. These standards are
applicable to the roughly 90 percent of ETFs registered
under the Investment Company Act of 1940 (40 Act).
For example, in March 2010, pending a review of
current practices, the SEC froze the ability of new ETF
sponsors to introduce 40 Act ETFs that would make
significant investments in derivatives. U.S. rules require
that a 40 Act ETF sponsor be separate from its ETF
market maker, and that domestic ETFs must hold at
least 85 percent of their portfolios in liquid assets.
Together, these rules have limited flexibility to engage
in derivatives-based activity and have rendered many
synthetic structures uneconomical.

Box E: Exchange Traded Funds

In contrast, nearly half of European-domiciled ETFs
synthetically replicate the underlying index using
swaps and other derivatives. This increased complexity
may lead to decreased ETF liquidity during times
of heightened market volatility. Additionally, market
participants—including banks providing swaps—might
take on increased funding risk if ETFs suffered from a
sudden loss of liquidity. U.S. investors and regulators
should be alert to the possibility of liquidity or
counterparty exposure risks emanating from foreigndomiciled ETFs spilling over to domestic institutions
and markets.
ETFs differ from another type of synthetic security:
exchange traded notes (ETNs). ETNs are similar to ETFs
in that they are traded on an exchange and provide
returns based on an underlying benchmark or strategy.
However, ETNs are actually structured notes that
represent unsecured claims on the issuer rather than
a claim on the underlying reference asset. (Structured
notes are discussed in Section 5.2.8.)
The rise of ETFs has been driven, in part, by the
perception that liquidity is unavailable in traditional
open-ended mutual funds. ETF shares are traded

on exchanges like ordinary stocks, which enhances
the ability of investors to quickly take on and shed
risk. ETF sponsors do not restrict the daily creation
or redemption of ETF shares by authorized liquidity
providers. These authorized participants may be brokerdealers executing client orders or arbitragers exploiting
and eliminating departures of ETF prices from their
underlying portfolios. In contrast, mutual funds can only
be bought or redeemed with the sponsor at the close of
each day and may be subject to redemption fees.
However, while these sources of liquidity generally
benefit investors, they may also imply avenues through
which liquidity could become constrained. For example,
if a sponsoring broker-dealer were unable or unwilling
to provide liquidity, the bid-ask spread could widen,
leading to heightened price volatility. A departure of
arbitragers from the market could result in ETF shares
trading at a persistent discount or premium relative to
their NAV, thus increasing tracking errors.
Indeed, illiquid trading conditions triggered extreme
volatility in the pricing of ETFs during the May 6, 2010,
flash crash (see Section 5.3).

Financial Developments

67

Chart 5.2.33 Private Defined Contribution Pension Plans

of scale) could pose broader risks to financial
markets by increasing the volume, and thus
impact, of managers’ trading. Investment
managers, along with mutual and pension
funds, are generally not overtly leveraged.
Alternative Investments: Private Equity

Chart 5.2.34 Public and Private Pension Funding Level

Private equity—investments in a company’s
nonlisted equity capital—is an alternative form
of financing to public equity and debt for firms
that are unable to secure traditional funding or
as a supplement to other capital. Private equity
offers investment returns that are potentially
enhanced by active ownership and strategic
management, with investments taking the
form of venture capital or buyouts of public
shareholders. Characterized by long-term
investment horizons with locked-up capital
and high risk-return profiles, private equity
has become a component of many diversified
portfolios. Many private equity investments saw
substantial losses in the crisis, and the number
of private equity funds has fallen, along with the
capital raised by these funds (Chart 5.2.35).
Alternative Investments: Hedge Funds

Chart 5.2.35 Private Equity

Assets managed by hedge funds increased
19 percent in 2010 and currently stand at
approximately $2 trillion, near the pre-crisis
peak level reached in early 2008. Hedge funds
continue to draw institutional investor interest,
in part because of the perception that hedge
funds are relatively less correlated to broad
asset class movements. Industry growth
has resumed despite somewhat lackluster
performance in recent quarters (Charts 5.2.36
and 5.2.37).
Following the crisis, institutional investor
preferences for larger, more established funds
with longer track records led to a greater
concentration of industry assets at larger firms
(Chart 5.2.38). However, flows have recently
shifted toward medium-sized firms.
Leverage in the industry remains below precrisis levels, with factors related to both the
demand for and supply of leverage playing
important roles. The forced liquidations and
large redemptions some funds experienced
during the financial crisis have prompted

68

2011 FSOC Annual Report

less demand for leverage, with many funds
preferring a liquidity cushion in the event of
adverse market moves. Stricter regulatory
capital requirements and internal changes to
prime brokers’ financing practices have also led
to a reduced supply of leverage. Nonetheless,
both the demand for and supply of leverage are
above the lows of early 2009, especially among
fixed-income arbitrage, credit trading, and
global-macro funds.

Chart 5.2.36 Change in Hedge Fund AUM

Historically, regulators have had little reliable,
detailed information regarding the activities
of any particular hedge fund or hedge funds
in general, which is of concern because of
their increased role in the financial system.
For example, hedge fund lenders may be
increasingly important sources of funding for
middle-market companies that have little access
to public capital markets. Having information
on hedge funds could be helpful for monitoring
emerging financial market vulnerabilities that
could affect hedge funds and the parties with
whom they trade or from whom they obtain
leverage (such as prime brokers). In January
2011, the SEC and the CFTC jointly proposed
a new data collection form that would gather
detailed information from hedge funds.

Chart 5.2.37 Hedge FundPerformance By Strategy
5.2.37 Hedge Fund Performance By Strategy

Part II. Markets and Infrastructure
5.2.6 Short-Term Wholesale Funding
.

Chart 5.2.38 Distribution of NetAsset Flows by Size of Fund
5.2.38 Distribution of Net Asset Flows by Size of Fund

Short-term wholesale funding markets
play a central role in the financial system
by providing financial intermediaries with
funding to support their activities. However,
these markets are inherently fragile owing to
the frequent need to roll over maturing debt
and the sensitivity of institutional investors
to perceptions of risk. The larger footprint
of short-term wholesale debt markets in
the financial system before the crisis likely
reduced market and institutional resiliency.
Like retail bank deposits, short-term wholesale
funding markets play an important role in
the financial system by providing financial
intermediaries with liquidity to support
their activities. On the other side of these
transactions, short-term wholesale debt—
which includes large time and checking

Financial Developments

69

Chart 5.2.39 Retail Deposits vs. Short-Term Wholesale Funding

Chart 5.2.40 Composition of Short-Term Wholesale Funding

5.2.40 Composition of Short-Term Wholesale Funding

Chart 5.2.41 FBO Share of US$ Short-Term Wholesale Debt

deposits, repos, and CP—meets the demand
of institutional cash managers, such as large
corporations, for liquid investments. Growth in
these markets outpaced that of retail deposits
in recent decades, driven by technological,
regulatory, economic, and other factors
that have changed financial institution and
investment management practices (Chart
5.2.39). In particular, institutional cash
managers once kept most of their liquid funds
in checkable or time deposit accounts at
banks. Since the 1970s, however, they have
placed a large and increasing portion of their
liquid funds in MMFs and other intermediaries,
which, in turn, invest heavily in repos, CP, and
other short-term debt markets that do not
have access to the FDIC’s deposit insurance
(Chart 5.2.40).
The proportion of short-term wholesale U.S.
dollar debt issued by foreign banks increased
markedly before the crisis and remains
elevated. Many foreign banks have large U.S.
dollar funding needs because of their holdings
of U.S. assets and because of the increasingly
global nature of banking. Rather than incur
the restrictions and costs associated with
establishing a U.S.-chartered commercial
bank, many foreign institutions meet dollar
funding needs by issuing large time deposits
from foreign branches located in the United
States or through funding subsidiaries that
issue commercial paper. Even though foreign
branches have access to the Federal Reserve’s
discount window, they are not allowed to issue
insured deposits. By the end of 2006, foreign
banks issued 45 percent of unsecured financial
CP, sponsored 60 percent of ABCP conduits,
and issued 42 percent of commercial bank large
time deposits. Although sponsorship of ABCP
conduits has declined, foreign banks constitute
an even larger share of unsecured CP and large
time deposits (Chart 5.2.41).
The growth of different forms of short-term
debt instruments also corresponds with the
broader trends of nonbank credit intermediation
and the heightened importance of capital
markets. Credit intermediation involving entities
outside the banking system—so-called shadow
banking—increased substantially leading up

70

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 5.2.42 Short-Term Collateralized Debt

Chart 5.2.43 Estimated Size of Repo Market

to the crisis. Significant reliance on short-term
wholesale funding made these entities and the
complex web of activities they supported more
vulnerable to shocks than insured depository
institutions.
These entities also became a source of
vulnerability to the commercial banking
system. For example, banks and other financial
institutions implicitly and explicitly supported a
large volume of short-term wholesale funding
instruments, including ABCP conduits and a
variety of other short-term collateralized debt
(Chart 5.2.42). Before recent accounting
reforms (see Box F: Improvements in
Regulatory Capital and Accounting
Measures of Assets), assets underlying these
funding arrangements were generally offbalance sheet. This kind of accounting allowed
for favorable capital treatment, bolstered
equity returns of the sponsoring institution,
and reduced perceptions of the risk associated
with these arrangements. However, investors’
concerns regarding the quality of ABCP
collateral, the viability of financial guarantors,
and the ability of financial institutions to provide
the promised liquidity support prompted a sharp
contraction in demand for these instruments
beginning in mid-2007. Banks and other
financial institutions purchased the underlying
assets out of implicit or explicit obligation,
placing significant strain on their funding and
capital positions.
A major portion of the pre-crisis increase in
the short-term wholesale funding markets was
associated with the repo market. By using
securities as collateral, repurchase agreements
facilitate the extension of low-cost short-term
financing to holders of high-quality securities.
While the size of the repo market is difficult to
estimate because of netting and accounting
conventions, it had clearly grown rapidly leading
up to the crisis and had become a key funding
source for broker-dealers and hedge funds
(Chart 5.2.43). Changes to bankruptcy laws
that allowed lenders to take possession and
liquidate repo collateral—notwithstanding the
automatic stay otherwise applicable in the
bankruptcy process—likely reduced the cost of
securities financing, increased securities market
Financial Developments

71

Box F: Improvements in Regulatory Capital and
Accounting Measures of Assets
A firm’s capital allows it to absorb unexpected losses on its assets. For regulators to enforce appropriate capital
standards, they need a comprehensive measure of the firm’s total risk exposure. Before the crisis, many financial
institutions avoided higher capital charges relating to particular assets by holding them in off-balance-sheet
vehicles. In addition, some capital risk charges did not appropriately reflect the risk of certain asset classes.
Regulatory changes and accounting rules have been implemented to address these issues, and more changes
are planned.

Consolidating Assets on Balance Sheet
In June 2009, the U.S. Financial Accounting Standards
Board (FASB) introduced two amendments to financial
accounting standards that change the way companies
account for transfers of financial assets and specialpurpose entities. The amendments, which took
effect for most financial institutions in January 2010,
addressed the weakness that financial statements did
not fully reflect material assets and liabilities associated
with certain securitizations in which the securitizers
retained an interest but did not have to record them on
their balance sheets.
Amendments to Accounting Standards Codification
(ASC) Topic 860, “Transfers and Servicing,” revised the
requirements for derecognizing assets. Among other
changes, the amendments eliminated the concept of a
“qualifying special-purpose entity,” thereby subjecting
more mortgage- and asset-backed securitizations to
consolidation on the balance sheet. An institution that
sells certain loan participations is required to retain
those interests on its balance sheet unless it transfers
those participations on a strictly pro- rata basis as to
both payment and default risk.
Similarly, ASC Topic 810, “Consolidation,” requires
that a bank consolidate on its balance sheet certain
“variable interest entities” that previously were permitted
to remain off the balance sheet. Specifically, ASC 810
may require consolidation if an affiliate of the bank
retains control over the financial assets and retains
certain economic rights or obligations with respect to
the assets.
ASC 860 and ASC 810 require additional disclosures
regarding holdings of variable interests, transfers of
financial assets, and continuing involvement with
72

2011 FSOC Annual Report

transferred assets. Securitization requirements
introduced by the Dodd-Frank Act, mandating the
retention of an economic interest in the credit risk
of assets that an entity securitizes, could lead to
consolidation of newly securitized assets under these
requirements.

Leverage Ratio
U.S. regulators also require insured commercial banks
and savings institutions to satisfy a leverage ratio
requirement. A leverage ratio provides for a base of
capital relative to assets and thus constrains the extent
to which institutions can lever themselves. The ratio
provides a backstop against the possibility of model
risk or other mis-measurement of risk in the risk-based
capital rules. For many years, the U.S. leverage ratio
did not incorporate off-balance-sheet exposures, on the
theory that those are captured by the risk-based capital
requirements. Among other changes, the new Basel
III agreement includes a leverage ratio standard that
applies to both on- and off-balance-sheet exposures,
including an add-on for potential future exposure for
over-the-counter derivatives. Section 171 of the DoddFrank Act establishes the risk-based and leverage
capital requirements that are generally applicable to
insured banks as a floor for certain regulatory capital
rules.

Risk-Based Capital
The basis of risk-based capital is an assessment of
how much risk a given class of exposure contains.
The standards for performing this assessment have
changed over time. Both insurance and banking
regulators use risk-based capital measures as one tool
in their assessment of the safety and soundness of
supervised institutions.

Box F: Improvements in Regulatory Capital and Accounting Measures of Assets

Banks and Savings Institutions
The original Basel capital standards used fixed weights
for particular types of credit risk exposure. For example,
certain single-family residential mortgage loans received
a risk weight of 50 percent, while commercial loans
received a weight of 100 percent. For institutions with
large exposures to market risk, risk weights are derived
from value-at-risk calculations for general market risk
and either a standardized approach or value-at-risk
approach for idiosyncratic risks. In addition, risk weights
are applied to off-balance-sheet exposures, including
counterparty credit risk arising from derivatives and
some lending commitments.
In 2007, the U.S. regulators issued a rule implementing
Basel II for internationally active banks and bank
holding companies (BHCs). Basel II incorporates
operational risk exposure and relies more on firms’
internal data regarding the riskiness of exposures. The
rule requires a banking organization to demonstrate
the rigor of its internal risk measurement systems to
its supervisor for at least one year before using those
systems for risk-based capital purposes. Currently
a number of BHCs (representing the majority of U.S.
banking system assets) are in this “parallel run” stage
and are making the necessary systems refinements to
exit the parallel run.
The new Basel III agreement enhances the coverage
of market risk. Certain high-risk positions, such as
structured credit, will now face much higher capital
charges. Basel III also introduces explicit charges
for the mark-to-market losses (also known as credit
valuation adjustments) of counterparty credit risk and
makes it more costly to extend credit to other financial
institutions. These new requirements will make it more

expensive for institutions to engage in activities that
were destabilizing during the financial crisis.

Insurance Companies
A significant component of risk-based capital for U.S.
insurance companies is based on an assessment of
credit quality of (and hence the risk of loss on) an
insurer’s investment portfolio. For bonds rated by at
least one of the nationally recognized statistical rating
organizations (NRSROs), state insurance regulators
for many years relied on a formulaic approach to
translating NRSRO ratings into NAIC designations.
Beginning in 2009 for residential mortgage-backed
securities (RMBS) and 2010 for commercial mortgagebacked securities (CMBS), the state insurance
regulators changed the process by which individual
holdings of insurers are assigned designations of
creditworthiness. This change was made because of
volatility and risk in the residential and commercial
mortgage markets. The new approach focuses on
modeling each security and developing expected
recovery values assuming the securities are held to
maturity. Significantly, the expected recovery values
are compared with individual companies’ carrying
values, reflecting the different risk profile of securities
held at significant discounts to par value. NRSRO
ratings assume holding at par, but in a volatile
marketplace securities are frequently purchased at
deep discounts. In an economic environment that
has seen extreme stress, conservative valuation rules
under statutory accounting principles require an
insurer to take capital impairments. The new process
of evaluating and designating the creditworthiness of
insurer-held RMBS and CMBS more accurately reflects
the risk of loss.

Financial Developments

73

Chart 5.2.44 Bilateral vs. Tri-party Repo Market
5.2.44 Bilateral vs. Tri-party Repo

Market

Chart 5.2.45 Estimated Valueof the Tri-party Repo Market
5.2.45 Estimated Value of the Tri-party Repo Market

5.2.46 Tri-party Repo Collateral
Chart 5.2.46 Tri-party Repo Collateral

liquidity, and facilitated the growth of parts
of the asset management industry. However,
the use of the repo market as an important
source of short-term leverage increased
funding vulnerabilities among key investors and
intermediaries during the crisis.
Repos can be transacted either bilaterally
between two market participants or through an
intermediary, such as a clearing bank, which
administers the exchange of cash and collateral
between dealers and lenders (Chart 5.2.44).
Initially smaller and limited to U.S. Treasury and
agency collateral, the tri-party market grew to
$2.7 trillion in 2008 (Charts 5.2.45), fueled by
increases in securities issuance (which boosted
the secured financing need of market makers),
large inflows of funds into MMFs, and cost
reductions associated with centralized collateral
management at the clearing bank. Despite the
decline in the size of the market, tri-party repo
remains a key source of financing for brokerdealers and other financial market participants
(Charts 5.2.46 and 5.2.47).
The providers of funds in short-term
wholesale markets are institutional investors
such as corporations and asset managers
motivated primarily by liquidity and safety
of principal. Strong growth in the cash and
liquid asset holdings of the corporate and
asset management sectors in the years
before the crisis supported the issuance
of short-term wholesale debt. These cash
investors often use money market funds and
other intermediaries to diversify counterparty
exposures and centralize risk management
and operations. The growing prevalence of
short-term wholesale debt—as well as the size
and risk sensitivity of the institutional investor
base—likely reduced market and institutional
resiliency before the crisis.
Growth in liquid asset and cash holdings was
particularly pronounced in the corporate and
securities lending sectors in the pre-crisis
period (Chart 5.2.48). Cash and related
investments among corporations have
increased at rates exceeding GDP, and they are
a larger share of total assets than in the early
1990s. In addition, the growth in the securities

74

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 5.2.47 Tri-party Repo Collateral Distribution
5.2.47 Tri-party Repo Collateral Distribution

Chart 5.2.48 Wholesale Cash Investors

lending industry—which supplies securities
to broker-dealers, hedge funds, and others in
exchange for cash collateral—has prompted
a substantial increase in related short-term
investing. Cash collateral reinvestment from
securities lenders grew from about $300 billion
in 1999 to about $1.2 trillion in 2007. During
this period, large broker-dealers expanded
their prime brokerage business with leveraged
hedge funds that engaged in fee-generating
activities such as securities lending. However,
lower demand for securities among brokerdealers and hedge funds, as well as heightened
counterparty concerns among securities
lenders, prompted a sharp decline in securities
lending and related cash reinvestment volumes
(Chart 5.2.49). In addition, the weighted
average duration of cash reinvestment declined
as cash management agents reduced risk in
response to the crisis.
5.2.7 Financial Infrastructure
Advances in technology and improvements
to infrastructure—such as exchanges, central
counterparties, and data repositories—have
altered the landscape significantly, providing
financial markets with improvements to
efficiency and transparency.
Exchanges and Electronic Trading Platforms

Chart 5.2.49 Securities Lending Cash Reinvestment

Changes in technology and trading practices
have affected exchanges, encouraging a
migration of trading from exchange floors to
electronic trading platforms. For example,
electronic trading accounted for approximately
83 percent of volume in U.S. futures markets
in 2010 (Chart 5.2.50). There has also been
a notable increase in the use of algorithmic
trading. Extraordinarily high-speed computer
programs facilitate both large-block trading
on the part of professional investors seeking
to minimize their impact on prices (execution
algorithms), and proprietary trading strategies
that can rapidly buy and sell the same
security or future many times per second
(high-frequency trading). The latter type of
computerized trading is believed to account for
50 percent or more of total volume.

Financial Developments

75

Chart 5.2.50 U.S. Futures and Options Trading

Additionally, these types of trading venues have
become more fragmented. Over the past 18
months, the market share of reported trading
volume executed on undisplayed venues
(composed of “dark pools” and broker-dealers
executing trades internally) has increased to
more than 30 percent (Chart 5.2.51). As of
May 2011, no single publicly quoting exchange
platform had more than one-fifth of market share.
Infrastructure Supporting Derivatives Markets

Chart 5.2.51 Trading Venues for U.S. Equities Market Share
5.2.51 Trading Venues for U.S. Equities by by Market Share

Chart 5.2.52 OTC and Exchange Traded Derivatives Growth

Infrastructure supporting derivatives markets is
also undergoing significant change, with certain
asset classes—such as the interest rate swap
market—driving these developments. Trading,
central clearing, and reporting in OTC derivative
trades are likely to undergo significant changes
as regulators begin finalizing, adopting, and
enforcing rules that further strengthen OTC
markets through organized platform trading,
central clearing of standardized products, and
mandatory trade reporting.
Historically, because OTC derivatives instruments
are designed to allow market participants
flexibility in customizing transactions, they have
been significantly less standardized and less
liquid than their listed (or exchange traded)
counterparts. The proportion of OTC relative
to exchange traded derivatives varies widely
by asset class. For example, virtually all credit
derivatives are traded OTC, while in equities,
there is significant liquidity in exchange traded
futures and options globally (Charts 5.2.52,
5.2.53, and 5.2.54). For this reason, many
OTC derivatives trading and risk management
functions were conducted in a bilateral and
distributed manner, without the use of organized
trading platforms or centralized clearing
arrangements. This made it difficult to quantify
and characterize global activity and manage
counterparty credit risk exposures.
Trends toward organized platform trading and
central clearing are helping to address these
challenges. In conjunction with increases in
organized platform trading, the use of central
counterparties in the United States, as well as
the different types and volumes of derivatives
cleared by them, is increasing (Chart
5.2.55). A central counterparty clearinghouse

76

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 5.2.53 OTC and Exchange Traded Derivatives

Chart 5.2.54 Exchange Traded Derivatives

5.2.55 U.S. Regulated OTC Derivatives Central
Counterparties
Chart 5.2.55 U.S. Regulated Derivatives Central Counterparties

serves principally to ensure performance of
the contractual obligations of the original
counterparties to derivatives transactions and
to manage the day-to-day risks and default
risk associated with these obligations and
counterparties, each of whom is a member of
the clearinghouse. This is accomplished by
interposing the central counterparty between
bilateral participants, so that it becomes the
buyer to every seller and the seller to every
buyer (Charts 5.2.56 and 5.2.57). This
arrangement allows the central counterparty
to hold little or no net market exposure and to
provide its core function of centrally managing
the credit and operational risks arising from the
obligations incurred by its members.
Efforts to enhance market transparency in the
derivatives markets are also benefiting from
advances in trade reporting. Three major OTC
derivatives trade repositories currently operate
and support credit, interest rate, and equity
derivatives markets. In other asset classes,
including commodity and foreign exchange
markets, industry efforts to develop centralized
trade repositories are under way, including the
issuance of public requests for proposals.
Outside derivative markets, participants in fixedincome markets are also increasingly using
trade reporting systems to track transactions
as they occur. For example, since 2005, the
Financial Industry Regulatory Authority, the
self-regulatory organization for securities firms
(formerly the National Association of Securities
Dealers), has required that broker-dealers report
virtually all secondary market transactions in
U.S. corporate bonds to the Trade Reporting
and Compliance Engine.
Payment and Settlement Systems
Wholesale financial infrastructure in the United
States handles, on a daily basis, over $13
trillion in U.S. payment, settlement, and clearing
activity—nearly the amount in dollar terms of
the goods and services that the U.S. economy
produces annually (Chart 5.2.58). This activity
includes many types of transactions, such as
multinational companies borrowing foreign
currency to support international trade, brokers

Financial Developments

77

5.2.56 Bilateral Execution

buying stocks or bonds on behalf of clients,
and large financial institutions accessing shortterm funding markets to borrow billions of
dollars overnight to cover daily funding needs.
The smooth functioning of these complex and
interconnected systems, both privately and
publicly run, is vital to the financial stability of
the U.S. economy (Chart 5.2.59).

Chart 5.2.56 Bilateral Execution

The settlement of money can occur on the
books of a central bank, a commercial bank, or
a private sector financial infrastructure. Fedwire
Funds is a dedicated funds transfer network
operated by the Federal Reserve Banks; it
allows commercial banks to settle payment
obligations for their own business purposes
and on behalf of their clients on the books of
the central bank. It is also a cash settlement
agent for many other private sector systems
to facilitate their payment, clearing, and
settlement activity. Fedwire Securities Service,
which allows for the transfer of securities,
was implemented by the Federal Reserve to
reduce risk, expense, and delay in the transfer
of securities; it also plays a role in the clearing
and settlement of U.S. Treasuries and other
government-related securities. The Clearing
House Interbank Payments System (CHIPS)
is the largest private wholesale payment
system for settling large payments between
financial institutions (Charts 5.2.60 and
5.2.61). New private systems have emerged
to meet the growth of cross-border payments.
For example, CLS Bank International (CLS),
which virtually eliminates the settlement risk
associated with foreign exchange transactions,
is the largest multicurrency cash settlement
system in the world.

5.2.57 Execution Through Central Clearing

Chart 5.2.57 Execution Through Central Clearing

5.2.58 Average Daily US$ Payment Flows in 2010
Chart 5.2.58 Average DailyUSDPayment Flows in 2010

.

78

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Since the 1990s, payment and settlement
systems have gone through significant
changes with the introduction of risk-reducing
features such as real-time gross settlement
(RTGS) for large-value payment systems and
delivery versus payment (DVP) for securities
settlement systems. Before this, most largevalue payment systems operated as deferred
net settlement systems, which settle at the
end of the day. RTGS systems, which settle
on a continuous basis, allow for payments to

5.2.59 U.S. Financial Infrastructure
Chart 5.2.59 U.S. Financial Infrastructure

be finalized throughout the day. This reduces
the buildup of potential intraday exposures,
lowering the amount of liquidity used (mainly
central bank money) while reducing costs.
Similarly, DVP systems—which allow for the
gross, simultaneous settlement of securities
and funds—ensure that delivery occurs if, and
only if, payment occurs. These changes were
largely driven by advances in information and
communication technology and have resulted in
the immediate, final, and irrevocable settlement
of funds and securities.
5.2.8 New and Emerging Financial Products
The introduction and growth of new products
is partly driven by firms and markets seeking
new avenues of funding and trading liquidity.

Source: Federal Reserve
Chart 5.2.60 Annual Payment Clearing Volumes

5.2.60 Annual Payment Clearing Volumes

5.2.61 Annual Payment Clearing Values

Chart 5.2.61 Annual Payment Clearing Values

Against a backdrop of a slowdown in credit
growth, the dominance of the GSEs in
securitized mortgages, and uncertainty over new
regulations, the introduction of new financial
products has been limited. Nonetheless,
innovation is already occurring in response to
regulatory pressures designed to increase the
strength and resilience of the system.
For example, prudential regulators are
setting standards that will require banks
and financial institutions to extend the
maturity of their liabilities, while the SEC is
requiring MMFs to shorten the term of the
assets they hold. These new requirements
have led to the introduction of collateralized
commercial paper, which meets the liquidity
requirements for investments by MMFs and
satisfies the need for financial institutions
to extend funding beyond one month
to meet the new stressed funding ratio
requirements. Collateralized CP is intended
to expand funding sources for a variety of
debt and equity securities currently funded
via tri-party repo. The bank sets up a special
purpose vehicle (SPV) to face the bank on
repo transactions. The SPV funds itself with
proceeds from CP issuance to cash investors,
using the proceeds to enter into traditional
repo agreements rather than to buy term
assets, as an ABCP conduit would (Chart
5.2.62).

Financial Developments

79

Chart 5.2.62 Collateralized Commercial Paper Market

5.2.62 Collateralized Commercial Paper Market

Chart 5.2.63 Global Structured Note Issuance

For issues of collateralized CP to date,
accounting treatment of the SPV limits the
opportunity for regulatory capital arbitrage.
Ratings of the structures are pegged to the
rating of the sponsoring bank and do not
receive a “ratings uplift” above the bank’s
rating based on support from potentially illiquid,
difficult-to-price collateral or other structural
features. Although collateralized CP issuance
has been negligible, increased activity could
give rise to potential vulnerabilities, particularly
as the products evolve.	
Financial innovation can also involve the
evolution of existing products in new forms.
Two examples are exchange traded funds
(ETFs) and structured notes. ETFs have
experienced rapid growth and offer an
increasing diversity of fund types (see Box E:
Exchange Traded Funds).
Structured notes, issued primarily by banking
entities, are an important source of funding
for some institutions. These notes are senior
unsecured debt instruments that have a
derivative element. The return on structured
notes is based in part on the performance of
one or more underlying reference assets, such
as equities, commodities, or interest rates.
While the return on a structured note depends
on that of a reference asset, the structured note
remains a recourse obligation of the issuer and
is subject to default risk.

Chart 5.2.64 US$ Structured Notes by Asset Class

Unlike many other structured products,
issuance of structured notes has been broadly
maintained around pre-crisis levels (Chart
5.2.63). U.S. dollar-denominated structured
notes are concentrated in interest-rate-linked
and equity-linked products to a slightly greater
extent than non-U.S. dollar-denominated notes
(Charts 5.2.64 and 5.2.65).
For financial institutions, structured notes offer
an alternative source of unsecured funding,
fee income from design and distribution, and
a potentially economical way to distribute
trading book risk. Structured note designs
are very heterogeneous and can embody
a high degree of complexity, leverage, or
optionality, presenting challenges for issuing

80

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 5.2.65 Non-US$ Structured Notes by Asset Class

firms’ market and liquidity risk management.
Also, the embedded derivatives require firms
to dynamically hedge most structured notes,
exposing the issuer to gap risk—the potential
of losses owing to a sudden and sustained
movement in underlying prices. Firms may
therefore need to rely on consistent access to
liquid markets.

5.3 Resilience of the Financial
System

Chart 5.3.1 Financial to Private Sector Gross Liabilities

Many parts of the financial system were not
sufficiently resilient to function through the
financial crisis without government support.
Interconnections among financial institutions
were complex and poorly understood.
Improvements in capital, funding structures,
transparency, and regulatory and accounting
standards have been undertaken to enhance
the resilience of the financial system, but further
improvement is necessary in a number of areas.
5.3.1 Capital
Capital levels and the capital quality
of financial institutions have increased
significantly since the financial crisis owing
to a return to profitability, capital raising,
regulatory changes, and a dramatic drop in
distributions to shareholders.

Chart 5.3.2 Financial Sector Gross Liabilities to GDP

For leveraged financial institutions, capital
acts as a shock absorber for unexpected
losses. Because the financial system is highly
interconnected, low capital of institutions in one
part of the system can have adverse effects on
other parts of the system. Financial institutions
have significant obligations to each other: the
U.S. financial sector had gross liabilities of
about $61.7 trillion at the end of first quarter
2011, almost twice the gross liabilities of the
nonfinancial private sector (Chart 5.3.1). The
gross liabilities of the financial sector, which
were about one-and-a-half times GDP in the
early 1980s, have been more than four times
GDP in recent years (Chart 5.3.2).
As a result of the interconnections in the
financial sector, the disorderly insolvency of
a financial institution—or the fear of such an
event—can impair the ability of the entire

Financial Developments

81

Chart 5.3.3 Change in Tier 1 Common Ratios for Large BHCs

Chart 5.3.4 Large BHC Dividends and Repurchases

financial system to provide its services to the
real economy, which in turn can adversely
affect the real economy. Therefore, a financial
institution’s insolvency can potentially have
a more severe impact than the insolvency
of a nonfinancial business. Consequently,
because capital acts as a shock absorber for
unexpected losses, it is central to the financial
system’s resilience to adverse developments
and the resilience of the entire economy.
The crisis illustrated that many parts of the
U.S. financial system were undercapitalized
relative to the risk posed by unexpected
losses in their assets (Chart 5.3.3). For
example, a number of asset classes that had
some of the lowest risk weights according to
regulatory capital requirements experienced
severe losses in the crisis (see Box F:
Improvements in Regulatory Capital and
Accounting Measures of Assets). These
classes included residential mortgages, highly
rated MBS and structured securities, and
trading activities. Further, the crisis showed
that some of the capital instruments held
by banks to meet regulatory requirements
were less able than anticipated to absorb the
losses during this period.
The overall U.S. financial system now has a
much higher level and quality of capital than
it did in 2007 for several reasons. One source
of improvement is the exigent assistance
provided by the government to Fannie Mae
and Freddie Mac. Another temporary source
of the improvement was the preferred capital
provided through the TARP, most of which
has since been repaid to the government.
A permanent source of improvement is the
increase in privately sourced high-quality
capital at regulated banking institutions
(Chart 5.1.17). Many banks also lowered
or suspended capital distributions during
the crisis, some in response to government
insistence (Chart 5.3.4). The rise in capital
ratios for the system also partly reflects the
failure of weak specialty mortgage finance
institutions, which removes undercapitalized
firms from the aggregate. The remaining
specialty finance companies primarily are

82

2011 FSOC Annual Report

5.3.5 Change in Tier 1 Common Ratios for Large BHCs

Chart 5.3.5 Change in Tier 1 Common Ratios for Large BHCs

stronger, better-capitalized institutions focused
on secured business and consumer lending.
The SCAP focused on the level of common
equity of the 19 banking firms assessed using
a measure based on common equity that was
consistent with existing regulatory rules, referred
to as tier 1 common, relative to risk-weighted
assets. Tier 1 common is higher quality than
other forms of capital. Under the SCAP, some
firms were required to raise additional capital
in 2009 so that their tier 1 common ratio would
remain above 4 percent in a hypothetical, more
adverse macroeconomic scenario.

Chart 5.3.6 Aggregate Large BHC Capital Ratios

The aggregate dollar amount of tier 1 common
equity at BHCs increased by $333 billion to
$912 billion from first quarter 2009 through
first quarter 2011, and the tier 1 common ratio
increased by 4.1 percentage points to 10.1
percent. These increases were due to private
capital raising, conversion of preferred equity to
common equity, and retained earnings (Chart
5.3.5). In addition, reserves for expected loan
losses increased by $22 billion to $200 billion
over this period. Consequently, as of first
quarter 2011, the banking system had $1.11
trillion of tier 1 common equity plus loan loss
reserves to absorb losses.
The vast majority of the top 100 U.S. BHCs
now hold sufficient amounts of high quality
tier 1 common equity, to easily exceed
regulatory minimums for all forms of capital
(Charts 5.3.6 and 5.3.7).

Chart 5.3.7 Tier 1 Common at the 100 Largest BHCs

Stronger bank capital and liquidity standards
have been a key element of the G-20 financial
sector reform objectives, and the United
States has been significantly involved with the
Basel Committee on Banking Supervision and
its oversight body, the Group of Governors
and Heads of Supervision, to help this work
progress. This global regulatory framework for
bank capital (often referred to as “Basel III”)
was published on December 16, 2010. The
new framework strengthens the resilience of the
banking system through a number of prudential
measures (see Box G: Analytical Basis for
Basel III Capital Standards). Staff at the
federal banking agencies are currently working

Financial Developments

83

Box G: Analytical Basis for Basel III Capital Standards
Capital—the excess of assets over liabilities—is the most important measure of a bank’s viability. Banks need
to hold sufficient capital to handle financial stress, since the owners of a bank’s capital must bear unexpected
losses. Determining the appropriate level of capital is a challenging task for banks and their supervisors. Since
the global financial crisis, international supervisors have introduced new standards that will lead to much higher
capital levels.
Highlighting the importance of capital and the need
for consistency, international supervisors on the Basel
Committee on Banking Supervision have agreed to
an international standard since 1988 (Basel I). The
standard was revised significantly in 2004 (Basel II).

of banks during the recent financial crisis and earlier
stress episodes. The buffer is designed to partly
mitigate the impact of pro-cyclicality on bank balance
sheets: building capital in good times and shrinking
during periods of stress.

During the financial crisis, many banks and other large
financial institutions did not have sufficient capital
to reassure creditors and other counterparties that
they would survive as going concerns. Supervisors
launched a range of analytical projects to determine the
appropriate level for a new capital standard.

To determine the 4.5 percent minimum standard,
supervisors analyzed the historical distribution of net
income in the banking industry relative to risk-weighted
assets. Unlike the calibration of the conservation
buffer, which was based on periods of stress, the
calibration of the minimum was meant to apply across
all points in time.

The result of those efforts was the Basel III accord,
which was agreed to in late 2010. The new standard
includes a higher minimum capital requirement of
4.5 percent of risk-weighted assets, which is the
amount of capital that a bank would generally need
to be regarded as a viable concern; a new “capital
conservation buffer” of 2.5 percent to provide a
cushion during financial shocks and enable banks to
remain above the 4.5 percent minimum; and more
stringent risk-weights on certain types of risky assets,
particularly securities and derivatives.
Crucially, Basel III also defines capital more narrowly
than the previous Basel agreements. The new tier 1
common capital measure is limited mainly to common
equity, because common stockholders are the only
investors who are reliably available to absorb losses
during a financial crisis.
Banks will be significantly more resilient to financial
shocks under the new standard.
To determine the 2.5 percent conservation buffer,
supervisors examined stress test results from several
jurisdictions as well as historical data on the experience

84

2011 FSOC Annual Report

The analysis provided important insights into the scale
of losses experienced historically by banks in various
countries. The chart illustrates the 99th percentile of
losses experienced by banks in the countries that
participated in the Basel discussions. In other words, 99
percent of the time, banks performed better than these
levels (Chart G.1). The assumption underlying this

Chart G.1 Return on Risk-Weighted Assets: 99th Percentile

Box G: Analytical Basis for Basel III Capital Standards

analysis is that if capital were set at a level that could
absorb a high-percentile net loss realization during a
period of stress, creditors and counterparties would
view the bank as a viable concern. The table shows the
same calculations for U.S. bank holding companies,
looking at different periods, samples of banks, and
percentiles (Chart G.2).
There are some reasons to treat these numbers with
caution as to the true extent of possible losses. First,
if a bank failed, its last quarters of (presumably) very
large losses might not be captured in the data. In
addition, any losses that were avoided as the result of

interventions—including actions such as guarantees,
loss-sharing arrangements, and resolution funds—
would not be reflected in these data.
According to these results, the 99th percentile
experience for net income relative to risk-weighted
assets ranged from a 1 percent gain to a loss of more
than 8 percent. The median value across all countries
was a loss of 4 percent. Taking various adjustments into
account (under the new standard, risk-weighted assets
will generally be higher than under the old standard), the
committee viewed these results as confirming the new
4.5 percent regulatory minimum.

G.2 Percentile of the Distribution of After-Tax Net Income to RWA for US BHCs

Chart G.2 Percentile of the Distribution of After-Tax Net Income to RWA for U.S. BHCs

Financial Developments

85

Chart 5.3.8 Core Deposits as a Percent of Total Liabilities

together to implement Basel III standards in the
United States.
As bank balance sheets have improved,
regulators have been assessing requests
by banks to resume or increase capital
distributions to shareholders. The Federal
Reserve evaluated these requests as part of its
efforts to ensure that large complex banking
institutions improve their capital planning (see
Box H: Improving Capital Planning).
5.3.2 Liquidity
Since the financial crisis, financial institutions
have taken steps to manage their liquidity
more conservatively. Banks and other financial
institutions have reduced their reliance on
short-term wholesale funding markets and
have extended the maturity of their liabilities.
The liquidity risk faced by a financial institution
is a function of the liquidity of its assets relative
to the term and reliability of its funding. A
greater reliance on wholesale funding markets,
particularly those for short-term debt (see
Section 5.2.6), can potentially place significant
strains on financial intermediaries during
periods of market stress. If liquid assets are not
sufficient to meet an abrupt withdrawal of less
stable short-term liabilities, then an institution
may be forced to sell less-liquid assets at a
discount. Losses from such asset “fire sales”
and broader price declines can undermine the
financial condition of even healthy institutions,
potentially leading to contagion effects that
are quickly transmitted to the broader financial
system.
One of the key factors that contributed to the
financial crisis was insufficient analysis and
management of liquidity risk by participants
in short-term money markets. During the
crisis, weaknesses in the liquidity risk profiles
of financial institutions became evident and
required a significant expansion of government
support that went well beyond the traditional
safety net extended to regulated depository
institutions (see Section 5.1). Exposure
of these weaknesses has given financial
institutions and market participants a better

86

2011 FSOC Annual Report

understanding of the vulnerabilities in these
markets and, in particular, of the importance of
liquidity risk management.

Chart 5.3.9 Short-Term Wholesale Funding at Large BHCs

Liquidity risk in the U.S. financial sector has
fallen since the crisis, as financial institutions
have more liquid assets and more stable
liabilities on their balance sheets. On the liability
side, short-term wholesale debt outstanding
has declined since the crisis while retail
deposits have increased. Indeed, core deposits
now make up a larger percentage of the total
liabilities of FDIC-insured institutions and
support a greater portion of their less liquid loan
assets (Chart 5.3.8). The reduced reliance on
short-term wholesale debt for funding also has
been notable among larger U.S. institutions
(Chart 5.3.9). This shift has been driven in
part by a general “flight-to-quality” away from
riskier investments as well as higher levels of
deposit insurance coverage. In addition, the low
short-term interest rate environment of recent
years has lowered incentives for nonfinancial
corporations to sweep their cash balances out
of banks into overnight investments.

Chart 5.3.10 Domestic vs. Foreign US$ Bank Debt Issuance
5.3.10 Domestic vs. Foreign US$ Bank Debt Issuance

The long-term debt profile of U.S. financial
institutions has also improved, in part because
longer term funding needs have been modest
given strong deposit inflows and subdued
private nonfinancial credit growth. New
issuance of longer term debt by financial
institutions has been low despite the large
volumes of maturing government-guaranteed
and nonguaranteed debt (Charts 5.3.10
and 5.1.12). On the asset side, U.S. financial
institutions have enhanced their liquidity
profile by increasing balances of highly liquid
securities such as Treasuries, agency debt,
and agency MBS on their balance sheets.

Chart 5.3.11 Foreign Bank Issuance of US$ Short-Term Debt

.

In contrast to domestic institutions, foreign
financial institutions continue to have elevated
levels of short-term wholesale debt outstanding
(Chart 5.3.11). Their issuance of long-term
U.S. dollar denominated debt also remains
elevated. Outside of a decline in foreign-bank
support of ABCP conduits, the composition of
foreign bank short- and long-term wholesale
U.S. dollar-denominated debt appears to

Financial Developments

87

Box H: Improving Capital Planning
Financial institutions’ processes for managing and allocating their capital resources are critical to their individual
health and performance, and to the stability and effective functioning of the U.S. financial system. In the
recent Comprehensive Capital Analysis and Review (CCAR), the Federal Reserve conducted a forward-looking
evaluation of the internal capital planning processes of large complex bank holding companies (BHCs). The
evaluation found that all of the large firms needed to bolster their capital planning.
The CCAR was the first in-depth and cross-sectional
investigation of the capital planning process of
large U.S. financial institutions ever conducted.
Nineteen large U.S. BHCs were required to submit
comprehensive capital plans and additional supervisory
information, and these submissions were evaluated
across five areas:
1. Capital assessment and planning processes
2. Capital distribution policy
3. Plans to repay any government investment
4. Ability to absorb losses under several scenarios
5. Plans for addressing the expected impact of Basel III
and the Dodd-Frank Act
The CCAR was a substantial strengthening of previous
approaches to ensure that large BHCs have thorough
and robust processes for managing and allocating their
capital resources. The CCAR built on lessons regulators
learned during the financial crisis about the importance
of a forward-looking and comprehensive approach
to capital adequacy. This includes an assessment of
the level and composition of a banking organization’s
capital resources under stressed economic and financial
market conditions. The CCAR’s forward-looking
evaluation encompassed both quantitative assessments
and qualitative reviews of large BHC’s processes for
assessing, and strategies for managing, their capital
resources. This analysis complements comparisons of
current capital amounts relative to regulatory minimum
requirements, internal management targets, and capital
levels at peer institutions. In addition, while traditional
approaches have tended to evaluate individual capital
actions in isolation, the CCAR took a longer run, holistic
view of a firm’s strategy and management of its capital
resources over a two-year period. Finally, the CCAR

88

2011 FSOC Annual Report

expanded on traditional practices by undertaking this
assessment of the largest BHCs simultaneously, thus
allowing the process to be informed by a horizontal
perspective of the financial condition of and outlook for
these firms.
An important innovation in the CCAR is the expectation
that large BHCs will submit annual comprehensive
capital plans to the Federal Reserve. These plans will
describe their strategies for managing their capital over
a minimum 24-month forward-planning horizon. While
the specific elements of the plan may evolve over time,
the following are some of the key components:
•	 A description of the firm’s current regulatory capital
base, including key contractual terms of its capital
instruments and any plans to retire, refinance, or
replace the instruments over the planning horizon.
•	 A description of all planned capital actions (e.g.,
dividends, share repurchases, and issuance), as
well as anticipated changes in the firm’s risk profile,
business strategy, or corporate structure over the
planning horizon.
•	 A description of the firm’s processes and policies for
determining the size of dividend and common stock
repurchase programs under various conditions.	
•	 The firm’s assessment of potential losses, earnings,
and other resources available to absorb such
losses in stressed economic and financial market
environments, and the resulting impact on a firm’s
capital adequacy and capital needs over the
planning horizon.
•	 An assessment, accompanied by supporting
analysis, of the post-stress capital needed by the firm
to continue operations, including its functions as a
credit intermediary.

Box H: Improving Capital Planning

The CCAR is a key method through which the Federal
Reserve will hold BHCs—and their boards—to high
standards in the critically important areas of assessing
capital needs on the basis of all a firm’s activities
and firm-wide risk exposures, and ensuring that the
firm uses strong capital planning and management
practices to make decisions that can affect capital.
While many of the firms have made significant
progress in enhancing their capital planning practices
over the past 18 to 24 months, the evaluation found
that all of the large firms needed to continue efforts to
bolster their capital planning.
A large majority of the 19 firms that participated in
the CCAR proposed some form of capital distribution
in 2011; most of the proposals involved a common
dividend increase at some point in 2011. Some of the
proposed increases were extremely modest, while
others were more substantial. In nearly all cases,
however, the levels of proposed dividend payments
remained well below the levels that prevailed before
the recent crisis. A number of firms proposed common
share repurchase programs; in many cases, these
repurchase programs were accompanied by proposed
dividend increases. Several firms also requested
the early redemption or retirement of trust-preferred
securities that currently qualify as tier 1 capital but will
be phased out as a result of the Dodd-Frank Act.
Each of the participating firms that requested increased
capital distributions in 2011 was informed in March

2011 whether the Federal Reserve had any objection
to the proposed increases. If the Federal Reserve did
not object to the distributions proposed in a firm’s plan,
the firm was free to make the distributions, subject
to ongoing monitoring of its financial condition and
operating environment.
In the case of an objection, the firm had the option of
submitting a revised plan for consideration as early as
second quarter 2011. BHCs are expected to address
any supervisory concerns with the initial plans as part of
their resubmissions.
Consistent with the overall supervisory goals of the
CCAR, the focus of the stress scenario used in the
evaluation was on assessing the sensitivity of the
firms’ own projections of capital under both baseline
and stress scenarios to alternative assumptions and
estimates. The Federal Reserve’s development of
independent supervisory estimates for losses and
available resources was central to the evaluation of
the firms’ capital plans. However, the intensity and
comprehensiveness of the analysis was tailored to
each firm and portfolio, depending on several factors.
These included the materiality of the estimate to the
firm’s post-stress capital position, the Federal Reserve’s
assessment of the reliability of the firm’s internally
generated estimates, and the width of the margin by
which the firm’s estimates indicated it would meet the
CCAR’s quantitative criteria.

Financial Developments

89

Chart 5.3.12 Reserves Held by Foreign Bank Branches

have changed little in the past couple of
years. However, the liquidity risks from these
institutions may be mitigated because of greater
asset liquidity on their balance sheets. Indeed,
at the end of first quarter 2011, FBOs held
nearly 30 percent of their assets in the form of
reserves at the Federal Reserve (Chart 5.3.12).
While somewhat elevated, spot and forwardlooking indicators of dollar funding market
stress remain well below levels reached during
the crisis and mid-2010.
A number of reforms will strengthen the
liquidity profiles of financial institutions and
thus enhance their ability to withstand a severe
stress scenario without government support.
The Basel III agreement includes new liquidity
standards for banks and BHCs—the latter
encompassing the largest U.S. broker-dealers—
that will require financial firms to finance more
of their assets and activities with more stable
sources of funding.
This new liquidity framework has two new
minimum requirements. First, the Liquidity
Coverage Ratio (LCR) seeks to promote the
short-term resilience of a bank’s liquidity risk
profile through a standard for high-quality
liquid resources sufficient to survive an acute
stress scenario lasting 30 days. Second, the
Net Stable Funding Ratio (NSFR) addresses
resilience over a longer, one-year horizon
by setting a minimum level of stable funding
sources relative to the liquidity profile of a
bank’s assets, taking into account contingent
liquidity needs associated with, for example,
off-balance sheet commitments. After an
observation period, the LCR is scheduled to be
introduced in 2015 and the NSFR is scheduled
to be introduced by the start of 2018.
In their oversight of BHCs and broker-dealers,
supervisors are reviewing the dedicated
liquidity facilities of each business line. In
addition, accounting standards have been
revised so that financial institutions can
no longer treat certain short-term funding
structures as off-balance sheet. These
changes should limit the possibility that these
structures will receive “favorable” regulatory
and financial statement treatment that

90

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 5.3.13 Average Daily Value of CLS Transfers

obscures the risks posed to the institution
and the financial system (see Box F:
Improvements in Regulatory Capital and
Accounting Measures of Assets).
5.3.3 Financial Infrastructure
Financial infrastructure functioned relatively
well during the crisis, although the crisis
revealed weaknesses and potential stresses,
notably in tri-party repo and mortgage
servicing, that a number of public- and
private-sector initiatives have begun to
address. While these initiatives should
improve efficiency and market functioning,
they also could increase the concentration
and interconnectedness of financial markets in
the global economy.

Chart 5.3.14 Average Daily Volume of CLS Transfers

Large-value payment, clearing, and
settlement systems were tested by the
significant disruptions and shocks in financial
markets during the crisis and its aftermath,
but they generally continued to operate
smoothly throughout this period. Robust risk
management helped to ensure that market
infrastructure operated both safely and
efficiently. In addition, the government’s support
for financial firms and markets, especially the
Federal Reserve’s liquidity provisions, also
indirectly eased liquidity pressures faced by
financial infrastructure.
A good example of the smooth operation
of financial infrastructure was in the global
foreign exchange market. CLS, a system that
began operating in 2002 with the purpose
of addressing settlement risk in the foreign
exchange market, is widely credited with
maintaining confidence for continued interbank
trading and settlement of foreign exchange.
In fact, CLS was able to handle successfully
heightened values and volumes of transactions
during the 2008 financial crisis as well as during
the 2010 peripheral European sovereign debt
crisis (Charts 5.3.13 and 5.3.14).
Many of the new developments and trends in
infrastructure are expected to help mitigate
pre-settlement risk, while enhancing efficiency
as well as market and regulatory transparency.
One such development is the use of central

Financial Developments

91

counterparty clearinghouses for facilitating
trades in various derivatives and other financial
products. In such arrangements, a central
counterparty clearinghouse acts as a guarantor
while providing multilateral netting efficiencies
to reduce the counterparty credit and liquidity
risks faced by market participants. Although
central counterparties are principals to the
transactions they clear, they do not stand to
profit from changes in the market value of those
transactions, and thus have stronger incentives
to develop effective risk management measures
and to monitor their members for potential
stress. Central counterparties also can play an
important role in safely managing a default of a
major counterparty.
Mandatory reporting requirements, which apply
to both exchange traded and centrally cleared
derivatives as well as OTC derivatives, are
expected to help increase the transparency
of open positions in these markets. Pre-trade
transparency will be enhanced through the
publication of quotes and pre-trade interest
for transactions; post-trade transparency will
be improved through detailed reporting to
regulators and the release of basic transaction
information to the public.
Among its other potential benefits, electronic
trading allows for wider participation and
reduced costs for many financial intermediaries
and other market participants. Also, through
established standards for trading procedures
and record keeping, electronic trading reduces
the opportunities for market manipulation.
However, electronic and complex trading
practices also can increase the likelihood of
operational failures and malicious attacks
that could threaten the stability of financial
markets. In one case of an operational error,
on September 13, 2010, data intended to
be placed into the Globex test environment
as part of the CME Group’s normal testing
regimen was inadvertently introduced into the
live trading system. This mistake resulted in a
large number of erroneous trades in a sixminute period, with additional errors occurring
subsequently (Chart 5.3.15). These erroneous
orders moved prices by a significant amount

92

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 5.3.15 Globex CME September 13, 2010 Incident

in six of the eight energy and metals markets
that had significant trading volume, highlighting
the potential for operational errors to affect
market behavior. The potential for a malicious
attack was illustrated when, on February 5,
2011, suspicious files were detected on the
U.S. servers hosting a NASDAQ OMX webfacing application. While these suspicious
files were removed immediately and there was
no evidence that customer information was
accessed or acquired by unauthorized parties,
the incident serves as an important reminder
that trading and clearing infrastructures are
susceptible to intentional disruption and must
be safeguarded accordingly.
The advent of global trade repositories
and central clearing in OTC markets along
with trends in consolidation among existing
clearinghouses and exchanges is likely to
increase the concentration in financial markets
and the interdependencies across multiple
systems and markets. For example, the
financial environment that once had numerous
independent clearinghouses now has fewer
and larger clearinghouses, each with a
global footprint. Many of the same globallyactive banks participate in all of the major
clearinghouses, or act as agent banks and
liquidity providers to these clearinghouses.
As a result of these developments, financial
infrastructure is becoming more interconnected,
highlighting the need for careful supervision.
In the international arena, G-20 leaders agreed to
reforms of the derivatives regulatory frameworks,
including requiring standardized derivatives to be
centrally cleared and, where appropriate, traded
on regulated platforms. U.S. regulators have also
been key participants in revising CPSS-IOSCO
standards on financial market infrastructures to
enhance standards for payment, clearing, and
settlement systems supporting global financial
markets. These proposed principles will help
to address the potential risks resulting from
increased use of infrastructure such as central
counterparties. In addition, the United States
is leading a global effort to develop minimum
standards for margins on derivatives that are not
centrally cleared.

Financial Developments

93

Chart 5.3.16 Current Tri-party Repo High Level Process Flow Flow
5.3.16 Current Tri-party Repo High Level Process

5.3.17 Tri-party Concentration by Asset Class
Chart 5.3.17 Tri-party Concentration by Asset Class

Tri-party Repo
A notable exception to the smooth operation
of payment, clearing, and settlement systems
through the financial crisis was the tri-party
repo market. The weaknesses in the settlement
infrastructure in this market and the attendant
flaws in the risk management practices of
borrowers, lenders, and the two clearing banks
significantly amplified market instability. These
weaknesses, if they are not addressed, will
continue to have the potential to exacerbate
volatility in the overall financial system during
times of stress.
Currently, all tri-party repo contracts, including
those that are not scheduled to mature that
day, are “unwound” each morning. This process
returns cash to the repo buyers (lenders) and
allows the repo sellers (borrowers, who are
typically broker-dealers) to use the securities
in their portfolios to settle other trades outside
the tri-party repo market during the trading day.
New repo contracts are not settled until the
early evening. Under these arrangements, for
most of each business day, the clearing banks
extend hundreds of billions of dollars of intraday
credit to individual dealers between the morning
contract unwind and the evening settlement,
at which time lender funds from the new repo
contracts can be credited to the borrowers’
accounts. Thus, there is an ongoing handoff of
dealer exposure between lenders who bear it
overnight and clearing banks that bear it during
the business day (Chart 5.3.16).
This arrangement proved to be extremely
destabilizing during the crisis, particularly in
light of the significant concentrations of dealer
collateral being financed (Chart 5.3.17).
As the financial condition of some major
securities dealers deteriorated, large lenders
to these institutions began to withdraw their
cash. Lender withdrawals thus contributed to
an adverse feedback loop that exacerbated
counterparty credit risk and asset price volatility,
and eroded the capital and funding capacity of
many financial institutions.
Within the tri-party repo market infrastructure,
the role of the two clearing banks further
intensified these dynamics. As some major

94

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 5.3.18 Tri-party Repo Aggregate Median Haircut

Chart 5.3.19 Lehman Tri-partyRepo Assets inin 2008
5.3.19 Lehman Tri-party Repo Assets 2008

Chart 5.3.20 Lehman Tri-party Repo Cash Investors in 2008

5.3.20 Lehman Tri-party Repo Cash Investors in 2008

securities dealers faced greater difficulty
financing their securities portfolios overnight,
clearing banks became more concerned
about assuming exposure to these dealers by
unwinding their trades and providing intraday
credit to them. Many market participants had
assumed that the clearing bank would always
be available to unwind repo contracts, return
cash to lenders, and finance dealers during
each trading day. They were not prepared for
the possibility that it would refuse to do so. This
belief, and the market’s reliance on clearing
bank intraday credit to fund 100 percent
of market activity during the trading day,
obscured the credit and liquidity risks faced by
participants in these transactions. Dealers were
exposed to significant rollover risk because
of their heavy reliance on short-term funding,
which translated to a large concentration of
repos maturing on any given day that needed
to be replaced by new borrowings. And
because these risks were not well understood
beforehand, neither lenders nor clearing banks
were well prepared to dispose of the collateral
they would have to take on in the case of a
dealer default. Given the severe strains at
that time and the lack of preparedness, many
cash lenders behaved like unsecured investors
and rapidly closed out their repo books with
troubled dealers rather than managing the credit
risk exposure by raising haircuts, narrowing
eligible collateral, and decreasing counterparty
limits (Charts 5.3.18, 5.3.19, and 5.3.20).
The Tri-Party Repo Infrastructure Reform Task
Force was launched to address some of these
vulnerabilities in the tri-party repo market. The
Task Force is an industry working group formed
under the auspices of the Payments Risk
Committee, a private-sector body sponsored
by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York. The
group includes representatives from institutions
that are significant participants in the tri-party
market, including lenders, borrowers, and the
two clearing banks.
Since the Task Force issued initial
recommendations in May 2010, the industry has
made significant progress in improving market
transparency through its monthly reporting of
market volume, collateral composition, and
Financial Developments

95

margin ranges charged by tri-party repo lenders
for each type of collateral, which should help
lay the groundwork for additional reforms.
On June 27, 2011, the two clearing banks
implemented collateral substitution functionality.
Allowing dealers access to collateral needed
to settle trades without requiring an unwind
of all tri-party repo transactions each morning
represents an important prerequisite for
a meaningful reduction in the market’s
dependence on intraday credit.
Additionally, the Task Force is on track to shorten
the daily period during which clearing banks are
providing intraday credit: the settlement time was
moved back from 8:30 am to 10:00 am on July
25 and will be moved back further to 3:30 pm on
August 22. It will also require three-way posttrade confirmation of deal details such as trade
tenor as a prerequisite for settlement, starting on
August 29.
However, much work remains to implement
other recommendations, particularly moving
market participants away from relying on clearing
banks for extensions of intraday credit. The
complications in addressing these issues reflect
the complexities associated with compressing
an end-of-day settlement process to one hour,
implementing technology to support collateral
substitution, and enforcing a cap on intraday
credit provided by clearing banks. Consequently,
the Task Force recently acknowledged that it
will need time beyond 2012 to achieve these
objectives. In addition to technological and
infrastructure challenges, the Task Force’s
composition, which spans a diverse array
of market participants with varied economic
interests, likely has affected its timetable.
Mortgage Servicing
Another weakness in the financial infrastructure
revealed during the financial crisis and
after was in the systems that handled the
servicing of residential mortgages. As the
rate of foreclosure originations increased,
disclosures of widespread irregularities in
foreclosure paperwork prompted an interagency
investigation (Chart 5.3.21). Evidence
emerged during lawsuits brought by borrowers

96

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 5.3.21 Residential Mortgage Foreclosure Starts Rate

facing foreclosure that critical paperwork was
deficient. For example, reports surfaced of
foreclosure affidavits sworn without document
review and of improper notarizations, coupled
with allegations of falsified documents used in
foreclosure proceedings. The matter became
known as “robosigning” for the rapid, seemingly
automated, manner in which flawed paperwork
was generated by some mortgage servicers
initiating foreclosures.
Some of the nation’s largest servicers conceded
possible flaws in their foreclosure procedures
and, by mid-October 2010, had instituted selfimposed moratoriums on foreclosures while
they conducted reviews. The federal banking
regulatory agencies examine the banks’
internal assessments, compliance with state
foreclosure laws, and adequacy of controls
and governance. Subsequently, some agencies
took enforcement action against a number
of servicers. Additionally, state mortgage
regulators are conducting examinations of state
licensed mortgage servicers.
Questions also arose from borrowers facing
foreclosure about whether the parties seeking
foreclosure actually owned the loans and if
they had legal standing to pursue foreclosure.
Issues related to the transfer of ownership of
a mortgage, either as a whole loan or as part
of the securitization process, and procedures
for recording such transfers were factors
contributing to these questions.
An additional risk is that mortgage security
investors could challenge whether mortgages
were transferred to securitization trusts
in accordance with contractual and legal
requirements. The primary concern is that
document custody and transfer issues with
notes and mortgages could render many private
securitizations invalid.
Another ongoing issue is that many loans
underlying securitizations might not meet the
representations and warranties made at the
time the mortgages were initially securitized
or sold. This has led to requirements that
mortgage originators or their successors
repurchase mortgages from investors in MBS

Financial Developments

97

Chart 5.3.22 Residential Mortgage Delinquency Rate

or from Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac. This
risk has risen significantly as a result of high
mortgage delinquencies (Chart 5.3.22). A few
banks have reached settlements with the GSEs
but mortgage repurchases are likely to remain
elevated in the years to come.
5.3.4 Market Functioning
When markets function well, the pricing of
risks and flows of funds occur unimpeded.
Overall, since the major market dislocations
experienced in late 2008, most markets have
facilitated orderly trading and price discovery.
However, certain markets have exhibited
short-term dislocations, in part owing to a
variety of factors pertaining to technological
change and interconnectedness.
Technology has significantly altered the
landscape of financial markets over recent
years, with implications for the resilience of
market functioning. Electronic trading, which
enables extremely fast execution of orders,
has led to a sizable shift in market structure,
allowing for wider participation, reduced trading
costs, and very short-term trading strategies
that take advantage of arbitrage opportunities.
In a normal market environment, and for an
investor seeking to execute a small order, the
result of increased electronic trading is nearimmediate execution. However, even though
technology leads to fast trade execution, it can
also contribute to shrinking liquidity in times of
market dislocation. A number of these market
developments were featured prominently
during a period of extreme market volatility on
May 6, 2010.
The Flash Crash
On May 6, 2010, between 2:40 pm and
3:00 pm, major indexes in both the futures
and equities markets plummeted more than
5 percent in a matter of minutes before
rebounding almost as quickly (Chart 5.3.23).
Approximately two billion shares traded
during this time with a total volume exceeding
$56 billion. Over 98 percent of all shares
were executed at prices within 10 percent
of their 2:40 p.m. value. However, some
equities experienced more severe upward and

98

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 5.3.23 S&P 500 and VIX on May 6, 2010

downward price movements. In particular,
more than 20,000 trades in more than 300
securities were executed at prices more than
60 percent away from their values just before
the onset of the flash crash. These trades
were subsequently labeled erroneous and
thus cancelled by the exchanges and Financial
Industry Regulatory Authority.
The rapid decline in major market indexes
initially began in the Chicago Mercantile
Exchange S&P 500 E-mini futures contracts
(S&P 500 E-mini), as a large sell order coupled
with subsequent selling pressure from highspeed algorithms overwhelmed the immediately
available demand. Cross-market arbitragers
who bought the S&P E-mini as it declined offset
their exposures through sales of individual
equities or ETFs, thereby transmitting the selling
pressure to other markets. With selling pressure
increasing in many markets and prices dropping
rapidly, many electronic market makers who
were simultaneously active in several markets
either widened their spreads or withdrew from
trading entirely, leading to an evaporation of
liquidity in many securities. Issues with data
feeds resulting from delays at some exchanges
also prompted participants to withdraw from
markets, reducing potential purchasers and
helping to allow the price declines to accelerate.
ETFs accounted for 70 percent of the 326
securities for which trades were reversed,
meaning their share prices fell by at least 60
percent from the previous day’s close. Bidoffer quotes from dealers widened significantly
and market makers were unable to transact
efficiently in the underlying basket and maintain
the price of an ETF share close to the net asset
value of its underlying securities. This highlights
the importance of liquid markets for the efficient
operation of this product.
A number of points pertaining to the functioning
of markets can be drawn from this incident.
First, under stressed market conditions, the
automated execution of a large sell (or buy)
order can trigger extreme price movements.
Second, the interaction between automated
execution programs and algorithmic trading
strategies, which ordinarily would reduce

Financial Developments

99

Chart 5.3.24 Citi FX/Equity Realized Correlation Index

5.3.24 Citi FX/Equity Realized Correlation Index

Chart 5.3.25 S&P 500 Implied Correlation Index

5.3.25 S&P 500 Implied Correlation Index

asset mispricing through exploiting temporary
arbitrage opportunities, can under some
circumstances quickly erode liquidity and result
in disorderly markets. In particular, during the
flash crash, high-speed trading algorithms
chased market orders to the level of stub
quotes—bids to buy or offers to sell a stock at a
price so far away from the prevailing market that
it is not intended to be executed, such as a bid
to buy at $0.01 or an offer to sell at $100,000.
Such transactions, clearly outside the scope
of rational pricing, were later canceled, and
the SEC later approved rules to eliminate stub
quotes. In another response to the flash crash,
regulators added new circuit breakers to halt
trading under disorderly market conditions,
with the aim of restoring investor confidence
by helping to ensure that markets operate only
when they can effectively carry out their critical
price-discovery functions.
Heightened Correlations Across Assets
Tighter linkages between some markets were
evident during the crisis. For example, on many
occasions investors pulled away from assets
perceived to be risky, such as equities, in favor
of U.S. Treasuries and other assets perceived to
provide a safe haven. Beyond the developments
associated with the financial crisis, there have
been a number of developments that potentially
could lead to stronger linkages and higher
correlation between assets and across markets.
These developments include the rapid spread
of information, economic integration, and
globalization of capital flows.
As one example of stronger linkages across
financial markets, correlations across equity
markets and currencies generally remain at
elevated levels relative to those of the mid-2000s
(Chart 5.3.24). Even so, another measure
shows that correlations among equities have
declined since mid-2010 (Chart 5.3.25).

100

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 5.4.1 Dow Jones U.S. Total Stock Market Index

Chart 5.4.2 Price-to-Earnings Ratio for Corporate Equities

5.4 Prices and Incentives
Appropriate pricing of financial assets and
instruments, along with proper incentives
to take on risk, are central to maintaining
financial stability. For example, the two large
GSEs encouraged housing purchases and real
estate investment over other sectors, which
misaligned incentives in the financial system.
Currently, the pricing of risk in a number
of important markets—including corporate
equities, corporate bonds, and real estate—
appears to be in line with historical averages.
Compensation for risk in the market for loans
to low-rated, high-yield corporate borrowers
remains in the range experienced in the last
credit cycle. While the values of commodities
and agricultural land are at long-run highs, there
does not appear to be substantial leverage in
those markets.
5.4.1 Securities Markets
Prices of securities reflect a variety of factors,
including investors’ outlook for future cash
flows from a particular asset and the premium
they demand to compensate for the risks
associated with that asset. When the price of
an asset rises, it could be because investors
raised their forecast of future cash flows
or because they lowered the risk premium.
Distinguishing between these two reasons
is empirically challenging. When an asset’s
valuation is high, it may be vulnerable to
reduced investor willingness to hold risk or to
a decline in investors’ evaluation of the asset’s
future outlook.
Equities
Equity market values have rebounded
considerably from their March 2009 lows
(Chart 5.4.1). A valuation measure of
corporate equities typically used by analysts
is the ratio of a stock’s price to the earnings
of the corporation. This measure can be
computed using realized current operating
earnings, forward-looking estimates of future
earnings, or trailing earnings. The price-toearnings (P/E) ratios for the S&P 500 index
appear in line with their average over the
past 20 years (Chart 5.4.2). Investors also

Financial Developments

101

Chart 5.4.3 High-Yield Credit Risk Premium

compare the return on a risky investment asset
such as stocks to a low-risk asset such as
Treasury bonds to determine the risk premium.
With interest rates currently very low, this
second measure suggests that the valuation
of corporate equities could still be somewhat
below historical norms.
Corporate Bonds
In corporate credit markets, the high-yield
credit risk premium can be viewed as a proxy
for risk appetite. The premium rises when
investors are less willing to take on risk and
demand higher compensation for a given
level of risk; conversely, the premium declines
when investors are more willing to take on
risk. Calculation of the credit risk premium
using estimates of the consensus default
rate, which in early 2011 was approximately 2
percent, reveals that the credit risk premium is
below its historical average but within recent
ranges (Chart 5.4.3). As discussed in Section
4.2, there are several reasons why corporate
defaults have been lower than expected since
the beginning of the financial crisis, including
improved fundamentals of high-yield companies
and the ability of companies to refinance nearterm maturing debt in capital markets.
U.S. Treasuries
Investors in long-term Treasuries must consider
the risk associated with movements in nominal
interest rates over the life of the security. In
particular, if nominal rates rise, the secondary
market price of the security will fall. Because
this interest rate risk is greater for longer
maturity bonds, investors generally require
additional compensation to hold longer-maturity
debt. That compensation is often referred to as
the “term premium.”
Investors have tended to increase their
investment in U.S. Treasuries in periods of
financial stress because they see Treasuries as
relatively safe and liquid—in other words, a safehaven investment. In these periods, investors
appear to be more willing to accept a lower risk
premium for longer maturity Treasuries. The
correlation between stock prices and Treasury
returns—a measure of this safe-haven demand—

102

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 5.4.4 Correlation of Stock Prices and Treasury Returns

5.4.4 Correlation of Stock Prices and Treasury Returns

turned sharply negative as the financial crisis
started to unfold in 2007. The correlation turned
sharply negative again in early 2010 and in early
2011, periods when European sovereign debt
problems escalated, also suggesting safe-haven
demands (Chart 5.4.4).
5.4.2 Real Estate Markets
Rapid growth in credit for real estate purchase
and investment can produce large imbalances.
Assessments of valuations are challenged by
the illiquidity inherent in real estate and the
lack of comparability among property types.
Residential Real Estate

Chart 5.4.5 Price-to-Rent Ratio for Residential Property

In evaluating residential real estate prices, the
ratio between the price of a single-family house
and the rent it could obtain is analogous to the
P/E ratio for stocks. However, calculating this
ratio in the case of real estate is more difficult
because, unlike stocks, residential property
is very illiquid, real estate provides significant
nonmonetary returns to households, and
properties are seldom exactly comparable.
Moreover, aggregate indexes of home prices
and rents probably measure the prices and
rents of different properties. Despite these
qualifications, indexes based on price-to-rent
ratios for residential real estate can still provide
information about broad trends in the valuation
of housing. One such index reached a record
high in 2006, at the peak of the housing boom,
but has since reversed essentially all of the
increase between the late 1990s and 2006.
The most recent readings put this residential
real estate valuation metric about in line with its
average over the 1990s (Chart 5.4.5).
Commercial Real Estate
Notwithstanding that commercial real estate
(CRE) values have broadly declined, it is useful
to observe trends in capitalization rates—the
ratio of income produced by a property to the
property value—on newly originated loans
(Chart 4.1.15). Capitalization rates broadly
fell over the course of 2010 and the first part
of 2011, signaling higher CRE valuations.
The bulk of recent commerical property sales
have involved higher quality properties in
major cities, where valuations have increased

Financial Developments

103

Chart 5.4.6 Capitalization Rate and Spread
5.4.6 Capitalization Rate and Spread

relative to the rest of the market. Valuations
in these markets have also benefited from a
lower interest rate environment, which has
contributed to the decline in capitalization
rates. However, the spread between the
capitalization rate and the risk-free rate
remains elevated compared with pre-crisis
levels, signaling that investors are currently
applying a higher risk premium (Chart 5.4.6).
Agricultural Land

Chart 5.4.7 Farm Land Prices

Chart 5.4.8 Agricultural Real Estate Debt Outstanding

Agricultural land values have increased, driven
by rising commodity prices, favorable export
conditions, and low interest rates. On an
inflation-adjusted basis, agricultural land values
are now near the highest levels of the past 50
years (Chart 5.4.7). Currently, in the aggregate,
incomes in the U.S. farm sector are performing
well, forecasts for production and demand
are positive, and debt levels in general do not
appear excessive. However, if farm incomes fall
owing to a decline in either domestic or export
demand, or an increase in operating costs, then
agricultural land values may be susceptible to a
decline.
Adjusting for inflation, current agricultural real
estate debt levels remain significantly below
the levels of the late 1970s (Chart 5.4.8). The
Farm Credit System and community banks that
specialize in agriculture lending have the bulk of
exposures to agricultural land. While the extent
to which high agricultural land prices reflect
their underlying fundamentals is uncertain, a
sizable decline in land values could have an
adverse impact on the financial institutions that
hold farm loans. These institutions will need to
maintain prudent lending standards in the face
of high and rising land values.
5.4.3 Loans
During a prolonged period of low interest
rates, some institutions may reach for yield
by increasing duration, lending to lower rated
borrowers, or employing more leverage. Such
concerns today are focused in the market for
low-rated corporate credits, referred to as the
leveraged loan market.
Leveraged loans—a form of floating rate
instrument that would provide protection

104

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 5.4.9 Syndicated Leveraged Loan Market

5.4.9 Syndicated Leveraged Loan Market

Chart 5.4.10 Composition of Leveraged Loan Investors

Chart 5.4.11 All in Cost of Leveraged Loans

against interest rate risk relative to fixed rate
instruments in a rising rate environment—have
attracted strong investor interest. Bank loan
funds, for example, have experienced record
high inflows, bolstering secondary market prices
and filling the gap left by maturing collateralized
loan obligation vehicles (Chart 5.4.9). Most
leveraged loans are not retained by bank
arrangers; rather, they are increasingly sold to
institutional investors (Chart 5.4.10). Unlike the
peak of the market in 2006–07, little evidence
exists that leverage is being employed on any
significant scale in the funding of loans through
repos or total return swaps, suggesting that the
potential for a rapid and disorderly deleveraging
in this market is limited.
The all-in cost of leveraged loans has been
driven lower by the low-rate environment,
although the average spread required by
investors is higher (Chart 5.4.11). The lower
cost has facilitated heavy loan refinancing:
nearly three-quarters of issuance in early 2011
and more than half of issuance in 2010 was
for this purpose. While issuance of leveraged
loans has been robust, outstanding loans have
declined, in part reflecting paydowns from
robust bond issuance (Chart 4.1.3).
Most metrics for leveraged loan and high-yield
bond deals remain in the middle of the range
experienced through the last credit cycle, from
2002 to 2010 (Chart 5.4.12). Issuance by the
lowest rated borrowers (for example, those
rated CCC by S&P) remains muted compared
with levels seen during 2006 and 2007.
Relative to overall total loan issuance, there is
less issuance of loans for leveraged buyouts,
and those issued tend to require higher equity
contributions. However, issuance of certain
loan structures has been increasing since 2009.
Loan issuance for the purpose of financing
a dividend or shareholder buyback, also
known as a dividend recapitalization, reached
historically high levels in early 2011 owing to
low interest rates and strong demand for loan
assets. Additionally, covenant-lite loans—those
that do not provide investors with the traditional
protection of maintenance covenants—have
recently made up a high percentage of issuance

Financial Developments

105

Chart 5.4.12 Leveraged Loan NewIssuance Metrics
5.4.12 Leveraged Loan New Issuance Metrics

Chart 5.4.13 Leveraged Loan NewIssuance Characteristics
5.4.13 Leveraged Loan New Issuance Characteristics

(Chart 5.4.13). While neither of these issuance
types may be indicative of a new vulnerability,
they do reflect an increase in investor risk
appetite as well as the dynamics of market
competition, including pressures on fund
managers to invest inflows and on arranging
banks to maintain market share.
Mitigating these trends, bank underwriters have
lower warehouse risk, that is, the risk of losses
on assets that they are holding prior to sale.
This is partly because deals are smaller than
they were before the financial crisis. Also, unlike
the fully committed transactions seen during
2006 and 2007, banks report that financings
are currently arranged on a “best efforts” basis,
in which underwriters do not commit to take
on the risk of the entire loan before syndication
but maintain contractual flexibility after the
commitment to adjust the pricing and structure
of loans (at the expense of borrowers) to
market-clearing levels if necessary.
5.4.4 Commodities
Commodities prices are subject to standard
demand and supply factors. Additionally,
financial instruments that track commodities
play an increasing role in the market.

Chart 5.4.14 Commodity Prices

5.4.14 Commodity Prices

Commodity prices rose in 2010 and early 2011.
Energy prices rose strongly in the first half of
2011, but they have not reached the levels seen
in mid-2008. Prices for a number of agricultural
and industrial commodities have reached
record levels in nominal terms (Chart 5.4.14).
The global economic recovery, particularly the
robust growth in many major emerging market
economies, has been a major factor behind the
recent strength in commodity prices.
Oil prices generally have tracked the improving
world economy, with the spot price of Brent
crude oil, a standard for world oil prices,
rising from a low of just under $34 per barrel
in December 2008 to over $120 per barrel
in spring 2011 before falling a little more
recently. The price of West Texas Intermediate,
a standard in the United States, has followed
a similar pattern. Demand growth since the
recession has come largely from emerging
economies, as consumption in the Organisation
for Economic Co-operation and Development

106

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 5.4.15 Middle East Producers: Production and Capacity

Chart 5.4.16 Oil Market Price and Net Long Positions

countries has grown very little during this
period. Price movements in early 2011 reflected
events in Libya and elsewhere in the Middle
East and North Africa. While Libya accounted
for only 2 percent of global supply in 2010,
concerns focus on the uncertainty regarding
the long-term damage to Libya’s production
infrastructure and to further supply impacts
from the political unrest across the region.
The lack of spare capacity among foreign oil
producers and concerns about future long-run
production growth have also added to price
pressures (Chart 5.4.15).
The increased financialization or trading of
liquid, synthetic financial products based on
less liquid physical commodities is evidenced
by the growth in commodity ETFs (Chart
E.1). Additionally, the liquidity of commodity
futures markets, which provide a critical pricediscovery function for physical markets, is
supported by speculative market makers. A
rapid sell-off and spike in volatility in crude oil,
refined energy, and silver markets in May 2011
coincided with an unwinding of speculative
positions, which had reached record levels in
a number of commodities (Chart 5.4.16). In a
dynamic similar to that of the flash crash, the
speed and magnitude of price declines in these
markets revealed that the automatic liquidation
of positions may have contributed to reduced
liquidity and downward price pressure.
5.4.5 Incentives
Programs and policies can affect incentives
for risk taking in financial markets. It is crucial
that programs and policies are designed
with appropriate safeguards, such as with
deposit insurance, to provide financial system
participants with proper incentives to help
maintain a well-functioning financial system.
Deposit Insurance
Congress created federal deposit insurance
in 1933 in response to the thousands of bank
failures that occurred in the 1920s and early
1930s. Deposit insurance promotes financial
stability by maintaining public confidence in
the banking system, ensuring that depositors
continue to place their money in the system,
and limiting the incentives for depositors to

Financial Developments

107

Chart 5.4.17 BHC Systemic Uplift

quickly withdraw their money when banks
become troubled. During the most recent
crisis, depositors remained confident that their
money was safe and insured deposits provided
a stable source of funding for individual banks
and the banking system as a whole.
Still, government-provided deposit insurance
has the potential to lead to excessive risk-taking
at banks. Insured depositors do not have an
incentive to monitor the decisions management
makes on behalf of the equity holders, who reap
the gains on the upside but have limited liability
on the downside. To address this moral hazard,
banks are subject to prudential supervision,
capital regulation, activity restrictions, and riskbased pricing of deposit insurance.

Chart 5.4.18 S&P Current Actual & Market Implied Rating

Chart 5.4.19 Current Long-Term Ratings and Uplift

5.4.19 Current Long-Term Ratings and Uplift

108

2011 FSOC Annual Report

The enactment of the Dodd-Frank Act has led
to a number of significant changes to FDIC
deposit insurance and, to a lesser extent, NCUA
share insurance. The Act permanently raised
the deposit insurance limit from $100,000 to
$250,000 and temporarily extended deposit
insurance coverage to the full balance of noninterest-bearing transaction accounts through
the end of 2012.
The Dodd-Frank Act made a number of other
significant changes to FDIC deposit insurance.
First, it changed the basis for calculating
the assessment that insured depository
institutions pay the FDIC from domestic
deposits to a measure of total assets less
shareholder equity. This change generally
will shift the overall assessment burden away
from community banks and toward the largest
banks, which rely less on domestic deposits
for their funding. This change will better align
an institution’s deposit insurance assessment
with the impact that its failure would have
on the FDIC’s Deposit Insurance Fund (DIF).
Second, the Dodd-Frank Act raised the
minimum reserve ratio for the DIF balance
from 1.15 percent to 1.35 percent of insured
deposits and requires the FDIC to achieve
the minimum reserve ratio by September 30,
2020. Third, the Act provided new flexibility to
the FDIC in setting a long-run target reserve
ratio for the DIF, which the FDIC has set at 2
percent. This should enable the FDIC to build

5.4.20 Current Short-Term Ratings
Chart 5.4.20 Current Short-Term Ratings

up a larger balance during better economic
times, maintain a positive balance during
periods of stress, and establish more stable
assessment rates over the economic cycle.
Large Complex Financial Institutions
Some large complex financial institutions can
derive benefits from the perception that they are
“too big to fail.” Institutions that are perceived
to be difficult to resolve in an orderly manner if
they fail can undermine market discipline. The
distortions induced by “too big to fail” may be
evident in the creditworthiness assigned to
these firms by credit rating agencies and more
directly in their funding costs.

Chart 5.4.21 Interest Expense as a Percent of Total Liabilities

Chart 5.4.22 Noninterest-Bearing Liabilitiesto Total Liabilities
5.4.22 Noninterest-Bearing Liabilities to Total Liabilities

Credit rating agencies factor an explicit “uplift”
into the ratings of certain financial institutions
over their stand-alone credit ratings on the
basis of perceived government support. The
support embedded in firms’ uplifted ratings
increased dramatically in 2008 and persists.
However, analysis based on credit default
swap pricing for these large complex financial
institutions suggests that markets are not
factoring the ratings uplift into their evaluation
of these companies’ long-term debt (Charts
5.4.17, 5.4.18, and 5.4.19). The uplift does
have a direct benefit for the short-term funding
rating for these firms, which is currently the top
tier A-1/P-1 rating (Chart 5.4.20). This rating
allows these firms to access certain short-term
wholesale funding markets that they would not
be able to access with a lower rating.
Large banks with over $100 billion in assets
have greater access to market funding and a
lower total funding cost than smaller institutions,
as measured by the interest expense on total
liabilities (Chart 5.4.21). The lower funding cost
for larger banks is partly due to their greater
ability to bundle a range of services to attract
low-cost deposits; larger banks have also
benefitted from the full guarantee on transaction
accounts (Chart 5.4.22). Market-based factors
also play a role. Larger institutions have access
to market-based short-term sources of funding,
such as through MMFs, which are currently
providing funding at historically low rates.

Financial Developments

109

Chart 5.4.23 Value Added Share of Financial Sector

Credit rating agencies have said they will review
their U.S. bank support assumptions in the
coming year on the basis of the enhanced
resolution authority established under the
Dodd-Frank Act (see Box I: Addressing
Issues Related to Large Complex Financial
Institutions and Section 6.1.2). As credit
rating agencies consider the likelihood and
potential impacts of a reduction in official
support, they have placed certain firms’ ratings
on review for potential downgrade.
Compensation

Chart 5.4.24 Financial Sector Share of Nonfarm Payroll

Chart 5.4.25 Financial Sector Share of Corporate Profits

As the financial system became more complex
and globalized, the contribution of the financial
sector to U.S. output increased by about 60
percent from 1980 to 2000 (Chart 5.4.23).
This increased contribution was achieved with
little change in the share of employment in the
financial sector (Chart 5.4.24). Since 2000, its
share of GDP has remained around 8 percent
and its employment share just above 5 percent.
With the exception of the recent recession,
finance accounted for 25 percent to 50 percent
of all corporate profits over the past decade
(Chart 5.4.25).
Labor compensation in the financial sector is
considerably higher than in many other industries
and also tends to depend more heavily on
complicated incentive structures. Average annual
compensation in finance between 2001 and
2010 was 70 percent to 90 percent higher than
in other industries (Chart 5.4.26). Specifically,
average compensation in investment banking
and securities dealing was 300 percent to
450 percent higher (Chart 5.4.27). The labor
compensation share of value added in finance
has fallen abruptly as many firms have made
substantial changes to their compensation
structures, partly to increase capital buffers
through retained earnings (Chart 5.4.28).
Compensation has grown dramatically for
senior executives at the largest, most complex
financial institutions. For example, in 1989,
the chief executives at the seven largest
BHCs earned an average of $2.8 million, or
97 times the median U.S. household income
of $28,906 for that year. In 2007, the CEOs at
the six largest BHCs earned an average of $26

110

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 5.4.26 Financial Sector Wages to All Wages

5.4.27 Investment Banking Wages to All Wages

5.4.28 Compensation Share of Industry Value Added

million, or 516 times the median household
income of $50,233 for that year. In 2007,
these CEOs earned 2.3 times the average
total compensation of the CEOs at the top 50
nonbank companies.
Because they affect the incentives of current
and prospective employees, compensation
programs are critical tools that can contribute
to the success of financial institutions. If they
are properly structured, they can help to attract
and retain qualified staff and to align employee
performance with organizational objectives.
However, if they are not properly structured,
compensation practices can lead to excessive
risk taking by an institution’s employees and
have the potential to undermine the safety and
soundness of the financial institution as well
as that of the financial system itself. The G-20
leaders called for reform of compensation
and endorsed the Principles for Sound
Compensation Practices issued by the Financial
Stability Board (FSB) in April 2009. Since then,
many financial institutions have reexamined their
compensation practices and are reevaluating
possible links between incentive compensation
and risk-taking behavior.
In June, 2010, the U.S. federal bank regulatory
agencies issued supervisory guidance to ensure
that incentive compensation arrangements at
banking organizations take risk into account
and are consistent with safe and sound
practices. The guidance stated that incentive
compensation programs should provide
employees incentives that appropriately
balance risk and financial results; they should
be compatible with effective controls and riskmanagement; and they should be supported by
strong corporate governance.
Subsequently, on March 30, 2011, as required
by the Dodd-Frank Act, a broader set of
financial regulatory agencies issued a proposed
rule on incentive compensation that will apply to
investment advisers, broker-dealers, and other
entities, as well as banking organizations. The
proposed rule, which is discussed more fully in
Section 6.3.5, would apply to certain financial
institutions with more than $1 billion in assets
and would prohibit compensation arrangements
that could encourage inappropriate risks.
Financial Developments

111

Box I: Addressing Issues Related to
Large Complex Financial Institutions
Large complex financial institutions (LCFIs) can be an efficient means of providing financial services to the
economy. However, in the absence of an appropriate regulatory structure and robust risk management practices,
the benefits of LCFIs can be outweighed by the risk they pose to the stability of the financial system, especially
in times of severe market stress. The Dodd-Frank Act puts in place a number of measures to mitigate this risk.

In the years preceding the crisis, the structure of many
commercial banks, investment banks, and insurers
had become increasingly complex, with numerous
subsidiaries that spanned the globe (Chart I.1).

I.1 Complex U.S. Financial Institutions in 2007
Chart I.1 Complex Financial Institutions in 2007

Among the goals of the Dodd-Frank Act are to work
toward ensuring that the risks posed by LCFIs are
prudently managed and subject to adequate oversight,
and eliminating the “too big to fail” risk and the
necessity for government assistance to nonviable
financial companies. The law, including provisions in
Title I and Title II, uses the following tools to accomplish
these goals.

Designation of Nonbank Financial Companies
The Council is authorized to designate nonbank
financial companies as subject to enhanced prudential
standards and supervision by the Federal Reserve. The
Council must consider various factors in determining
whether to make this designation, including leverage;
off-balance-sheet exposures; and the nature, scope,
size, scale, concentration, interconnectedness, and mix
of activities of the company.

Enhanced Prudential Standards and
Supervision
The LCFIs at the center of the 2008 crisis could not be
wound down in an orderly manner when they became
nonviable. Major segments of these companies’
operations were subject to the U.S. Bankruptcy Code,
as opposed to bank receivership or other specialized
insolvency laws, or they were located abroad and
therefore outside U.S. jurisdiction for insolvency
purposes. In the midst of the crisis, policymakers in
several instances provided government assistance
instead of letting these companies file for bankruptcy.
They were concerned that creditor losses and other
uncertainty associated with the bankruptcy process
would cascade through the global financial system.
These concerns were realized when the prime
brokerage assets of Lehman Brothers in the U.K. were
frozen following that firm’s bankruptcy.

112

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Major financial companies—bank holding companies
with assets over $50 billion and designated nonbank
financial companies—will be subject to enhanced
prudential standards and supervision by the Federal
Reserve to ensure that they have sufficient buffers to
withstand severe financial stress. Strengthened capital
and liquidity requirements will be core elements of these
enhanced standards.
The Dodd-Frank Act also requires regulators to
establish remedial actions to be taken when a financial
company that is subject to enhanced prudential
standards is experiencing increased financial distress.
These remedial actions are intended to minimize the
probability that such a company will become insolvent
and harm the stability of financial markets.

Box I: Addressing Issues Related to Large Complex Financial Institutions

Concentration Limits

Orderly Liquidation Authority

The Dodd-Frank Act establishes a financial sector
concentration limit. This limit generally prohibits
a financial company from merging or acquiring
another company if the total consolidated liabilities
of the combined entity would exceed 10 percent of
the aggregate consolidated liabilities of all financial
companies. This limit should help avoid a financial
system that is over-reliant on any particular firm, as well
as acquisition-driven growth that is not accompanied by
appropriate risk management systems and processes.

Enhanced prudential standards and supervision by
the Federal Reserve will help mitigate the risks posed
by LCFIs. However, if such an institution fails, the
orderly liquidation authority—under which company
shareholders and unsecured creditors bear the losses
of failure—provides the government with the tools
and authority to resolve a failed institution in a manner
that limits broader systemic impact and taxpayer
cost during times of severe market stress. This new
framework should help strengthen market discipline and
discourage the subsidization of excessive risk taking
that occurred before the crisis.

Detailed Resolution Plans
Financial companies subject to enhanced prudential
standards are required to maintain detailed resolution
plans that would facilitate a resolution under the
Bankruptcy Code. The Dodd-Frank Act also requires, if
necessary, changes in the structure or activities of these
companies to ensure that they meet the standard of
being resolvable in a crisis.

These provisions, together with other elements of
regulatory reform, such as regulation of the over-thecounter derivatives market and the implementation of
international Basel III capital standards, are aimed at
achieving a more resilient financial system that is better
able to withstand the level of stress that occurred
during the financial crisis.

Financial Developments

113

6	 Progress in the Implementation of the 	
	 Dodd-Frank Act; Council Activities
The regulatory implementation of the Dodd-Frank Act has included introducing stronger
supervision, risk management, and disclosure standards; establishing orderly resolution
plans and an orderly liquidation regime to prevent firms from being perceived as too
big to fail; regulating the derivatives markets to reduce risk and increase transparency;
reforming the securitization markets; enhancing standards for hedge fund advisers;
creating the new Federal Insurance Office (FIO); strengthening the oversight program for
credit rating agencies; establishing the Office of Financial Research (OFR); consolidating
federal banking regulators; and implementing measures to enhance consumer and
investor protection.
In addition, in its first year, the Council laid the groundwork for determining which nonbank
financial companies will be supervised by the Federal Reserve and subject to heightened
prudential standards, and for designating systemically important financial market utilities
that will be subject to risk management standards. The Council also initiated monitoring of
potential risks to U.S. financial stability; fulfilled explicit statutory requirements, including
the completion of several studies; served as a forum for discussion and coordination
among the member agencies implementing the Dodd-Frank Act; and built its basic
organizational framework.
The following is a discussion of the significant implementation progress the Council and
its member agencies have achieved since enactment of the Dodd-Frank Act.

6.1 Safety and Soundness
6.1.1 Capital Adequacy Rules
In June 2011, the federal banking agencies adopted
a rule to implement portions of Section 171 of the
Dodd-Frank Act, which is generally referred to as
the Collins Amendment. Section 171 addresses
several issues regarding financial institutions’ capital
adequacy.
One issue was to eliminate the possibility that
adoption by the largest institutions of advanced
Basel II approaches to calculating regulatory capital
could result in those institutions holding less capital
than that required of smaller banks. Such a result
would be inconsistent with the intent of the DoddFrank Act, which is that the largest institutions

should be subject to heightened capital standards.
Accordingly, Section 171 provides that the capital
requirements that generally apply to insured banks
will serve as a floor for any capital requirements
the agencies may establish for banks, depository
institution holding companies, and nonbank financial
companies supervised by the Federal Reserve.
Section 171 also seeks to ensure that the
instruments issued by depository institution holding
companies eligible for inclusion in regulatory capital
are equivalent or superior to those issued by insured
banks. In general, starting January 1, 2013, for
certain depository institution holding companies, any
regulatory capital deductions required by Section
171 will be phased in incrementally over three years.

Progress in the Implementation of the Dodd-Frank Act; Council Activities

115

6.1.2 Resolution Plans and Orderly Liquidation
Authority
Resolution Plans
To improve the resolvability of large financial firms
and increase stability during times of market stress,
Section 165(d) of the Dodd-Frank Act requires
nonbank financial companies designated for
enhanced supervision by the Federal Reserve and
bank holding companies (BHCs) with $50 billion or
more in total consolidated assets to prepare and
maintain plans for their rapid and orderly resolution
under the U.S. Bankruptcy Code; these plans are
sometimes referred to as “living wills” (see Box I:
Addressing Issues Related to Large Complex
Financial Institutions). These resolution plans are
not binding on bankruptcy courts or receivers. The
Federal Reserve and the FDIC must review each
plan. If they determine that a plan is not credible
or would not facilitate an orderly resolution under
the U.S. Bankruptcy Code, they may compel the
firm to resubmit a conforming plan. If a conforming
plan is not forthcoming, the two agencies can take
further action, including imposing more stringent
capital and liquidity requirements or, in consultation
with the Council, ordering a divestiture.
Resolution plans are required to include information
such as the following:
•	

the manner and extent to which any insured
depository institution affiliated with the
company is adequately protected from risks
arising from the activities of any nonbank
subsidiaries of the company;

•	

descriptions of the company’s ownership
structure, assets, liabilities, and contractual
obligations; and

•	

identification of the cross-guarantees tied
to different securities, identification of major
counterparties, and a process for determining
to whom the collateral of the company is
pledged.

In April 2011, the FDIC and the Federal Reserve
released for public comment a joint proposed rule
that would implement the requirement to prepare
and maintain resolution plans.

116

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Orderly Liquidation Authority
The financial crisis demonstrated that for certain
BHCs or other financial companies near failure
during a time of severe market stress, there may
be only two options in the absence of a credible
orderly liquidation authority: emergency public
funding or bankruptcy. Neither of these options can
accomplish the efficient and effective resolution of
such a firm in a way that both limits the systemic
impact and imposes costs on private investors
rather than taxpayers. Title II of the Dodd-Frank
Act created an orderly liquidation authority (OLA)
that authorizes the government to address the
potential failure of a BHC or other financial company
when the stability of the financial system is at risk.
The OLA is modeled on the resolution provisions
of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act. After being
appointed receiver under the processes described
below, the FDIC is authorized to transfer to a third
party assets or liabilities of a company subject to
the OLA.1 The FDIC may also establish a temporary
bridge financial company to hold any part of the
company’s business with going-concern value until it
can be sold to a third party at fair value or otherwise
liquidated in an orderly fashion.
To help ensure that taxpayers do not cover the costs
of liquidation, all funds expended by the FDIC must
be recovered through the disposition of the failed
company’s assets, assessments on the creditors
that stand to benefit from the process because
of additional payments made to such creditors
in certain limited circumstances, or assessments
on large financial firms. In addition, under certain
circumstances, senior executives and directors of
a company subject to the OLA may be prohibited
from participating in the conduct of the affairs of any
financial company and be subject to recoupment by
the FDIC of compensation received in the two years
before the failure.
On the recommendation of two-thirds of the Board
of Governors of the Federal Reserve and twothirds of the board of the FDIC (or, depending on
the nature of the financial company, two-thirds of
1 In the case of a failing insurance company, the company is resolved
under the relevant state’s liquidation or rehabilitation process rather than
under the FDIC’s receivership process. Special procedures also apply to
the resolution of failing financial companies that are broker-dealers.

payment of similarly situated creditors (which
includes the treatment of holders of long-term
senior debt); honoring personal services contracts;
recognition of contingent claims; treatment of
any remaining shareholder value in the case of a
financial company subject to FDIC receivership (a
covered financial company) that is a subsidiary of an
insurance company; and limitations on liens that the
FDIC may take on the assets of a covered financial
company that is (1) an insurance company or (2) a
covered subsidiary of an insurance company (other
than an insured depository institution, an insurance
company, or certain broker-dealers).

the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve
and either two-thirds of the members of the
SEC or the approval of the Director of the FIO, in
consultation with the FDIC) and in consultation
with the President, the Dodd-Frank Act authorizes
the Treasury Secretary to appoint the FDIC as
receiver of certain financial companies if the
Treasury Secretary makes certain findings. The
required findings include a determination that the
failure of the financial company and its resolution
under otherwise applicable insolvency law would
have serious adverse effects on financial stability
in the United States; that no viable private sector
alternative is available to prevent the default of the
financial company; and that the use of the OLA
would avoid or mitigate the adverse effects that
would result from resolving the financial company
under otherwise applicable insolvency law.
The OLA is a remedy of last resort, to be used
only if the other tools provided by the DoddFrank Act—including the increased informational
and supervisory powers—are unable to stave off
a failure that could threaten financial stability. In
particular, it is expected that the mere knowledge
of the consequences of resolution under the OLA,
including the understanding that financial assistance
is no longer an option, would encourage a troubled
financial company to find an acquirer or a strategic
partner on its own well in advance of failure.
Title II of the Dodd-Frank Act authorizes the FDIC,
in consultation with the Council, to adopt rules to
implement the OLA process. The FDIC adopted
a final rule to implement the OLA after notice and
comment. As discussed more fully below, these
rules seek to clarify procedural and substantive
matters under the OLA. The FDIC intends to propose
additional rules to implement the OLA, including
rules governing receivership termination, receivership
purchaser eligibility requirements, and recordretention requirements. The FDIC and SEC, after
consultation with the Securities Investor Protection
Corporation, will jointly propose rules governing the
orderly resolution of certain broker-dealers.
The first OLA rule the FDIC adopted was an interim
final rule that addressed OLA procedures, including

In March 2011, the FDIC issued a proposed rule for
public comment. This rule provides clarity regarding
the implementation of the OLA and helps ensure
that the OLA process reflects the Dodd-Frank
Act’s mandate of transparency in the liquidation of
covered financial companies. Among the significant
issues addressed in this rule are the priority for the
payment of claims, the process for the determination
of claims by the receiver, and the process for
seeking a judicial review of any claims disallowed in
whole or in part.
The FDIC issued a final rule in July 2011 that
amends and makes final the interim final rule and
the proposed rule issued in March 2011. The final
rule establishes a more comprehensive framework
for the implementation of the OLA and provides
greater transparency to the process for the orderly
liquidation of covered financial companies under
the Dodd-Frank Act. The rule also includes specific
provisions setting forth the priority of payments to
creditors, and the administrative claims process and
the processes for resolving contingent and secured
claims.
Secured Creditor Haircut Study
The Dodd-Frank Act requires the Council to study,
and issue a report regarding, the importance of
maximizing U.S. taxpayer protections and promoting
market discipline with respect to the treatment of
fully secured creditors in the use of the OLA. The
Council approved the report for submission to
Congress on July 18, 2011. The report is discussed
further in Section 6.4.

Progress in the Implementation of the Dodd-Frank Act; Council Activities

117

6.2 Financial Infrastructure,
Markets, and Oversight
6.2.1 Over-the-Counter Derivatives Reform
A lack of transparency in pricing or market
exposures of derivatives and a lack of regulatory
oversight created risks that contributed to
the vulnerabilities of the financial system’s
largest institutions. Title VII of the Dodd-Frank
Act establishes a comprehensive regulatory
framework for the over-the-counter (OTC)
derivatives marketplace. The regulatory structure
for derivatives set forth in the Dodd-Frank Act
is intended to promote exchange trading and
centralized clearing of swaps and security-based
swaps, helping increase regulatory and public
transparency, reduce counterparty risk, and
enhance the resiliency of the swaps markets.
The reforms under Title VII should also enhance
investor protection by increasing disclosure,
helping mitigate conflicts of interest involving
swaps and security-based swaps, and establishing
comparable standards for initial and variation
margin posted to swap dealers in connection with
noncleared swaps.
The CFTC and SEC have proposed numerous
rules pursuant to the standard public notice and
comment process, and have engaged in extensive
public outreach and interagency coordination,
including the following:
•	

public roundtables with agency staff, market
participants, and other concerned members of
the public;

•	

meetings involving staff from multiple
regulators, both domestic and international;
and

•	

agency staff meetings with members of the
public.

To facilitate the establishment of OTC derivatives
markets that are more transparent, efficient,
accessible, fair, and competitive than the previous,
unregulated markets, the SEC and CFTC have
proposed (or will propose) rules that govern the
following:
•	

118

the operation of swap and security-based
swap trading platforms (exchanges and swap
and security-based swap execution facilities);

2011 FSOC Annual Report

•	

conflicts of interest relating to, and the
operation of, clearinghouses;

•	

reporting requirements to swap and securitybased swap data repositories for swap and
security-based swap dealers, major swap and
security-based swap market participants, and
swap and security-based swap counterparties;
and

•	

business conduct standards and other
regulatory requirements for swaps and
security-based swap dealers and major swap
and security-based swap market participants.

The SEC and CFTC have also jointly proposed
rules further defining the terms “swap,” “securitybased swap,” “security-based swap agreement,”
“swap dealer,” “security-based swap dealer,” “major
swap participant,” and “major security-based swap
participant,” as well as rules regarding “mixed
swaps” and books and records for “security-based
swap agreements.”
In addition, the CFTC and the federal banking
agencies issued proposed rules on capital and
margin requirements for swap and security-based
swap dealers and major swap and security-based
swap market participants. The proposed rules
would impose initial margin and variation margin
requirements for uncleared swaps held by entities
under each agency’s jurisdiction. With respect to
capital requirements, the federal banking agencies’
existing regulatory capital rules take into account
and address the unique risks arising from derivatives
transactions and would apply to transactions in
swaps and security-based swaps. The CFTC has
proposed capital requirements for entities under its
jurisdiction.
The FDIC, the OCC, and the Federal Reserve
have proposed rules to permit entities under their
respective jurisdictions to engage in certain retail offexchange foreign currency transactions, including
foreign currency futures, options on futures, and
options and functionally or economically similar
transactions such as “rolling spot” trades that are
similar to futures contracts. The proposed rules
establish requirements in six areas: disclosure,
recordkeeping, capital and margin, reporting,
business conduct, and documentation. Traditional
spot and forward contracts are not covered under
the rules.

The SEC and the CFTC are considering the
structural and systems changes market participants
will have to make to satisfy the new derivatives
regulatory framework. The agencies are also
considering a phased-in approach to implementing
the new rules. This approach is intended to mitigate
operational risk associated with structural and
systems changes, and to provide an opportunity for
market participants to raise any concerns they have
as they design and implement the required systems.
6.2.2 Financial Market Utilities
Financial market utilities (FMUs) manage or operate
multilateral systems for the purpose of transferring,
clearing, or settling financial transactions. FMUs
are critical components of the U.S. financial system
and the broader economy. Financial institutions,
corporations, governments, and individuals rely on
FMUs directly or indirectly to discharge a variety of
financial and economic transactions. The market
infrastructure supporting the millions of financial
transactions that occur every day encompasses
everything from smaller-value retail payment
systems, such as credit and debit card networks,
to large-value payment, clearing, and settlement
systems for financial market transactions, such as
central counterparties, securities, foreign exchange
settlement systems, and funds transfer systems.
Title VIII of the Dodd-Frank Act establishes a new
supervisory framework for systemically important
FMUs. It authorizes the Council to designate an
FMU as systemically important if the failure of or
a disruption to the FMU’s operations could create
or increase the risk of significant liquidity or credit
problems spreading among financial institutions
or markets and thereby threaten the stability of
the U.S. financial system. As discussed further
in Section 6.4, the Council approved a final rule
outlining the criteria, processes, and procedures
for the designation of FMUs at its July 18, 2011
meeting.
The Federal Reserve, CFTC, and SEC, in
consultation with each other and with the Council,
have published proposed rules regarding risk
management standards for designated FMUs
subject to their respective supervisory authority.
Final rules on risk management standards for
designated FMUs are expected in 2011.

Section 813 of Title VIII requires the CFTC and SEC
to coordinate with the Federal Reserve to jointly
develop risk management supervision programs for
designated clearing entities (DCEs)—FMUs that are
either registered derivatives clearing organizations
or registered clearing agencies. The agencies
transmitted a joint report to Congress on July 21,
2011 containing recommendations for improving
consistency of the DCE oversight programs of the
CFTC and SEC; promoting robust risk management
by DCEs and oversight by their regulators; and
improving regulators’ ability to monitor the potential
effects of DCEs’ risk management on financial
stability.
6.2.3 Securitization
Risk Retention
Properly structured securitization provides economic
benefits that lower the cost of credit to households
and businesses. However, when incentives are
not properly aligned and the origination process
lacks discipline, securitization can result in harm
to investors, consumers, financial institutions, and
the financial system. During the financial crisis,
securitization displayed significant vulnerabilities to
informational and incentive problems among various
parties involved in the process. To address this
weakness and promote prudent lending, Section
941 of the Dodd-Frank Act requires federal agencies
jointly to adopt so-called “skin in the game” rules
that require a securitizer to retain credit risk for
loans that the securitizer, through the issuance of
an asset-backed security (ABS), transfers, sells,
or conveys to a third party. In March 2011, the
OCC, Federal Reserve, FDIC, SEC, FHFA, and the
Department of Housing and Urban Development
jointly proposed rules to implement this risk retention
requirement. The Chairperson of the Council
coordinated the rulemaking effort.
The proposed rules would require securitizers
of ABS to retain at least 5 percent of the credit
risk of the assets underlying the securities.
Securitizers would not be permitted to transfer or
hedge that credit risk. The proposed rule provides
exemptions for qualified residential mortgages
and ABS collateralized exclusively by commercial
loans, commercial mortgages, or automobile
loans that meet certain underwriting standards.
The definition of “qualified residential mortgages,”

Progress in the Implementation of the Dodd-Frank Act; Council Activities

119

which represent a portion but not all of the market
for mortgage loans, is an important aspect of the
proposed rule: it would take into account, among
other things, the borrower’s ability to repay and
credit history, the loan-to-value ratio of the loan,
the form of valuation used in underwriting the
loan, the type of mortgage, and owner-occupancy
status. In crafting the proposed rule, the agencies
sought to ensure that the amount of credit risk
retained is meaningful while reducing the potential
for negative effects on the availability and cost of
credit to consumers and businesses.
Issuer Review and Representation, Warranty
Disclosure, Conflicts
Other provisions of the Dodd-Frank Act require
SEC rulemaking for ABS. Pursuant to Section 943
of the Dodd-Frank Act, the SEC adopted final rules
in January 2011. These rules require securitizers
to disclose the history of repurchase requests
received for assets that are believed to have violated
representations and warranties, and repurchases
made relating to their outstanding ABS. Pursuant
to Section 945, the SEC adopted final rules in
January 2011 requiring an asset-backed issuer in
a transaction registered under the Securities Act of
1933 to perform a review of the assets underlying
the ABS and disclose the nature of such review. At a
minimum, the review must be designed and effected
to provide reasonable assurance that the prospectus
disclosure on the assets is accurate in all material
respects.
6.2.4 Hedge Fund Adviser Registration and
Oversight
Title IV of the Dodd-Frank Act closes a regulatory
gap by making numerous changes to the
registration, reporting, and recordkeeping
requirements of the Investment Advisers Act of
1940 (Advisers Act). These provisions are intended
to provide the SEC with oversight authority over
previously unregistered investment advisers to
hedge funds and private equity funds, and the
authority to require recordkeeping and reporting by
advisers to venture capital funds.
In June 2011, the SEC adopted a rule that would
facilitate the registration of advisers to hedge funds
and private equity funds with the SEC. To enhance
the SEC’s ability to oversee these advisers,

120

2011 FSOC Annual Report

the SEC will require them to provide additional
information about the private funds they manage,
including information about the amount of assets
held by the fund and identification of fund service
providers, including auditors, prime brokers,
custodians, administrators, and marketers. In
addition, the SEC will require all advisers to provide
further information about an adviser’s clients,
employees, and advisory activities.
The SEC also adopted rules relating to several new
exemptions from the investment adviser registration
requirements for advisers that exclusively advise
venture capital funds; advisers solely to private
funds with less than $150 million in assets under
management in the United States; and foreign
private advisers with less than $25 million in assets
under management in the United States. Although
advisers are relieved from SEC registration, they
may be subject to a registration requirement with the
appropriate state securities regulator.
Section 404 of the Dodd-Frank Act also authorizes
the SEC to collect data from investment advisers
about their private funds to enable the Council to
assess systemic risk. In January 2011, the SEC
proposed a rule under this authority that would
require registered investment advisers to a private
fund to report certain systemic risk information
to the SEC. Private fund advisers that are also
registered with the CFTC as commodity pool
operators or commodity trading advisers would
satisfy systemic risk reporting requirements of the
CFTC by filing with the SEC.
6.2.5 Insurance
Establishment of the FIO
The financial crisis highlighted the lack of expertise
within the federal government regarding the
insurance industry. In response, the Dodd-Frank Act
established the FIO to provide expertise regarding
the insurance business, marketplace and regulatory
environment. The following are among the FIO’s
authorities:
•	

to monitor all aspects of the insurance
industry, including identifying issues or gaps in
the regulation of insurers that could contribute
to a systemic crisis in the insurance industry or
the U.S. financial system;

•	

to monitor the extent to which traditionally
underserved communities and consumers,
minorities, and low- and moderate-income
persons have access to affordable insurance,
except health insurance;

•	

to recommend that the Council designate
an insurer as a nonbank financial company
that should be subject to supervision by the
Federal Reserve;

•	

to coordinate federal efforts and develop
federal policy on prudential aspects of
international insurance matters; and

•	

to recommend and approve the resolution of
certain troubled insurance companies under
the OLA.

The FIO is led by a Director who serves in an
advisory capacity as a nonvoting member of the
Council. The states remain the primary functional
regulators, and the FIO will consult with the states
regarding insurance matters of national and
international importance.
6.2.6 Credit Ratings
Following the onset of the financial crisis, it
became apparent that credit rating agencies
had systematically underestimated the risks of
many RMBS, CDOs, and other structured finance
instruments. Faulty assumptions underlying rating
methodologies and the subsequent reevaluations
by credit rating agencies led to a significant number
of downgrades of these securities. The number and
severity of these negative ratings actions caused
investors to lose confidence in the accuracy of the
ratings of a wide range of securitized products,
thereby contributing to the market turmoil and
revealing the extent to which investors and others
had become overly reliant on credit ratings. The
Dodd-Frank Act includes two sections that remove
references to credit ratings in certain statutes and
direct federal agencies to remove any references to
or requirements of reliance on credit ratings from
regulations.
Subtitle C of Title IX of the Dodd-Frank Act
strengthened the SEC’s oversight authority
regarding, and mandated a number of rulemakings
in connection with the SEC’s oversight and
regulation of, credit rating agencies registered as

nationally recognized statistical rating organizations.
The SEC issued proposed rules under this authority
in May 2011. In addition, Section 939 of the DoddFrank Act removed references to credit ratings in
certain statutes, while Section 939A requires each
federal agency to review any rules that require
the use of an assessment of creditworthiness of
a security or money market instrument and any
references to or requirements in such rules regarding
credit ratings. Each agency must modify those rules
to remove references to or requirements of reliance
on credit ratings and to substitute appropriate
standards of creditworthiness. Numerous federal
agencies have proposed or finalized rules that would
modify their regulations and forms to comply with
these requirements. Among others, the federal
banking regulators sought initial public comment
on proposed removals of references to rating
agencies from the risk-based capital rules; the SEC
proposed rules that would remove rating agency
references from many of its investment company
rules and forms, its registration statement forms,
and its rules and forms applicable to broker-dealer
financial responsibility, distributions of securities,
and confirmations of transactions; the FDIC issued a
final rule removing credit ratings from the calculation
of deposit insurance risk-based assessments for
large insured depository institutions; and the NCUA
issued a proposed rule for public comment.
6.2.7 OFR
The Dodd-Frank Act also created the OFR in
Treasury to, among other things, improve the quality
of financial data and provide analytical support to
the Council and its member agencies. The Director
of the OFR must be appointed by the President and
confirmed by the U.S. Senate. Treasury staff and
personnel from other Council member agencies
have worked to set up a framework for the OFR’s
functions. The OFR has made significant progress
in meeting its statutory mandates. It is working
closely with Council member agencies to improve
the research and data capabilities of the regulatory
community. The OFR has also issued a policy
statement regarding the establishment of a universal
“legal entity identifier” that would allow the Council
to aggregate measures of risk across the system;
made progress in establishing a research network
that includes academics from several universities;
and initiated the planning process for creating a data

Progress in the Implementation of the Dodd-Frank Act; Council Activities

121

center to set standards for financial reporting and
to improve the quality of data that the Council and
market participants rely on to manage risk.

abusive acts or practices, and supervise and
enforce these laws for many financial service
providers;

6.2.8 Consolidation of Federal Banking
Regulators

•	

take consumer complaints;

•	

promote financial education; and

The Dodd-Frank Act provides for the termination
of the Office of Thrift Supervision (OTS), which had
been the primary regulator of savings and loan
holding companies and state and federally chartered
savings associations, and for the transfer of its
responsibilities to the Federal Reserve, the FDIC,
and the OCC. This transfer occurred on July 21,
2011. As of that date, in accordance with plans
prepared by these agencies, the Federal Reserve
assumed responsibility for regulating savings and
loan holding companies; the FDIC for regulating
state savings associations; and the OCC for
regulating federal savings associations. The Director
of the CFPB will assume the seat of the Director of
the OTS on the board of the FDIC.

•	

monitor financial markets for new risks to
consumers.

6.3 Consumer and Investor
Protection
6.3.1 Consumer Protection
On July 21, 2011, most rulemaking and certain
other authorities relating to consumer financial
products and services transferred to the CFPB
from seven federal agencies. The CFPB launched
bank supervision, consumer response, and other
functions on that date, and has issued a variety of
required rules and reports under the Dodd-Frank
Act. The CFPB is now the primary federal regulator
focused on, and held accountable to Congress
and the public for, consumer financial protection.
The CFPB will work to ensure that consumers have
the information they need to understand the costs
and risks of financial products and services, so that
they can compare products and choose the ones
that are best for them. The CFPB also will clarify
and streamline regulations and guidance to reduce
unnecessary burdens on providers of consumer
financial products and services.
Among its other duties, the CFPB will:
•	

122

conduct rulemakings with respect to federal
consumer financial laws, including prohibitions
on discrimination and unfair, deceptive, or

2011 FSOC Annual Report

The Dodd-Frank Act gives the Treasury Secretary
responsibility for setting up the CFPB until the
CFPB Director is in place. On September 17, 2010,
President Obama appointed Professor Elizabeth
Warren to serve as assistant to the President, and
Secretary Geithner appointed her as special advisor
to the Treasury Secretary on the CFPB. Professor
Warren has led the effort to build the framework
for the CFPB and, in consultation with other senior
Treasury officials, helped to appoint a leadership
team to assist with implementation. On July 18,
2011, President Obama nominated former Ohio
Attorney General Richard Cordray as Director of the
CFPB.
One of the CFPB’s highest priorities is
consolidation of mortgage loan disclosure forms
under the Truth in Lending Act and the Real
Estate Settlement Procedures Act, both to make
the information more useful to consumers and
to reduce burdens on lenders. Existing federal
regulators first began discussing consolidation of
these forms a number of years ago. The DoddFrank Act consolidates rulemaking authority under
the two statutes in the CFPB and mandates that
the CFPB propose model forms by July 2012.
The CFPB began testing prototype disclosure
forms this spring through qualitative interviews
with consumers, lenders, and brokers. The CFPB
continues to gather input from industry, consumers,
and other stakeholders via its website.
Also in the context of mortgages, significant
progress has been made on a rule mandated by
the Dodd-Frank Act requiring lenders to assess
and verify consumers’ ability to repay mortgage
loans as part of the underwriting process. The
Federal Reserve proposed a rule in April 2011 for
public comment. The CFPB will be responsible
for finalizing a rule after considering the public
comments on the proposal.

6.3.2 Debit Interchange
Debit card interchange fees, which are established
by a payment card network and ultimately paid
by merchants to card issuers, became subject to
regulation by the Federal Reserve under Section
1075 of the Dodd-Frank Act, referred to as the
Durbin Amendment. The Durbin Amendment, among
other things, requires the Federal Reserve to adopt
a rule that sets standards for assessing whether
the amount of an interchange fee for an electronic
debit (but not credit) transaction is reasonable and
proportional to the cost incurred by the issuer with
respect to the transaction. The fee standards do not
apply to an issuer that, together with its affiliates,
has less than $10 billion in assets, or to transactions
initiated using debit cards issued pursuant to
government-administered payment programs and
certain reloadable prepaid cards.
After requesting comment on a proposed rule in
December 2010, the Federal Reserve received
comments from more than 11,500 commenters.
On June 29, 2011, the Federal Reserve approved
a final rule providing that the amount of an
interchange fee that a covered issuer may receive
may not exceed the sum of 21 cents plus 5 basis
points of the transaction’s value. The final rule
also prohibits circumvention or evasion of the
interchange fee standard, as well as an issuer
receiving net compensation from a payment card
network. The final rule exempts the statutorily
exempt issuers and transactions from the
interchange fee standard but does not mandate
two-tier interchange fee structures.

The interchange fee standards, fraud-prevention
adjustment, and the routing restrictions are effective
on October 1, 2011. The network exclusivity
provisions are effective on April 1, 2012, with
respect to issuers, and October 1, 2011, with
respect to payment card networks. Issuers of certain
health-related and other benefits cards and generaluse prepaid cards have a delayed effective date of
April 1, 2013, or later in certain circumstances.
6.3.3 Mortgage Transactions
Title XIV of the Dodd-Frank Act, the “Mortgage
Reform and Anti-Predatory Lending Act,” contains
several measures designed to protect consumers
in mortgage transactions. Many of these measures
were enacted as amendments to the Truth in
Lending Act (TILA). Prior to the designated transfer
date, July 21, 2011, the Federal Reserve was
responsible for regulations implementing TILA,
but, in general, rulemaking authority under TILA
transferred to the CFPB on that date.

The Federal Reserve also approved an interim final
rule allowing an upward adjustment of no more
than 1 cent to the permissible interchange fee.
This adjustment makes allowance for an issuer’s
debit card fraud-prevention costs, provided the
issuer satisfies the fraud-prevention standards set
forth in the interim final rule. Comments on the
interim rule are due by September 30, 2011; the
Federal Reserve has stated that it will re-evaluate
this adjustment, as appropriate, in light of the
comments received.
In addition, the final rule implements the payment
card network exclusivity and routing provisions of
the Durbin Amendment by requiring each debit

card be enabled on no fewer than two unaffiliated
payment card networks and prohibiting an issuer
or network from inhibiting the ability of any person
that accepts debit cards as a form of payment from
directing the routing of debit card transactions for
processing. The statutory exemptions from the
interchange fee standards do not extend to the
network exclusivity and routing provisions in the
final rule.

In October 2010, the Federal Reserve issued
an interim final rule to implement the appraisal
independence provisions in Section 1472 of the
Dodd-Frank Act. The interim rule seeks to ensure
that appraisers are free to use their independent
professional judgment. To protect the quality of
appraisals, the rule also requires independent
appraisers to receive customary and reasonable
compensation for their services. Compliance with
the rule became mandatory on April 1, 2011.
Several regulatory agencies are jointly responsible
for issuing permanent rules on appraisal
independence.
In February 2011, the Federal Reserve issued a final
rule pursuant to Section 1461 of the Dodd-Frank Act
to revise the escrow requirement for jumbo mortgage
loans. As amended, the escrow requirement will

Progress in the Implementation of the Dodd-Frank Act; Council Activities

123

apply to first-lien jumbo loans only if the loan’s annual
percentage rate is 2.5 percentage points or more
above the average prime offer rate. Also in February
2011, the Federal Reserve issued a proposed rule to
implement additional escrow account requirements
for higher-priced loans pursuant to Sections 1461
and 1462 of the Dodd-Frank Act. The proposed rule
would expand the minimum period for mandatory
escrow accounts, while providing an exemption for
certain creditors that operate in “rural or underserved”
counties. The proposed rule also would implement
new disclosure requirements.
In April 2011, the Federal Reserve issued a
proposed a rule to implement the provisions of
Title XIV relating to the requirement for a creditor to
determine a consumer’s ability to repay a mortgage
loan before extending the loan. The proposed
rule would provide four options for complying
with the ability-to-repay requirement. A creditor
could meet the standard by: (1) considering and
verifying specified underwriting factors, such as the
consumer’s income, assets, and obligations; (2)
making a “qualified mortgage,” which is subject to
certain limitations on loan terms and features; (3)
making a balloon-payment qualified mortgage, for
certain creditors operating predominantly in rural
or underserved areas; or (4) refinancing a “nonstandard mortgage” with risky features into a more
stable “standard mortgage” with a lower monthly
payment.
6.3.4 Investor Protection
The Dodd-Frank Act includes various provisions
to strengthen investor protection, such as those
promulgated under the regulatory actions discussed
above and below. These provisions include
regulation of the over-the-counter derivatives
markets and governance and compensation reform.
A key investor protection provision requires the SEC
to complete a study of any gaps, shortcomings, or
overlaps in the standard of conduct and supervision
of broker-dealers and investment advisers that
provide personalized investment advice about
securities to retail customers. The SEC staff
completed this study in January 2011. The study
recommends that the SEC establish a uniform
fiduciary standard for broker-dealers and investment
advisers when providing personalized investment

124

2011 FSOC Annual Report

advice about securities to retail customers that is
no less stringent than the standard currently applied
under Sections 206(1) and (2) of the Advisers Act. In
addition, the staff recommended that broker-dealers
and investment advisers be subject to the same or
substantively similar regulatory requirements when
providing services to retail investors.
The SEC also completed a study of the need for
enhanced examination and enforcement resources
for investment advisers, and in particular, the
extent to which having Congress authorize the
SEC to designate a self-regulatory organization
(SRO) to augment the SEC’s efforts in overseeing
investment advisers would improve the frequency
of examinations of investment advisers. This study
recommended presenting Congress with three
options:
1.	 Authorize the SEC to impose user fees on
investment advisers to fund their examinations.
2.	 Authorize an SRO to examine investment
advisers.
3.	 Authorize the Financial Industry Regulatory
Authority to examine dual-registrants for
compliance with the Advisers Act.
The SEC finalized rules in June 2011 that will
implement provisions in Section 410 of the DoddFrank Act. The rules will realign the regulatory
responsibilities of investment advisers between
the state securities regulators and the SEC. These
provisions increased the number of investment
advisers that will be primarily regulated by the
states. Estimates indicate that as a result of these
changes, approximately 3,200 investment advisers
will transition from SEC registration to state
registration. That transition is scheduled to conclude
by mid-2012.
The securities laws also were modified in a number
of ways to facilitate SEC enforcement actions.
These changes include enhancing the application of
antifraud provisions and providing authority to bring
actions against aiders and abettors.
6.3.5 Governance and Compensation
The financial crisis showed that improperly
structured compensation arrangements can lead
executives and employees of financial institutions to

take imprudent risks that are not consistent with the
long-term health of their organizations. To facilitate
prudent risk management at financial institutions
and to align the interests of executives and other
employees with the long-term health of their
organizations, Section 956 of the Dodd-Frank Act
requires the Federal Reserve, FDIC, FHFA, NCUA,
OCC, OTS, and SEC to jointly prescribe rules or
guidelines that (1) require certain financial institutions
to disclose to their appropriate federal regulator the
structure of their incentive-based compensation
arrangements so the regulator can determine
whether such compensation is excessive or could
lead to material financial loss to the firm; and (2)
prohibit any type of incentive-based compensation
that the regulators determine encourages
inappropriate risks by providing excessive
compensation or that could lead to material financial
loss to the covered firm.
In April 2011, the agencies published a threepart proposed rule for public comment. First,
a financial institution with $1 billion or more in
total consolidated assets (a covered financial
institution) would be required to file an annual
report with its appropriate federal regulator
describing the structure of the firm’s incentivebased compensation arrangements. Second, the
proposed rule would prohibit a covered financial
institution from establishing or maintaining an
incentive-based compensation arrangement
that could lead to material financial loss or that
encourages inappropriate risks by providing certain
“covered persons” (which include all executives and
employees) with excessive compensation. Finally,
the proposed rule would require each covered
financial institution to adopt specific policies and
procedures approved by its board to ensure and
monitor compliance with the rule.
The prohibitions portion of the proposed rule would
require larger covered financial institutions—those
with $50 billion or more in total consolidated
assets—to defer at least 50 percent of the incentive
compensation of executive officers and heads of
major business lines for at least three years, award
such compensation no faster than on a prorata basis, and seek to ensure that the amounts
ultimately paid over the course of the deferral period
reflect losses or other aspects of performance over
time. For these larger covered financial institutions,

the prohibitions portion of the proposed rule would
also set forth additional requirements for employees
of the firm who might have the ability to expose
the institution to risk of substantial loss. For these
employees, the board of directors or a board
committee would be charged with identifying the
persons (other than the executive officers subject
to deferral requirements) who individually have the
ability to expose the firm to possible losses that
are substantial in relation to the firm’s size, capital,
or overall risk tolerance. Once such persons are
identified, the board or committee would need
to approve the incentive-based compensation
arrangement for each person. For credit unions,
large financial institutions would be defined as
those with $10 billion or more in assets. The FHFA
proposed that the income-deferral provisions apply
to all entities it regulates, regardless of size.
In addition, on January 25, 2011, the SEC adopted
final rules implementing provisions of the DoddFrank Act that require public U.S. companies to
conduct separate shareholder votes on executive
pay (say-on-pay) and on the frequency of the
say-on-pay vote, as well as specific disclosures
about any agreements to offer a form of executive
compensation (so-called golden parachutes)
in connection with merger and acquisition
transactions.

6.4 Council Activities
6.4.1 Determination of Nonbank Financial
Companies to Be Supervised by the Federal
Reserve and Designation of Financial Market
Utilities
Nonbank Financial Companies
One of the Council’s statutory purposes is to
identify risks to financial stability that could arise
from the material financial distress or failure, or
ongoing activities, of large, interconnected BHCs,
or nonbank financial companies. Under Section 113
of the Dodd-Frank Act, the Council is authorized
to determine that a nonbank financial company’s
material financial distress—or the nature, scope,
size, scale, concentration, interconnectedness, or
mix of its activities—could pose a threat to U.S.
financial stability. Such companies will be subject
to consolidated supervision by the Federal Reserve
and enhanced prudential standards.

Progress in the Implementation of the Dodd-Frank Act; Council Activities

125

The Dodd-Frank Act provides a list of 10
considerations the Council must use in making
determinations under Section 113. In fall 2010, the
Council began a rulemaking process to further clarify
these statutorily mandated considerations. Seeking
public input on the criteria, the Council issued an
advance notice of proposed rulemaking (ANPR) in
October 2010 and a notice of proposed rulemaking
(NPR) in January 2011. The Council received
significant input from market participants, nonprofits,
academics, and members of the public about
the need to develop an analytical framework for
making determinations that will provide a consistent
approach and will incorporate both quantitative and
qualitative judgments. The Council expects to seek
additional public comment regarding its approach
to determinations and the considerations mandated
by the Dodd-Frank Act, and to publish a final rule
describing the process and guidance regarding the
criteria for its determinations.
The Council’s proposed analytical framework
organizes the 10 statutory considerations into
six broad categories that reflect a company’s
role in the financial system and potential to
experience material financial distress. Three of
these six categories—size, lack of substitutes for
the financial services and products the company
provides, and interconnectedness with other
financial companies—seek to assess the potential
for spillovers from one company’s financial distress
to the broader financial system and real economy.
The other three categories—leverage, liquidity risk
and maturity mismatch, and existing regulatory
scrutiny—indicate the vulnerability of a company to
distress, whether it is an idiosyncratic or systemic
shock.
The Council’s commitment to a robust determination
process goes beyond transparency during
rulemakings. Each determination will be firmspecific. Before an initial Council vote on a
proposed determination, the company under
consideration will have an opportunity to submit
written materials to the Council regarding the
proposed determination. Council members will
vote on a proposed determination only after they
have reviewed that information, and the proposed
determination will proceed only if approved by
two-thirds of the Council, including the affirmative

126

2011 FSOC Annual Report

vote of the Chairperson. Upon a proposed
determination, a company may request a hearing,
and the determination will be finalized only after a
subsequent two-thirds vote of the Council, including
the affirmative vote of the Chairperson. The Council
must submit a report to Congress detailing its final
decision, which will be subject to judicial review.
As of the date of this report, the Council has not
made any determinations under Section 113 of the
Dodd-Frank Act.
Financial Market Utilities
Financial market utilities (FMUs) exist in many
markets to support and facilitate the payment,
clearing, or settlement of financial transactions,
thereby forming a critical part of the nation’s
financial infrastructure. However, the function and
interconnectedness of FMUs also concentrate
risk because the systems they operate are highly
interdependent, either directly through operational,
contractual, or affiliation linkages, or indirectly
through liquidity flows or common participants.
Problems at one system could spill over to other
systems or financial institutions in the form of
liquidity and credit disruptions. Accordingly, the
Dodd-Frank Act provides the Council with the ability
to designate an FMU as systemically important if the
Council determines that the failure of or a disruption
to the functioning of an FMU’s operations could
create or increase the risk of significant liquidity
or credit problems spreading among financial
institutions or markets and thereby threaten the
stability of the U.S. financial system.
An FMU designated by the Council will be subject
to enhanced prudential standards and supervisory
requirements, such as heightened risk management
standards beyond existing regulatory oversight
that may otherwise be applicable. Designation
further subjects an FMU to additional examinations,
enforcement actions, and reporting requirements.
Under unusual or exigent circumstances, designated
FMUs could potentially gain access to the Federal
Reserve’s discount window.
Following the publication of an ANPR in December
2010 and an NPR in March 2011, and two
corresponding rounds of public comment, the
Council approved a final rule outlining the criteria,

processes, and procedures for the designation
of FMUs at its July 18, 2011 meeting. As of the
date of this report, the Council has not made any
designations under Title VIII of the Dodd-Frank Act.
The Council expects to address the designation
of payment, clearing, or settlement activities in a
separate rulemaking.
6.4.2 Risk Monitoring
One of the Council’s central purposes is the ongoing
identification of risks to U.S. financial stability.
To help identify risks, promote market discipline,
and respond to emerging threats, the Council
facilitates information sharing, coordination, and
communication among member agencies.
In the past year, the Council examined significant
market developments and structural issues within
the financial system, including topics discussed
elsewhere in this report. The Council will continue to
monitor potential threats to financial stability, whether
from external shocks or structural weaknesses.
To facilitate this risk-monitoring process, the Council
established the Systemic Risk Committee (SRC),
composed primarily of agency staff in supervisory,
examination, surveillance, and policy roles. The
SRC helps the Council identify, analyze, and
monitor risks to financial stability, and provides
the Council with periodic risk assessments.
Accountable for interagency coordination, the SRC
meets periodically to share information to assess
risk-related issues that affect financial markets
and institutions and financial stability. This forum
enables member agency staff to identify and
analyze potential risks that may extend beyond the
jurisdiction of any one agency and to collaborate on
regulatory responses.
6.4.3 Studies Required Under the
Dodd-Frank Act
Section 619 Study: The Volcker Rule
Section 619 of the Dodd-Frank Act, known as the
Volcker Rule, strengthens the financial system and
constrains risks by generally prohibiting banking
entities from engaging in proprietary trading and
limiting their investment in or sponsorship of hedge
funds and private equity funds. The Dodd-Frank
Act requires the Council to issue a study and make

recommendations on the implementation of the
Volcker Rule within six months after the enactment
of the Dodd-Frank Act. In October 2010, the
Council sought input from the public in advance
of the study by issuing a request for information; it
received more than 8,000 comments. The Council
issued the final study at its meeting on January
18, 2011.2 The Council’s study recommends
principles for implementing the Volcker Rule and
suggests a comprehensive framework for identifying
activities prohibited by the rule, including an internal
compliance regime, quantitative analysis, and
reporting and supervisory review.
Section 622 Study: Concentration Limits
Under the Dodd-Frank Act, the Council was
also required to issue a study and make
recommendations on the implementation of Section
622 within six months of the Dodd-Frank Act’s
enactment. Section 622 establishes a financialsector concentration limit generally prohibiting a
financial company from merging or consolidating
with, or acquiring the assets of or control of, another
company if the resulting company’s consolidated
liabilities would exceed 10 percent of the aggregate
consolidated liabilities of all financial companies.
This concentration limit is intended, along with a
number of other provisions in the Dodd-Frank Act,
to promote financial stability and prevent large
financial institutions from becoming “too big to fail.”
The Council issued the report at its meeting
on January 18, 2011, meeting the statutory
deadline. The Council’s study concludes that
the concentration limit will reduce moral hazard,
increase financial stability, and improve efficiency
and competition within the U.S. financial
system. The study also includes largely technical
recommendations to mitigate practical difficulties
likely to arise in the administration and enforcement
of the concentration limit, without undermining its
effectiveness in limiting excessive concentration
among financial companies.
On February 8, 2011, the Council published a notice
and request for comment on the recommendations
in the concentration limit study.
2 The report and other reports cited in this section are available online at
http://www.fsoc.gov/

Progress in the Implementation of the Dodd-Frank Act; Council Activities

127

Section 946 Study: Risk Retention
The Treasury Secretary, as Chairperson of the
Council, issued a study on the macroeconomic
effects of the Dodd-Frank Act’s risk-retention
requirements for asset-backed securities, as
required by Section 946, within 180 days of the
Act’s enactment. This study, which is separate from
the joint rulemaking on risk retention under Section
941, was delivered to Congress on January 18,
2011. The study recognizes the economic benefits
of asset-backed securitization but notes that without
reform, risks arising in the securitization process
can detract from these benefits. The study provides
several objectives that a risk-retention framework
should seek to achieve to help promote safe and
efficient lending.
Section 123 Study: Economic Impact
The Dodd-Frank Act directs the Treasury Secretary,
as Chairperson of the Council, to carry out a study
within 180 days of the Act’s enactment (and every
five years thereafter) addressing the economic
impact of possible financial services regulatory
limitations intended to reduce systemic risk. The
statute requires the study to estimate the benefits
and costs of various potential regulatory limits on
the efficiency of capital markets, on the financial
sector, and on national economic growth, and to
make recommendations on the optimal structure of
those limits.
The Council Chairperson met the statutory deadline,
publishing the study on January 18, 2011. The
study contains a critical review of existing research
on the impact of the types of financial regulation
identified in Section 123 of the Dodd-Frank Act,
as well as recommendations for future research to
better quantify the benefits of the Act and financial
regulation generally. The study recommends that a
cost-benefit analysis of other potential limitations
on the activities or structure of large financial
institutions be addressed in the next periodic study,
which is due in 2016.
Section 215 Report: Secured Creditor Haircuts
The Dodd-Frank Act also required the Council
to issue a report within one year of the Act’s
enactment, evaluating the importance of maximizing
U.S. taxpayer protections and promoting market

128

2011 FSOC Annual Report

discipline with respect to the treatment of fully
secured creditors in the utilization of the OLA.
Among other topics, the study outlines how various
secured creditors are treated in existing resolution
regimes and examines whether a secured creditor
haircut would be an effective means of improving
market discipline and protecting U.S. taxpayers.
The Council approved this report for submission to
Congress on July 18, 2011.
6.4.4 Rulemaking Coordination by the Council
As Chairperson of the Council, the Treasury
Secretary is required to coordinate several major
rulemakings by the member agencies under the
Dodd-Frank Act.
To facilitate the joint rulemaking on credit risk
retention for asset-backed securities, certain
member agencies participated in an inter agency
working group to develop the rule text and
preamble for an NPR for public comment. The
Dodd-Frank Act generally requires that securitizers
retain at least 5 percent of the credit risk of an
asset sold to investors through the securitization
process. It also calls for specific exemptions
from this requirement, such as for asset-backed
securities that are collateralized solely by qualified
residential mortgages. The purpose of the riskretention requirement is to help address the
misalignment of interests and deterioration of
underwriting standards in the securitization markets
leading up to the financial crisis. The Federal
Reserve, FDIC, SEC, OCC, Department of Housing
and Urban Development, and FHFA issued a joint
NPR on March 30, 2011 that proposes rules to
implement this requirement and represents a
significant step toward strengthening securitization
markets. The agencies extended the comment
period for the proposed rule from June 10, 2011 to
August 1, 2011.
The Chairperson of the Council is also required
to coordinate the issuance of final regulations
implementing the Volcker Rule, which are required
to be issued within nine months of the publication of
the Volcker Rule study described above. The Council
Chairperson has played an active role in coordinating
the agencies’ work to develop consistent and
comparable regulations and to promote the
consistent application of those regulations.

6.4.5 Operations of the Council
The Dodd-Frank Act requires the Council to
convene no less than quarterly. In its first year, the
Council’s principals met approximately every eight
weeks.3 The meetings bring principals from member
agencies together to discuss and analyze emerging
market developments and financial regulatory
issues. The Council is committed to conducting its
business as openly and transparently as practicable,
given the confidential supervisory and sensitive
information at the center of its work. The Council
opens its meetings to the public whenever possible.
The Council held a public session at five of its
meetings and has committed to holding at least two
open sessions each year.
The Council’s committee structure promotes
accountability and coordination among the staffs
of the member agencies. Due to the substantive
agenda of the Council in its first year, every two
weeks, the Deputies Committee, which is composed
of senior officials from each of the Council’s
member agencies, has convened to discuss the
Council’s agenda and to direct the work of the
SRC and the five other functional committees. As
mentioned above, the SRC supports the Council’s
efforts to monitor the U.S. financial system and
identify potential threats to the health of the
system. The other functional committees are
organized around the Council’s ongoing statutory
responsibilities: identifying nonbank financial firms
and financial market utilities for designation; making
recommendations to primary financial regulatory
agencies regarding heightened prudential standards
for financial firms; consulting with the FDIC on
orderly liquidation authority and reviewing resolution
plans for designated nonbank financial firms and the
largest BHCs; and collecting data and improving
data-reporting standards.

vulnerabilities. The OFR will also work with member
agencies to reduce reporting burdens and increase
market transparency.
Council Administration
In its first year of operation, the Council has worked
to establish its institutional framework; adopted
rules of operation4; released proposed regulations
implementing its Freedom of Information Act
obligations; and passed its first budget. The Council
also adopted a transparency policy5 and has
complied with the policy.
6.4.6 Section 119 of the Dodd-Frank Act
Section 119 of the Dodd-Frank Act provides that the
Council may issue nonbinding recommendations to
member agencies on disputes about the agencies’
respective jurisdiction over a particular BHC,
nonbank financial company, or financial activity or
product. (Certain consumer protection matters,
for which another dispute mechanism is provided
under Title X of the Act, are excluded). To date,
no member agency has approached the Council to
resolve a dispute under Section 119.

To help with the identification of emerging risks in
the financial system, the Council may request data
and analyses from the newly created OFR housed
in Treasury. The OFR will support the Council
and its member agencies by providing critical
data and research as well as the analytical tools
required to monitor and respond to future emerging
3 The Council met on October 1, 2010; November 23, 2010; January
18, 2011; March 17, 2011; May 24, 2011; July 13, 2011; and July 18,
2011.

4 The rules of operation are available online at http://www.fsoc.gov/
5 The transparency policy is available online at http://www.fsoc.gov/

Progress in the Implementation of the Dodd-Frank Act; Council Activities

129

7	 Potential Emerging Threats to
	 U.S. Financial Stability
Financial stability requires a forward-looking assessment of the financial system’s
propensity to generate imbalances and the system’s resilience to a range of potential
adverse events. Misaligned incentives and inappropriate compensation can produce
imbalances and vulnerabilities. Unanticipated events and the reversal of widely held
beliefs create shocks that can be amplified by existing structural vulnerabilities. Threats
to financial stability arise from a combination of imbalances, shocks, and vulnerabilities
that impair the functioning of the financial system. The Council is focused on assessing
and mitigating potential threats and taking reasonable steps to make the financial system
more robust.
Shocks and imbalances can interfere with financial
stability through three main interconnected channels:
1.	 Failure of a financial institution or a market
participant to honor a contractual obligation.
2.	 Deterioration in market functioning.
3.	 Disruptions in financial infrastructure.
When a financial firm or market participant fails to
honor a contractual obligation, not only is it often a
sign that the firm or market participant is failing or
has failed as a going concern, it is also a disruption
to the operations and income of the other party to
the obligation. Even if the disruption is not large
enough to threaten the counterparty, it will increase
uncertainty and can have negative consequences for
the market as a whole.
A deterioration in market functioning can force
financial institutions and market participants to
rapidly reassess their risk profiles. Abrupt changes in
pricing or liquidity for asset, funding, or risk transfer
markets can disrupt the ability of financial institutions
and market participants to manage their risks,
forecast their financial needs, or even fulfill their
contractual obligations.
Disruptions in financial infrastructure can undermine
confidence in financial transactions; without certainty
that a payment will be delivered, or a transaction
settled and cleared, financial institutions and

market participants will be reluctant to engage
in transactions, even with otherwise reliable
counterparties.
A key goal of the Council and its member agencies
is to monitor threats to U.S. financial stability and
reduce the transmission of shocks and imbalances
through these channels. Achieving this goal requires
not only fixing structural vulnerabilities but also
maintaining confidence in the ability of the financial
system to absorb a wide range of shocks.
Under market stress, financial institutions and
market participants may react to fears about the
amplification of potential losses by reducing their
provision of financial services within the system
itself and to the broader economy. For example, if
lenders believe that a borrower may fail to honor a
contractual obligation, they may restrain lending to
other borrowers to conserve capital and liquidity.
Because of the interconnectedness of the financial
system, such preemptive reactions can destabilize
the system.
In addition, large complex financial institutions that
are difficult to resolve in an orderly manner can
produce inefficiencies in the allocation of gains
and losses across private investors that undermine
market discipline. Perceptions that institutions are
“too big to fail” can increase uncertainty in periods of
market turmoil and reinforce destabilizing reactions

Potential Emerging Threats to U.S. Financial Stability

131

Box J: Measuring Systemic Risk
The development of systemic risk measures and models is in an early stage. Various measures seek to estimate
either the overall vulnerability of the financial system to shocks, or the contribution of individual firms to systemic
risk. Generally, these measures have declined from their highs.
Although there is no one way to define systemic risk,
all definitions attempt to capture risks to the stability
of the financial system as a whole, as opposed to the
risk facing individual financial institutions or market
participants. For example, market participants may
believe that they have insured against certain risks.
However, if all participants act similarly to avoid those
risks, for example, crowding into the same positions,
their actions might amplify shocks and threaten the
stability of the financial system.
Directly measuring systemic risk is challenging, and
no consensus exists on the best measure of the level
of systemic risk in the financial system. Financial
economists have constructed various measures for
assessing the contribution of individual firms to systemic
risk on the basis of market prices. These measures
can be averaged across firms to produce aggregate
measures (Chart J.1).

Chart J.1 Average Risk Measures Across the 5 Largest BHCs

132

2011 FSOC Annual Report

The chart shows three measures that use market data
in different ways to estimate the covariation between
individual financial institutions and the financial system
in times of financial distress. The conditional valueat-risk (CoVaR) considers losses in total assets, the
systemic expected shortfall (SES) focuses on equity
losses, and the distressed insurance premium (DIP)
measures risk from a creditor’s perspective. CoVaR
estimates the potential financial system losses
conditional on the distress of a particular institution.
SES takes an opposite approach, estimating the
equity loss of a particular institution conditional on a
systemwide equity shortfall. DIP uses credit default
swap spreads to estimate the hypothetical premium
that a firm would have to pay to buy insurance against
systemwide distress.
All three measures are contemporaneous, in the sense
that they estimate the systemic risk contributions at a
point in time. While they measure the average systemic
risk for large financial institutions over time, systemic
risk measures are most commonly used for gauging
the cross-sectional differences in systemic risk. The
measures have been shown to forecast differences
in systemic risk across institutions, but their ability to
forecast the risk of the financial system as a whole is
more limited. Since the measures are based on market
prices for individual institutions, they illustrate the level
of concern market participants have about specific
types of risks and how those risks interact, particularly
with respect to the largest financial institutions. Market
participants, whose decisions determine the direction
of these measures, have less than perfect information
about the activities and systemic risks collectively faced
by large financial institutions.

within the financial system. These destabilizing
reactions and their consequences for the economy
are at the core of the concept of systemic risk (see
Box J: Measuring Systemic Risk).
This section has two parts. First, it examines the
interactions of current vulnerabilities in the financial
system with potential shocks and imbalances that
could be amplified into a threat to financial stability;
for example, a further decline in real estate prices,
an escalation of the European sovereign debt
crisis, and a sudden increase in term premiums
on U.S. government debt. The Council aims to
reduce the system’s exposure to identified structural
vulnerabilities and thereby bolster its resilience.
The second part of this section discusses some of
the dominant forces that will drive change in the
financial system over the next few years and their
possible effects on the incentives of financial market
participants and institutions. To sustain financial
stability, these incentives must be aligned with
society’s need for the efficient provision of financial
services and must not lead to future imbalances.
The dominant forces are divided into three
categories: (1) cyclical, (2) secular, and (3)
regulatory forces. Among the important cyclical
forces are normalization of monetary policy, fiscal
consolidation, and recovery of real estate markets.
For the secular forces we focus on technological
innovation and new products that could transform
the provision of financial services, with special
attention to the role of globalization. The driving
regulatory forces center around the continued
implementation of the Dodd-Frank Act and issues
related to large complex financial institutions.

7.1 Vulnerabilities and Shocks
The speed with which financial disruptions spread to
the rest of the world in September 2008 showed the
vulnerabilities of financial institutions and markets to
certain shocks. Leveraged financial institutions that
rely on access to market liquidity have an inherent
fragility. Vulnerabilities increase when institutions are
highly leveraged or when market participants do not
have enough information about financial products
or about their own counterparties. The crisis also
illustrated the risks that can emerge when a large
number of market participants and key markets rely

on the stability and services of a particular entity.
Council members are addressing vulnerabilities
in the financial system through the many reforms
and recommendations described in this report.
While it is not possible to anticipate every potential
threat to the financial system, Council members
are identifying and analyzing emerging threats and
addressing them in their supervision of financial
institutions, markets, and infrastructure.
7.1.1 Financial Institutions
The resilience of individual financial institutions to
stress is a key factor in the overall stability of the
system. The financial crisis showed that regulators
must focus not only on the safety and soundness
of individual institutions but also on the risks
those institutions could pose to the stability of the
system as a whole.
The crisis illustrated that shocks can become
magnified when many large institutions are
connected to each other, either directly (e.g.,
through counterparty exposure in short-term
funding, trading, and derivatives activities) or
indirectly (e.g., through common exposures to
similar assets or funding sources).
Interconnectivity as a source of risk is exacerbated
when there is insufficient transparency to determine
which entities are connected to each other, or
when certain critical entities are not subject to
robust risk management standards. The DoddFrank Act includes several measures to increase
the amount of information market participants
have about the aggregate risk exposure of their
counterparties. For example, the Federal Reserve
will perform stress tests on large financial institutions
and report a summary of the results (see Box K:
Stress Testing as a Forward-Looking Risk
Mitigation Tool); private funds will be subject
to disclosure requirements; and new trading and
reporting requirements will enhance transparency in
the derivatives market. Council members have also
taken measures to improve the information available
to both regulators and the public about individual
financial institutions.
Financial institutions are generally less vulnerable
today than they were before the crisis, with stronger
capital and liquidity buffers and a reduced reliance

Potential Emerging Threats to U.S. Financial Stability

133

Box K: Stress Testing as a Forward-Looking Risk Mitigation Tool
Stress testing reveals important information about financial institutions’ resilience to potential adverse
developments. It can guide supervisors and firms in their efforts to improve the overall health of the
financial system.
Stress testing has long been used as a risk
management tool, but the approach gained greater
prominence during and after the financial crisis.
Recent supervisory initiatives build on lessons learned
during the crisis about the importance of a forwardlooking and comprehensive perspective on a banking
firm’s capital and liquidity. A critical component is the
ability to evaluate both the quantity and quality of a
firm’s capital against a range of plausible but severe
outcomes in the economy and financial markets. Such
evaluation can help supervisors allocate resources to
better understand and address vulnerabilities, provide
important feedback to firms about relative risks, and
supply crucial information to market participants.
Many types of stress tests are available for financial
institutions. They range from an internally run stress
test of an idiosyncratic exposure at one institution,
to a supervisor-run, systemwide stress test that
simultaneously stresses a number of financial
institutions that, in aggregate, account for a large
share of total financial system assets. The focus here
is on systemwide, supervisor-initiated tests, but it
should be emphasized that financial institutions’ own
stress tests are a crucial component of their internal
risk management and capital planning processes. The
Dodd-Frank Act recognizes the importance of stress
tests, mandating supervisory tests to be conducted
once a year and company tests to be run twice a year
for bank holding companies with assets greater than
$50 billion and for all nonbank financial institutions
supervised by the Federal Reserve. It also mandates
annual company tests by all other federally regulated
financial companies with consolidated assets of more
than $10 billion.
A supervisory stress test has three key elements: (1)
specification of the macroeconomic and financial market
stress scenario(s); (2) a translation of the stress to
capital and liquidity outcomes for individual institutions

134

2011 FSOC Annual Report

and the broader financial system; and (3) follow-ups,
which could include public disclosure of results and
supervisory actions. In describing the three elements,
the main focus will be on stresses that potentially affect
institutions’ capital cushions.

Defining the Stress
Stress tests start out by defining one or more stressed
macroeconomic and financial environments relative
to a baseline scenario. The systemwide perspective
comes from analyzing a set of the firms experiencing
a simultaneous external stress. The definition has two
aspects: (1) the severity of the stressed environment,
and (2) the adverse developments that require special
attention.
The severity of the test can be measured in
various ways. For example, in the Supervisory
Capital Assessment Program (SCAP), the baseline
unemployment rate scenario was based on the Blue
Chip consensus forecast but was set 1.5 percentage
points higher in the “more adverse” scenario,
consistent with a forecast error that would occur
about 1 out of 10 times. In the Comprehensive Capital
Analysis and Review (CCAR), the supervisor-designed
macroeconomic stress used by the firms in parts of their
internal analysis assumed an unemployment rate above
11 percent. As measured by forecast errors, this was
a highly unlikely event, but it was used to ensure that
the projected recovery in the baseline did not lead to a
scenario that entailed only a mild stress on the firms.
The definition of adverse developments requires
analysis of the most salient among a large number of
variables to identify areas that might need risk mitigation.
In the SCAP and the CCAR, special attention was
given to house prices, reflecting the exposure of the
financial system to real estate (Chart 7.1.4). Recently,
supervisors and firms have been examining scenarios in
which the term structure of interest rates deviates in a
variety of ways from the consensus forecast.

Box K: Stress Testing as a Forward-Looking Risk Mitigation Tool

Historical episodes of financial market stress are often
used to assess potential losses on firms’ trading and
derivatives activities. The SCAP and the CCAR used the
financial market events of the second half of 2008, with
the assumption that the changes in market prices from
June to December 2008 would all happen in one day.
Contagion effects from stresses in global markets have
been another focus of attention. Supervisors and firms
have considered a number of financial market contagion
scenarios that could result from the sovereign debt
crisis in peripheral Europe.

Translating the Stress to Financial Firm
Outcomes
Supervisors typically use two basic approaches to
translate the macroeconomic stress to outcomes
for capital. The top-down approach uses statistical
models estimated on systemwide aggregates to
produce projections of losses and revenue under
the stress. This approach has the advantage of
incorporating a full range of data that spans the
industry, but it can miss important firm-specific
variation. The bottom-up approach uses detailed data
about individual characteristics of specific institutions
as inputs to models to produce projections of losses
and revenue; it requires active engagement between
firms and supervisors.
A major advantage of systemwide tests is that they
allow a horizontal comparison of results across
institutions, which helps supervisors understand areas
of particular exposure and vulnerability in the financial
system. This information enables them to impose
discipline on individual firms by identifying outliers.
For example, in the SCAP, estimates of total industry
returns on assets were used to evaluate the estimates
of revenue for each firm.
For trading and derivatives activities, the focus is on
profits and losses resulting from changes in the values
of institutions’ trading and private equity positions,
as well as potential losses stemming from changes in
the size of counterparty exposures at the same time
that counterparty creditworthiness is deteriorating.
Depending on the institutions’ trading positions and
the scenario used, it is possible that some institutions
might profit from particular stress scenarios. But the

breadth and severity of the global shock used in SCAP
and CCAR generated significant stress losses across all
firms in both exercises.
The results for losses and revenue are then converted
into a path for regulatory capital for each firm. Important
considerations in constructing this path are tax liabilities
and credits, as well as assumptions on the future
lending and trading activity of the firms. Similarly,
projections of the balance sheet structure of the firm are
critical to project regulatory capital ratios. If the focus is
on liquidity, assumptions about the behavior of liability
holders are required. For example, one might assume
that no short-term wholesale funding rolls over.

Disclosure and Supervisory Actions
A large amount of stress testing happens as part
of standard firm risk management and supervisory
oversight; thus, it is considered to be confidential
supervisory information about the firm. These
confidential results can lead to risk mitigation actions
by the firms or supervisory action. However, for
supervisor-run, systemwide stress tests, public
disclosure can have advantages. For example, in the
SCAP, detailed supervisory estimates were published
for each firm, along with an extensive description of
the methodology. This disclosure served a number of
useful purposes: it reduced the uncertainty around
private sector estimates of losses for individual firms;
it provided estimates of losses across various asset
classes that were useful to all market participants; and
the transparency about the results and methodology
gave credibility to the overall exercise.
Systemwide stress tests can also be paired with
specific sets of supervisory actions. In the SCAP, firms
whose capital fell below the supervisory tier 1 common
ratio of 4 percent in the hypothetical more adverse
scenario were required to take capital actions to move
above this projected ratio. If they were unable to attract
private capital, the government was ready to provide
capital as a backstop under the Troubled Asset Relief
Program. In the CCAR, supervisors used the information
from firm-run stress tests—along with their analysis
of the adequacy of capital planning, dividend policies,
and Basel III projections—to give “objections” or “no
objections” to firms’ capital distribution requests.

Potential Emerging Threats to U.S. Financial Stability

135

Chart 7.1.1 Real GDP Growth in Recoveries

Chart 7.1.2 Percent of Mortgages with Negative Equity

Chart 7.1.3 Real Estate Exposure as a Percent of Assets

on short-term funding markets. Nonetheless,
Council members are focusing on potential
threats that could result from external shocks or
changing dynamics in the financial system. The
economic environment for financial institutions
is challenging. Economic growth in the United
States remains weak compared with recoveries
from previous recessions (Chart 7.1.1),
and real estate markets remain depressed.
Continued deterioration in residential real
estate markets would add additional strains to
household balance sheets and reduce the value
of collateral supporting residential mortgages
(Charts 4.2.7 and 7.1.2).
Supervisors have carefully analyzed the
residential and commercial real estate holdings
of U.S. financial institutions (Chart 7.1.3). In the
Supervisory Capital Assessment Program and
Comprehensive Capital Analysis and Review
exercises, supervisors tested the effects of
additional substantial declines in real estate
prices on the capital buffers of large bank
holding companies (BHCs) (Chart 7.1.4). While
losses would increase with further price declines,
the increased capital and relatively large loan
loss reserves in the system provide some
reassurance that large financial intermediaries
would not have to deleverage in response
(Charts 5.3.6 and 5.3.7).
Council members remain alert to the potential
for financial institutions, under pressure to
boost returns to shareholders, to aggressively
reduce their underwriting standards. As a
result of the weak recovery and low overall
loan demand, financial institutions have built up
unprecedented cash reserves and increased
their holdings of government securities (Chart
7.1.5). Supervisors are carefully monitoring
loan terms, especially for non investment-grade
corporate loans. Leveraged loan issuance
in early 2011 signaled some pressures on
underwriting standards, but the potential for
market disruptions appears low because of the
relatively small size of the market and the limited
use of funding leverage such as repo.
Council members have considered the effects on
banks of various scenarios for yield curve shifts
in the coming quarters. Under a yield curve-

136

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 7.1.4 House Prices Under Supervisory Scenarios

7.1.4 House Prices Under Supervisory Scenarios

Chart 7.1.5 Securities and Reserves as a Percent of Assets

Chart 7.1.6 Large BHC Treasury and Agency Debt Holdings

steepening scenario, long-term rates would
rise relative to short-term rates if, for example,
investors were to demand higher compensation
for long-term interest rate risk. In that scenario,
while lenders would benefit from the higher
returns on new loans, they would be exposed
to losses on their current holdings of long-term
assets. In particular, many banks have increased
their exposures to long-term government and
agency securities: one-quarter of large BHCs
had exposures of 20 percent or more as of first
quarter 2011 (Chart 7.1.6). Supervisors are
actively analyzing banks’ management of these
exposures.
A steeper yield curve would have various
implications for bank income. Statistical
analysis for large BHCs suggests that net
interest margins could be expected to increase
if the yield curve steepened. However, higher
long-term interest rates could be expected to
dampen economic activity and loan growth, so
the overall effect is less clear.
Globalization has increased the exposure
of U.S. financial institutions to international
developments. Markets have recently signaled
heightened concern about sovereign and bank
balance sheet risks in the peripheral euro
area (Chart 7.1.7). Supervisory analysis and
disclosures by large U.S. banks indicates that
direct net exposures of U.S. banking firms
to Greece, Ireland, and Portugal, individually
and collectively, are very limited. Insurance
industry exposure to peripheral Europe, which
is also very limited, is concentrated in private
corporations. The relatively larger holdings
in Ireland primarily reflect exposures to large
multinational corporations (Chart 7.1.8).
While U.S. financial institutions’ direct claims
on peripheral euro area borrowers are relatively
modest, their exposures to core European
banks in the United Kingdom, Germany, and
France are much larger, and those European
banks are the primary international lenders
to peripheral European borrowers. The
interconnectedness of financial institutions
with sovereigns makes it difficult to precisely
quantify all possible exposures, which in turn

Potential Emerging Threats to U.S. Financial Stability

137

increases the risk that a credit event could lead
to generalized declines in investor sentiment,
losses of liquidity, and associated disruptions of
international financial markets.

7.1.7 European Sovereign 5-year CDS Spreads
Chart 7.1.7 European Sovereign 5-year CDS Spreads

7.1.2 Financial Markets
The crisis highlighted the vulnerabilities
of financial markets to shocks. Member
agencies have been developing tools to
monitor financial markets so they can better
understand these vulnerabilities.

Chart 7.1.8 Insurance IndustryExposure to Europe
7.1.8 Insurance Industry Exposure to Europe
$

Chart 7.1.9 Short-Term Wholesale Funding

Before the crisis, maturity and risk
transformation had extended into untested
areas, with new and often more leveraged
financial instruments and institutional structures.
Much of this transformation depended on
liquid wholesale funding markets. Because of
the complexity and opacity of some of these
products, investors often relied on the judgment
of credit rating agencies in making investment
decisions. As investors began to rethink the
quality of some of the underlying assets and
the soundness of their counterparties, market
liquidity started to tighten. Tighter liquidity
exposed funding problems for many financial
institutions, leading to fire sales into illiquid
markets. These sales often forced recognition of
losses, reinforcing investor doubts and further
constraining funding.
Council agencies are developing tools to
improve their understanding of potential risks
to financial stability, particularly with respect
to credit allocation, leverage, and maturity
transformation (see Box L: Improvements
in the Monitoring of Risks to Financial
Stability).
The U.S. financial system has significantly
reduced its reliance on short-term wholesale
funding (Chart 7.1.9). The repo market has
shrunk by approximately 30 percent and the
asset-backed commercial paper market has
shrunk by approximately two-thirds. However,
large financial institutions differ in their ability to
access stable retail deposits, which may expose
vulnerabilities for certain firms (Chart 7.1.10).
Large institutions’ funding structures and risk
management operations are being monitored

138

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Box L: Improvements in the
Monitoring of Risks to Financial Stability
The crisis exposed crucial gaps in regulators’ knowledge about how the U.S. financial system allocates credit
risk, finances long-term assets with short-term liabilities, and creates leverage.
The gaps in regulators’ knowledge encompassed
activities of regulated institutions as well as those of
institutions that operated on the periphery of regulation,
such as nonbank lenders, mortgage brokers, and
private investment funds. For example, supervisors
knew that much financial activity had moved from the
banking sector to the capital markets, but they did
not fully understand the risks that certain activities
posed to the institutions they supervised and to the
financial system as a whole. Regulators were also slow
to appreciate the severity of the problems arising from
the increase in consumer financial services offered by
mortgage brokers, nonbank mortgage lenders, and
other entities that were not federally supervised. 	
The regulatory community is now working to fill these
knowledge gaps. For example, the SEC and the
CFTC, responding to a Dodd-Frank Act mandate, have
proposed a new confidential reporting form, Form PF,
that certain private fund advisers would file with their
regulators. The form requests detailed information
about the amount of assets under management, use of
leverage, counterparty credit risk exposure, and trading
and investment positions. This form would be required
for investment advisers to private funds registered with
the SEC and certain commodity pool operators and
commodity trading advisors dually registered with the
CFTC and the SEC.

significantly expanded schedules on firms’ residential
and commercial mortgage activities. The forms
also address troubled debt restructurings, and the
measurement of both assets and liabilities under fair
value accounting standards.
Since early 2008, the OCC and the Office of Thrift
Supervision have released their quarterly Mortgage
Metrics reports describing the state of the mortgage
market, based on loan-level information collected
by the agencies in their supervision of the federally
regulated banks and thrifts with the largest mortgage
servicing portfolios (Chart L.1). The OCC has followed
up with similar projects to collect and aggregate loanlevel data on large banks’ exposures in home equity,
credit card, and commercial real estate loans, often
working in conjunction with the Federal Reserve and
other regulators. The agencies, led by the Federal
Reserve, have also expanded the long-standing Shared
National Credit Program, under which regulators
share information on banks’ credit exposures to large
corporations. This provides more granular information
about the credit risk of specific corporations;
information is collected on a quarterly basis.

Chart L.1 Number of New Loan Modifications

Members of the Council have taken steps to improve
the information available to investors about financial
markets and institutions. The quarterly reporting
forms filed by banks (Call Reports) and bank holding
companies (Y-9C forms) now require greater detail on
securities holdings, particularly of complex structured
products; loan holdings, unused commitments,
and the types of loans that are not performing; and
derivatives and other trading activities. These forms
have been revised since the crisis to include a new
schedule on firms’ variable interest entities and

Potential Emerging Threats to U.S. Financial Stability

139

Box L: Improvements in the Monitoring of Risks to Financial Stability

Owing to their presence in every state, state insurance,
banking, and securities regulators can make important
contributions to financial stability by providing
information about developments or trends they are
observing in institutions and markets and taking
appropriate actions. For example, state securities
regulators are often the first to identify new investment
frauds and marketwide investment-related violations;
to assist the Council in monitoring potential threats to
the financial system, they have developed a protocol to
facilitate the flow of information through their member
representative to the Council.
State mortgage regulators have developed and
launched the Nationwide Mortgage Licensing System
and Registry (NMLS), which enhances supervision of
the residential mortgage market by granting a unique
identifier to residential mortgage loan originators and
companies. The unique identifier allows supervisors
to track mortgage providers across state lines.
Additionally, consumers, industry, and regulators
have access to specific originators’ histories and
qualifications through NMLS Consumer Access. The
system was established as a voluntary licensing system
for state-licensed and state-regulated mortgage loan
originators but was codified by Congress for mandatory
use through the Secure and Fair Enforcement for
Mortgage Licensing Act of 2008; it enables state and
federal regulators to better coordinate their mortgage
supervision efforts.
In June 2010, the Federal Reserve launched the
quarterly Senior Credit Officer Opinion Survey on Dealer
Financing Terms, which includes qualitative information
on the leverage that dealers provide to financial market
participants in the repo and over-the-counter derivatives
markets (Chart L.2). This survey complements more
frequent quantitative data that supervisors collect
on a confidential basis from large complex financial
institutions about their liquidity profiles.
In April 2010, the SEC proposed a requirement for
enhanced disclosure by asset-backed issuers relying
on the safe harbor provisions for privately issued
securities. In addition, the SEC proposed amendments
to Rule 144A that would provide more transparency
with respect to the private market for these securities.

140

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart L.2 Changes in Demand for Securities Financing

These amendments require a structured finance product
issuer to file a public notice of the initial placement
of structured finance products that are eligible for
resale under Rule 144A. Regulators and other market
participants may benefit from the availability of more
information about private placements of structured
finance products.
Because the securities-lending activities of some AIG
insurance subsidiaries were a source of concern and
cost during the crisis, state insurance regulators have
adopted additional disclosure requirements designed
to provide more complete disclosure of the securitieslending agreements used by insurers. Under the new
rules, reinvested collateral from securities-lending
programs that was previously reported in summary
form will be subject to the same quarterly reporting
required of an insurer’s regular investments. Programs
will have to include details on carrying value, fair value,
and maturity date, and a designation of credit quality
for every single investment. Prior to the financial crisis,
state insurance regulators did not generally monitor
the securities-lending activities of insurance companies
domiciled in other states; the crisis illustrated the need
for greater transparency. Insurers are now required
to complete an additional schedule on securitieslending activities in their quarterly and annual reports
that highlights (1) any asset/liability mismatch that
would result from reinvesting the collateral into longer
duration assets, and (2) any market value/credit risk that
could materialize if the insurer were required to return

Box L: Improvements in the Monitoring of Risks to Financial Stability

collateral to the counterparty. The enhanced securitieslending reports will help the new FIO monitor the
insurance industry, including potential issues or gaps
in the regulation of insurers that could contribute to a
systemic crisis.
To better understand and report insurers’ exposure to
derivatives, state insurance regulators have enhanced the
collection of information on the use of derivatives. These
disclosures supplement state insurance regulators’ ability
to monitor use of derivatives by insurers under state
insurance laws, and support the FIO’s ability to monitor
all aspects of the insurance industry.
The OFR has helped launch an initiative to create a
global system to identify parties to financial contracts.
Unique legal entity identifiers (LEIs) will increase market

transparency and benefit market participants by making
it easier for them to report and evaluate aggregate
exposures. LEIs will also improve the quality of
supervisory and nonsupervisory data used by regulators
to measure and assess risks, and will facilitate research
outside the regulatory community that will promote
market discipline.
For purposes of monitoring risks to financial stability,
the Dodd-Frank Act authorizes the Council to request
data from the OFR and its own member agencies. The
Council may also require financial companies to submit
reports that will allow it to evaluate whether a specific
company, activity, or market could pose a threat to
financial stability, after first relying to the extent possible
on information provided by supervisors.

Potential Emerging Threats to U.S. Financial Stability

141

Chart 7.1.10 Less-Stable Funding Sources at 6 Largest BHCs

Chart 7.1.11 Potential BHC Ratings Without Support Uplift

7.1.11 Potential BHC Ratings Without Support Uplift

Chart 7.1.12 U.S. Prime MMF Exposure by Country and Type

closely, especially their short-term funding
strategies and new products. Financial
institutions have begun to develop shortterm funding products, such as collateralized
commercial paper, to comply with new
regulatory guidelines and still meet their business
objectives. Council members are closely
monitoring the liquidity and credit risk these
products entail for issuers and investors.
Credit rating agencies continue to factor in
ratings uplifts for firms that they consider might
benefit from an implicit government backstop
(see Section 5.4.5). However, as ratings are
reviewed ahead of the implementation of the
enhanced resolution authority under the DoddFrank Act, certain firms’ ratings have been
placed on review for downgrade. If the rating
uplift associated with the rating agencies’
current perceived likelihood of “systemic
support” were to be removed without any
offsetting action on the stand-alone rating,
the short-term ratings of some firms could fall
below A-1/P-1 (Chart 7.1.11). A downgrade of
the short-term rating could affect the liquidity
profile of these institutions because of their
continued reliance on short-term wholesale
funding, particularly at broker-dealers. The
rating sensitivity of wholesale funding sources
such as money market funds (MMFs), which
are restricted in their ability to provide funding
to lower rated counterparties, could also be
a factor. Few historical precedents exist of
firms with large broker-dealers operating with
A-2/P-2 ratings.
Since the crisis, assets managed by MMFs have
declined. Council members have been tracking
the exposures that domestic MMFs have to
Europe (Chart 7.1.12). Their direct exposure
to the countries that have been most affected
by the sovereign debt crisis is minimal (Chart
7.1.13), although some major European banks
obtain substantial short-term wholesale U.S.
dollar funding from U.S. money market funds.
A sudden unexpected increase in volatility in
financial markets could expose vulnerabilities
(Chart 7.1.14). During periods of violent price
movements, market liquidity can evaporate as
hedging strategies to protect against market

142

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 7.1.13 U.S. Prime MMF European Exposures

Chart 7.1.14 VIX: A Measure of Financial Market Volatility

7.1.15 Sharp Jumps in Market Volatility
Chart 7.1.15 Sharp Jumps inMarket Volatility

risk become strained or directly amplify the
price movements. For example, in the October
1987 equity market crash, portfolio insurance
programs were designed to sell when prices
declined; in fact, they were set to sell at an
increasing rate, thereby accelerating the
market decline. Similarly, in the flash crash of
May 6, 2010, liquidity evaporated and market
functioning deteriorated rapidly. Regulators
have added circuit breakers in equity markets
to mitigate such dynamics (see Section
5.3.4), but this event illustrated the potential
fragility of market liquidity, particularly in areas
characterized by rapid innovation and change in
market behaviors.
The role of exchange traded funds (ETFs)
during the flash crash has focused attention
on these products. The rapid rise of ETFs has
been driven by the attraction of gaining liquid
exposure to less liquid asset classes—such as
commodities and certain emerging markets—
without having to execute trades directly in
less liquid markets (Chart E.1). However, the
liquidity of ETFs depends heavily on the support
of market makers and on market functioning in
the underlying asset. The relationship between
ETF turnover and market volatility bears further
analysis, and regulators must continue to
monitor the development of more complex
products in both U.S. and foreign-domiciled
funds that might heighten liquidity concerns.
Financial contagion—the rapid transmission of
distress to markets away from the epicenter of
weakness—can occur with startling speed, as
happened in September 2008 and again in May
2010, after increased concerns about sovereign
risk in peripheral Europe spread across global
financial markets. The latter episode also
showed how a combination of shocks and
vulnerabilities—in this case, the flash crash and
uncertainty over peripheral Europe—can amplify
strains (Chart 7.1.15).
Periods of heightened correlation across asset
classes can also occur. During the financial
crisis, investors pulled away from any assets
with potential credit risk, regardless of the
assets’ underlying fundamentals, in favor
of U.S. Treasuries and other “safe havens.”

Potential Emerging Threats to U.S. Financial Stability

143

Chart 7.1.16 Emerging Market Bond Issuance

Conversely, a sharp transition away from this
trading pattern could have implications for
hedging strategies and could amplify market
volatility.
With heightened uncertainty, financial markets
can experience fast price movements. For
example, if the yield curve were to steepen
abruptly, perhaps owing to uncertainty about
raising the U.S. government’s debt limit, various
markets could be strained. The impact of
yield curve steepening on individual market
participants could be mitigated to some extent
by hedging activity, as interest rate risk is
commonly transferred in derivatives markets,
but recent financial crises have shown that
larger-than-expected price movements can
expose previously unknown vulnerabilities.
The increasing asset allocations to commodities
and emerging markets also may present
challenges. Strong economic growth and
capital inflows are drawing attention to the
risks of overheating in certain emerging market
economies and asset markets. Emerging
market external bond issuance reached record
levels in 2010 and is on pace to exceed those
levels in 2011 (Chart 7.1.16). Commodity
markets have recently shown high volatility.
While expected volatility is high in these
markets, uncertainty exists about how ETFs and
other products related to commodities would
perform under stressed market conditions.
7.1.3 Financial Infrastructure
Council members have identified three
components of the market infrastructure that
require strengthening: (1) mortgage servicing,
(2) derivatives, and (3) tri-party repo. Of the
three, the weaknesses in the tri-party repo
market are most likely to amplify current risks.
Industry initiatives are underway to address
shortcomings in the tri-party repo market
infrastructure by reducing the market’s reliance
on intraday credit provision by the clearing
banks, but these efforts are unlikely to address
all the structural weaknesses in the market,
including dealer liquidity risk management,
lender collateral management, and the market’s
resilience to investor runs and a potential dealer

144

2011 FSOC Annual Report

7.1.17 Market and Funding Liquidity Spirals
Chart 7.1.17 Market and Funding LiquiditySpirals

failure. During the crisis, the lack of transparency
and the pervasive belief that the clearing bank
would always unwind a dealer’s repos caused
market participants to inaccurately assess
the credit and liquidity risks inherent in their
exposures, which contributed to the industry’s
fragility.
The fragility of market and funding liquidity and
the constraints on the type of collateral certain
investors (particularly MMFs) are prepared to
take heighten the risk of contagion from the triparty repo market. Many tri-party repo lenders,
given their regulatory structure and investor
base, still have a strong incentive to withdraw
funding from a borrower at the first sign of
distress, which can accelerate dealers’ funding
difficulties. For example, while MMF reform can
help insulate these funds from runs by their
investors, MMFs still have the incentive to pull
away from a troubled dealer in the tri-party repo
market because, in many cases, MMFs cannot
take possession of the collateral in the event of a
dealer default.
Other important classes of lenders, such as
asset custodians administering securities
lending programs, can also face significant
liquidity demands from their clients under
certain circumstances, which may make them
unwilling or unable to hold pledged collateral.
Regulators should ensure that the various
participants in the tri-party repo market are
implementing and sustaining the necessary
improvements in their management of collateral
to alleviate the risk of cash investor runs in this
market.
Another risk to the tri-party repo market is the
possibility of a dealer default. A dealer default
would likely result in the sudden liquidation of a
large amount of collateral by its counterparties,
creating fire sale conditions in the underlying
asset markets that could set damaging spirals
in motion (Chart 7.1.17). The Tri-Party Repo
Infrastructure Reform Task Force has called
for tri-party repo lenders to develop plans
and arrangements for liquidating collateral in
the event of a default, but supervisory action
is needed to ensure that such plans are
developed and maintained. The Dodd-Frank

Potential Emerging Threats to U.S. Financial Stability

145

Act includes reforms intended to help ensure that
the risks posed by institutions such as the large
dealers in the tri-party repo market are managed
prudently and subject to adequate oversight. Among
other actions, when the Federal Reserve and FDIC
finalize the new rules, most of the largest dealers
in this market will be required to submit detailed
resolution plans that will provide regulators with the
tools and authority necessary to resolve a failed
institution in a way that limits broader systemic
impact and taxpayer cost. Additional actions by the
regulatory community may be necessary to promote
confidence that liquidation of collateral from a major
dealer will proceed in an orderly manner.

7.2 Ongoing Challenges to
Financial Stability
The financial system constantly evolves in response
to changes in the environment in which financial
institutions and market participants compete.
Council members analyze the forces driving these
changes in three categories: cyclical, secular, and
regulatory. The Council closely monitors these forces
and their effects on business models and product
innovations, with a focus on understanding how
financial activities could migrate to less-regulated
corners of the financial system and give rise to
imbalances and new vulnerabilities.
7.2.1 Cyclical Forces
Two years into a relatively weak economic
recovery, the U.S. financial system is at an
uncertain stage in the business cycle. Real estate
markets have not recovered, and lending remains
weak by historical standards. At some point,
monetary policy will normalize and fiscal policy will
consolidate, which has implications for financial
institutions and markets.
While business investment and consumer spending
have begun to improve, household net worth
remains depressed and unemployment is elevated.
Loan demand from households and nonfinancial
corporations remains weak by historical standards.
As discussed in Section 4.1, the weakness in the
economy is due at least in part to a reduction in the
supply of credit, as financial institutions attempted
to reduce their leverage by selling assets, extending
fewer new loans, and conserving capital.

146

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Monetary policy will eventually normalize and fiscal
consolidation will occur as the financial system
and the real economy continue to heal from the
financial crisis and the recession. The pace of these
adjustments will have an impact on the economic
prospects and business models of financial
institutions. While banks’ earnings will likely benefit
in the short run as short-term interest rates and
credit flows increase, in the long run, strategies that
are profitable in a low-interest-rate environment may
not work as well when rates rise.
As monetary policy normalizes, movements in
the yield curve will affect financial institutions’ net
interest margins. Statistical analysis of historical
patterns suggests that net interest margins for
the industry as a whole will remain at or above
current levels, under the assumption that financial
institutions will not adjust the composition of their
portfolios. Financial institutions—ranging from small
credit unions and community banks to the largest,
most complex institutions—increased their holdings
of government securities and agency mortgagebacked securities as loan growth slowed. High
levels of reserves have helped banks strengthen
their balance sheets, but reserves will decline as
monetary policy normalizes.
Banks experienced significant funding inflows
from depositors attracted by the safety of insured
deposits during the financial crisis. Typically, as
short-term rates increase and risk appetites return
to normal, some depositors will seek out the higher
returns offered by MMFs and other short-term
investments. Banks that are experiencing deposit
outflows might have to raise their deposit rates or
find alternative forms of funding, lowering their net
interest margins. To mitigate that impact somewhat,
banks can offer relatively low interest rates for some
deposits because they offer important transaction
services. But these outflows could be much larger
than those that occurred after previous recessions,
because depositor inflows have been more
significant this time than during the spikes in the late
1980s and mid-1990s.
Alternatively, in an environment of weak economic
growth, a prolonged period of low interest rates
would have its own effects. It might encourage
excessive risk taking, a decline in credit standards,
and speculation. The longer short-term interest rates

remain at their lower bound, the more strain will be
placed on the business models of MMFs and other
cash pools, which might cause some investors to
reach for yield in untested areas. The new rules on
MMF maturity structure and quality of assets are
intended to limit this reaction.
Another source of uncertainty is the real estate
sector, on which many financial institutions’ business
models depended before the crisis. Most projections
assume a long, slow recovery in residential and
commercial real estate activity. Small and mediumsized financial institutions, which have less scope
to diversify their business models from real estate,
may find it difficult to identify new profit streams and
may enter competitive markets with which they are
relatively unfamiliar. Another key uncertainty is the
path of transition back to a housing finance system
with less government involvement.
As firms adapt their business models, Council
members will assess changes in earnings strategies,
including signs of reaching for yield that may come
from softening underwriting standards or shifts into
riskier markets. Monitoring underwriting standards
and appropriate pricing for risk in these and other
products will be a key focus for Council members.
7.2.2 Secular Forces
The financial system evolves in response to
long-term trends. Two important trends are
technological change and the increasing
globalization of financial activity.
Technological progress in the financial industry
is reflected in advances in firms’ and markets’
infrastructure and the introduction and development
of new financial products, along with the analytical
tools needed to value those products. Technological
innovation can trigger dramatic changes in firms’
business models, increase the interconnectedness
of the system as a whole, and facilitate a much
more globalized financial system. Financial product
innovation is often motivated by the need to identify
new profit streams in a competitive environment.
Innovations can also be enabled by new analytical
tools; for example, the introduction of option pricing
theory led to growth in the options market in the
1970s, and new correlation models accelerated
growth in the market for collateralized debt

obligations of mortgage-backed securities in the
pre-crisis period.
Such innovations can provide firms with new ways to
transfer risks, undertake different forms of maturity
transformation, and create leverage. They may also
increase the complexity and opacity of the financial
system. Financial institution risk managers and
their supervisors need to carefully monitor the risks
of new products. A constant threat comes from
“model risk,” which refers to the fact that modelbased predictions of behavior often miss important
changes. Almost by definition, the newest financial
products are most exposed to model risk, because
their lack of historical data presents challenges for
model development or back-testing.
Another result of technological innovation is the
advent of faster computers and the ability to
accommodate more complex networks, which
has enabled a surge in electronic trading in many
markets (see Section 5.3.3). Under normal market
conditions, the presence of electronic traders
supports immediate and competitive execution of
orders. However, the combination of speed and
automatic execution creates risks. First, electronic
trading occurs too quickly for human judgment to
intercede. For example, the rapid pace of order
execution is vulnerable to runaway processes. If
the trading algorithms are not properly designed
for these situations, the results may be far different
than they would be if humans could intercede.
Second, liquidity provided by electronic traders
may deteriorate in stressed environments. Third,
electronic trading enables strategies that can
inhibit price discovery. For example, some trading
algorithms seek out liquidity demand, presenting
bids and offers into the market and then retracting
them in a space of nanoseconds.
Technological innovation has allowed many
transactions and payments to be completed
electronically. While this lowers transactions costs,
it has exposed the financial system to a new set of
risks. Recently, federal regulators released updated
guidance on how banks should guard against
cybersecurity threats. The guidance is intended
to help ensure that the financial system increases
its protection against the evolving methods used
to penetrate computer networks. The regulators

Potential Emerging Threats to U.S. Financial Stability

147

noted that successful cyberattacks have stolen
hundreds of millions of dollars from online accounts
by exploiting vulnerabilities in identifying the true
account owner. The new guidance addresses these
vulnerabilities.
Another secular trend is the rise of international
banking. Foreign banks play an increasingly
important role in U.S. financial markets. Moreover,
certain globally operating institutions pose outsized
risks to domestic and global markets, regardless
of where they have their headquarters, owing
to their size, complexity, and interconnections.
The financial crisis illustrated the difficulty of
resolving, in an orderly fashion, a failing financial
institution that operates in many jurisdictions (see
Box I: Addressing Issues Related to Large
Complex Financial Institutions). Regulators are
collaborating globally to address the systemic and
moral hazards associated with these institutions
through common regulatory standards, capital
surcharges on the most systemically important
global institutions, coordination among supervisors,
and improvements to resolution regimes. For
regulation of the global financial system to be
effective, a cohesive regulatory framework across
countries is crucial.
Globalization of finance is particularly relevant in the
United States because of the role of the dollar as
the international reserve currency and the fact that
foreign financial institutions have large holdings of
U.S. dollar-denominated assets. During the crisis,
banks in other countries faced significant difficulties
in continuing to fund their holdings of distressed
U.S. assets, particularly housing-related securities.
Similarly, distress in other countries can affect the
U.S. financial system if banks in those countries
experience widespread deposit runs or short-term
funding withdrawals and are forced to sell U.S. dollar
assets in large quantities.
7.2.3 Regulatory Forces
Innovations and changes in the financial system
are significantly motivated by changes in the
regulatory environment and, in turn, often require
additional responses by regulators.
In the wake of the crisis, sweeping regulatory
changes have been enacted in the United States
and abroad to improve the resilience of the financial

148

2011 FSOC Annual Report

system; for example, through increased capital and
liquidity standards. The designation of nonbank
financial companies for supervisory oversight will
enable regulators to impose capital, liquidity, and
risk management standards on a wider set of firms.
Accounting changes for asset-backed markets
have helped reduce regulatory arbitrage in these
products. The establishment of the Consumer
Financial Protection Bureau will have a direct impact
on the functioning of mortgage markets through the
imposition of a suitability standard and changes in
disclosure. Derivatives reform will require the use of
central counterparties for standardized derivatives
and increased transparency.
The largest financial institutions will be most
influenced by regulatory forces, given their extensive
role in the financial system. For example, derivatives
reform will likely pressure the margins of dealers,
which include several of the largest BHCs, as
transparency and standardization are brought to this
market. Implementation of the Volcker rule will also
require changes in business models. Although these
institutions should have enough flexibility to refine
their core business activities, changes in their risk
profiles must be carefully monitored.
The regulatory reforms that are most likely to
affect the business models of the largest globally
active financial firms and the structure of the
global financial system are the new Basel III capital
and liquidity rules. The significantly higher capital
requirements for all internationally active banks, the
capital surcharge framework for globally systemic
banks, the higher risk weights on capital market
activity and exposures to other large financial firms,
the stricter definition of capital, the new international
leverage ratio, and the new quantitative liquidity
standards will cause global banks to reduce their
interconnectedness, operate with larger capital
and liquidity buffers, and otherwise lower their
systemic footprint. This stricter regulatory regime
will also create powerful incentives for global banks
to restructure their internal operations, their capital
bases, their funding profiles, and their transactions
with other market participants to arbitrage the rules.
Council members expect that the combined impact
of financial reform will be to improve financial
stability. However, regulatory forces are bound to
influence market dynamics in unpredictable ways;

care must be taken to ensure that these effects do
not undermine the intent of the reforms. Product
innovation may be driven by gaps or inconsistencies
in the new regulatory framework, further highlighting
the need for cooperation among regulators.
Changes in regulations can give rise to unintended
consequences. Under the new regulatory regime,
less regulated institutions are likely to find
competitive advantages. As a general principle,
similar activities should be subject to similar
regulations, but applying this principle in a globally
integrated financial system is challenging. For this
reason, the United States is continuously engaged
with its international partners. This engagement
occurs through participation in the Financial Stability
Board and G-20 working groups, as well as bilateral
dialogues such as the U.S.-E.U. Financial Market
Regulatory Dialogue. This ongoing engagement
promotes consistency and is intended to create a
“race to the top,” so U.S.-based firms are not at a
competitive disadvantage in the global marketplace.
Council members will be attuned to the benefits and
costs of existing and new regulations, and to the
risk that financial market participants will respond by
moving activities outside the U.S.-regulated core.

Potential Emerging Threats to U.S. Financial Stability

149

Glossary

Adjustable-Rate
Mortgage (ARM)
Agency
MortgageBacked Security

A mortgage-backed security issued or guaranteed by federal
agencies or government-sponsored enterprises.

Asset-Backed
Commercial
Paper (ABCP)

Short-term debt that has a fixed maturity of up to 270 days and is
backed by some financial asset, such as trade receivables, consumer
debt receivables, or auto and equipment loans or leases.

Asset-Backed
Security (ABS)

A debt instrument that is collateralized by specific financial assets
that generate the cash flow used to service the debt instrument.

Auction Rate
Security (ARS)

A debt security, often issued by municipalities, in which the yield is
reset regularly via a Dutch auction.

Automated
Clearing House
(ACH)

An electronic clearing and settlement system for exchanging batches
of electronic transactions among participating depository institutions;
such electronic transactions are often substitutes for paper checks
and may be used to make recurring payments, such as payroll
or loan payments, or single payments, such as transferring funds
between accounts or paying bills online. In the United States, the
system or network has two operators: the Federal Reserve Banks
and a private sector organization.

Available-forSale (AFS)

An accounting term for debt and equity securities that have readily
determinable fair values and are not classified as trading securities
or as held-to-maturity securities. Available-for-sale securities are
accounted for at fair value on a company’s balance sheet.

Bank for
International
Settlements (BIS)

An international financial organization that serves central banks in
their pursuit of monetary and financial stability, helping to foster
international cooperation in those areas and acting as a bank for
central banks.

Bank Holding
Company (BHC)

	

A mortgage that allows for the periodic adjustment of the interest rate
on the basis of changes in a specified index or rate.

Any company that has direct or indirect control of one or more
banks and is regulated and supervised by the Federal Reserve in
accordance with the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956.

Glossary

151

Basel Accords,
Basel Standards

The Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS) develops and
issues international standards on bank capital adequacy. In 1988 the
BCBS introduced a capital measurement system commonly known
as the Basel Capital Accord or Basel I. In 2004 the BCBS issued a
revised capital adequacy framework titled “International Convergence
of Capital Measurement and Capital Standards: A Revised
Framework,” which is commonly referred to as the New Accord,
or Basel II. Following the financial crisis, the BCBS developed new
global standards for the banking system that are collectively referred
to as Basel III.

Broker-Dealer

An entity that is engaged in the business of buying and selling
securities for itself and others.

Capitalization
Rate

In commercial real estate, the ratio of net operating income from a
property to its value.

Central Bank
Reserves

In the United States, balances held at Federal Reserve Banks to
satisfy reserve requirements, plus any balances held in excess of
required reserve balances and contractual clearing balances.

Central
Counterparty

An entity that is interposed between the initial participants to a
bilateral transaction, and becomes the buyer to every seller and
the seller to every buyer of a specified set of contracts or financial
instruments.

Clearing Bank

A commercial bank that facilitates payment and settlement of
financial transactions, such as check clearing or facilitating trades
between the sellers and buyers of securities or other financial
instruments or contracts.

Clearing House
(Derivatives
Clearing
Organization or
Clearing Agency)

An entity through which financial institutions agree to exchange
payment instructions or other financial obligations (e.g., securities).
The institutions settle for items exchanged at a designated time
based on the rules and procedures of the clearing house. In some
cases, the clearing house may assume significant counterparty,
financial, or risk management responsibilities for the clearing system.

Clearing House
Interbank
Payments
System (CHIPS)

An automated clearing system used primarily for international
payments. This system is owned and operated by The Clearing
House and engages Fedwire Funds Service for settlement.

Closed-End
Fund

A type of investment company that issues a fixed number of
nonredeemable shares that trade intraday in secondary markets at
market-determined prices.

152

2011 FSOC Annual Report

CLS Bank
International
(CLS)
Collateralized
Debt Obligation
(CDO)

A type of structured asset-backed security that has tranches with
distinct interest rates, payment flows, and risk levels.

Commercial
Bank

A chartered and regulated financial institution authorized to take
deposits from the public, obtain deposit insurance from the FDIC,
and engage in certain lending activities.

Commercial
MortgageBacked Security
(CMBS)

A security that is collateralized by a pool of commercial mortgage
loans and makes payments that are based primarily on the
performance of those loans.

Commercial
Paper (CP)

Short-term (maturity of up to 270 days), unsecured corporate debt.

Commercial
Paper Funding
Facility (CPFF)

A Federal Reserve funding facility that enhanced liquidity in the
commercial paper markets by providing a liquidity backstop to U.S.
issuers of commercial paper. The facility purchased three-month
unsecured and asset-backed commercial paper directly from eligible
issuers. The program was announced in October 2008 and was
closed on February 1, 2010.

Committee on
Payment and
Settlement
Systems (CPSS)

A committee of central banks hosted by the Bank for International
Settlements that sets standards for payment and securities
settlement systems.

Comprehensive
Capital Analysis
and Review
(CCAR)

A cross-institution study, completed in March 2011, conducted
by the Federal Reserve of the capital plans and capital planning
processes of the 19 largest U.S. bank holding companies.

Confidential
Supervisory
Information

	

A private-sector, special-purpose bank used for settling foreign
exchange transactions to eliminate settlement risk on a gross,
payment-versus-payment basis.

Generally refers to information consisting of reports of examination
and inspection, confidential operating and condition reports, and
any information derived from, relating to, or contained in them, and
information gathered by agencies responsible for supervising financial
institutions in connection with any investigation or enforcement
action. Confidential supervisory information also may consist
of documents prepared by, on behalf of, or for the use of such
agencies.

Glossary

153

Core Deposits

Deposits that are stable, lower cost, and reprice more slowly than
other deposits when interest rates change. Core deposits are
typically funds of local customers who also have a borrowing or other
relationship with the bank.

Credit Default
Swap (CDS)

A bilateral over-the-counter contract in which one party agrees to
make a payment to the other party in the event of a specified credit
event, in exchange for one or more fixed payments.

Credit
Intermediation

The process of receiving funds in order to provide debt financing to
third parties.

Credit Rating
Agency

A private company that evaluates the credit quality of debt issuers
as well as their issued securities and provides ratings on the issuers
and those securities. Many credit rating agencies are nationally
recognized statistical rating organizations, the largest of which are
Fitch Ratings, Moody’s Investors Service, and Standard & Poor’s.

Credit Union

A member-owned, not-for-profit cooperative financial institution
formed to permit members to save, borrow, and obtain related
financial services. All federally chartered credit unions and most
state-chartered credit unions provide federally insured deposits and
are regulated by the NCUA.

Current Account
Balance

The difference between a country’s total exports and imports of
goods, services, and transfers. Current account balance calculations
exclude transactions in financial assets and liabilities.

Dark Pool

A trading network that matches the orders of multiple buyers and
sellers for a financial instrument without displaying quotations to the
public.

Debt Guarantee
Program (DGP)

One of two components of the FDIC’s Temporary Liquidity Guarantee
Program. The DGP provided liquidity through an FDIC guarantee
of certain types of senior unsecured debt issued by participating
entities. Participating entities could issue FDIC-guaranteed debt
through October 31, 2009, with maturities lasting through December
31, 2012.

Defined Benefit
Plan

A retirement plan that uses a predetermined formula to calculate the
amount of a participant’s future benefit.

Defined
Contribution
Plan

A retirement plan in which the amount of the employer’s annual
contribution is specified.

Deposit
Insurance Fund
(DIF)

The fund managed by the FDIC to pay deposit insurance claims on
failed banks, financed through assessments paid by FDIC-insured
depository institutions.

154

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Deposit
Insurance Limit
Depository
Institution

A financial institution that is legally permitted to accept deposits.
Depository institutions include savings banks, commercial banks,
savings and loan associations, and credit unions.

Discount
Window

The Federal Reserve facility for extending credit directly to eligible
institutions.

Dividend
Recapitalization

A transaction in which debt is used to finance a company’s dividend
payment, often in the form of a special one-time payment.

European
Stability
Mechanism
(ESM)

A European intergovernmental crisis financing facility that will be
activated in 2013, following ratification of an amendment to the EU
treaties. The ESM will be backed by €80 billion in paid-in capital and
€620 billion of callable capital by euro area member states, and will
have a €500 billion lending capacity. The ESM will be permitted to
lend only to Eurozone sovereigns in the context of an adjustment
program, and all lending decisions must be made by unanimous
agreement by creditor states.

Exchange Traded
Note (ETN)

Senior unsecured debt securities issued by a firm. These structured
notes are listed and traded on securities exchanges and offer returns
based on exposure to different underlying assets.

Farm Credit
System

A government-sponsored enterprise created by Congress and
composed of a network of borrower-owned financial institutions that
provide credit to farmers, ranchers, residents of rural communities,
agricultural and rural utility cooperatives, and other eligible borrowers.
The Farm Credit System is the largest agricultural lender in the United
States and is regulated by the Farm Credit Administration.

Fedwire Funds
Service

A real-time gross settlement system owned and operated by the
Federal Reserve Banks that offers participants the ability to send and
receive time-critical payments for their own account or on behalf of
their clients.

Fedwire
Securities
Service

A book-entry securities transfer system operated by the Federal
Reserve Banks that provides participants safekeeping, transfer, and
delivery-versus-payment settlement services.

FICO Score

	

The standard maximum deposit insurance amount granted to each
depositor, per insured bank, for each account ownership category.

A measure of a borrower’s creditworthiness based on the borrower’s
credit data; developed by the Fair Isaac Corporation.

Glossary

155

Financial Market
Infrastructure

A multilateral system among participating financial institutions,
including the operator of the system, used for the purposes of
recording, clearing, or settling payments, securities, derivatives, or
other financial transactions. Financial market infrastructures exist
in many financial markets to support and facilitate the transferring,
clearing, or settlement of financial transactions.

Financial Market
Utility (FMU)

Subject to certain exclusions, the Dodd-Frank Act defines an FMU as
“any person that manages or operates a multilateral system for the
purpose of transferring, clearing, or settling payments, securities, or
other financial transactions among financial institutions or between
financial institutions and the person.”

Fiscal
Consolidation

Government policy aimed at reducing government deficits and the
pace of debt accumulation.

Fiscal Year (FY)

Any 12-month accounting period. The fiscal year for the federal
government begins on October 1 and ends on September 30 of the
following year; it is named after the calendar year in which it ends.

Fixed-Rate
Mortgage

A mortgage loan in which the interest rate does not change during
the term of the loan.

Floating Rate
Note

A debt instrument with a variable interest rate.

General
Obligation (G.O.)
Bond

A type of municipal bond backed by the full faith and credit of the
governmental unit that issues the bond.

GovernmentSponsored
Enterprise (GSE)

A corporate entity that has a federal charter authorized by law but
that is a privately owned financial institution.

Gross Domestic
Product (GDP)

The broadest measure of aggregate economic activity, measuring the
total value of all final goods and services produced within a country’s
borders during a specific period.

The Group of
Twenty Finance
Ministers and
Central Bank
Governors (G-20)

An international forum established in 1999 to bring together officials
of systemically important industrialized and developing economies to
discuss key issues in the global economy.

Held-to-Maturity
(HTM)

An accounting term for debt securities held in portfolio and
accounted for at cost, under the proviso that the company has the
positive intent and ability to hold those securities to maturity.

156

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Household Debt
Service Ratio

Interest Rate
Risk

The exposure of an individual’s or an institution’s financial condition to
movements in interest rates.

International
Organization
of Securities
Commissions
(IOSCO)

An international organization of securities market regulatory agencies
that sets standards for securities markets.

InvestmentGrade Security

A security whose rating is among the highest in credit-worthiness as
measured by credit rating agencies.

Large Bank
Holding
Company

Any bank holding company (BHC) that files the FR Y-9C. All BHCs
with total consolidated assets of $500 million or more are required
to file. Before March 2006, the threshold was $150 million. BHCs
meeting certain additional criteria determined by the Federal Reserve
may also be required to file regardless of size.

Leveraged
Buyout (LBO)

An acquisition of a company in which the buyer uses borrowed funds
for a significant portion of the purchase price.

Leveraged Loan

A loan or revolving credit facility provided to a borrower that is
carrying a high debt burden.

LIBOR-OIS
Spread

The difference between LIBOR and an OIS rate of a similar term,
which serves as a measure of market pricing of the credit and
liquidity risk in term, unsecured interbank lending. The LIBOR-OIS
spread is widely viewed as a barometer of stress in money markets.

Loan-to-Value
Ratio (LTV)

The ratio of the amount of a loan to the value of an asset, typically
expressed as a percentage. This is a key metric when considering
the financing of a mortgage.

London
Interbank
Offered Rate
(LIBOR)

The interest rate at which banks can borrow unsecured funds from
other banks in London wholesale money markets, as measured by
daily surveys of the British Bankers’ Association. The published rate
is a trimmed average of the rates obtained in the survey.

Loss-Sharing
Arrangement

	

An estimate of the ratio of debt payments to disposable personal
income. Debt payments consist of the estimated required payments
on outstanding mortgage and consumer debt.

A method in a purchase and assumption transaction in which the
seller agrees to share with the acquirer losses on certain types of
assets. The seller usually agrees to absorb a significant portion of
future disposition losses on covered assets. The economic rationale
for such transactions is that retaining loss share assets in the
banking sector would produce a better net recovery than the seller’s
liquidation of the assets.

Glossary

157

Maastricht Treaty

The treaty establishing the European Union, enacted in 1993. The
Maastricht Treaty laid the basis for a common currency (the euro)
and the European Central Bank. Subsequently amended (most
recently by the Lisbon Treaty), the Maastricht Treaty lays out the
basic policymaking responsibilities of member states, the European
Commission, and the European Parliament.

Macroprudential
Regulation

Regulation aimed at promoting the stability of the financial system as
a whole rather than individual institutions.

Marketable Debt

Obligations that can be bought and sold on public secondary
markets.

Mark-to-Market

The process by which the reported value of an asset is adjusted to
reflect its market value.

Maturity
Transformation

A condition in which a financial intermediary issues shorter-term
liabilities to fund longer-term assets.

Model Risk

Risk related to using an incorrect model specification. For example,
misspecification can be due to programming errors, technical errors,
data issues, or calibration errors.

Money Market
Fund (MMF)

A type of mutual fund that is required by law to invest in low-risk
securities and pays dividends that generally reflect short-term interest
rates. MMFs typically invest in government securities, certificates
of deposit, commercial paper, or other highly liquid and low-risk
securities.

Mortgage
Servicer

A company that acts as an agent for mortgage holders by collecting
and distributing mortgage cash flows. Servicers also handle defaults,
modifications, settlements, and foreclosure proceedings.

MortgageBacked Security
(MBS)

An asset-backed security backed by a pool of mortgages. Investors
in the security receive payments derived from the interest and
principal payments on the underlying mortgages.

Municipal Bond

A bond issued by states, cities, counties, local governmental
agencies, or certain nongovernment issuers.

Mutual Fund

A type of investment company that issues redeemable securities,
which the fund generally stands ready to buy back from investors
at their current net asset value. Also called an open-end investment
company or open-end fund.

158

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Nationally
Recognized
Statistical Rating
Organization
(NRSRO)
Overnight
Indexed Swap
(OIS)

An interest rate swap that serves as a measure of investor
expectations of an average effective overnight rate over the term of
the swap.

Over-theCounter (OTC)

A method of trading that does not involve an organized exchange. In
over-the-counter markets, participants trade directly with each other,
typically through voice or computer communication.

Private-Label
MortgageBacked Security

In housing finance, a mortgage-backed security or other bond
created and sold by a company other than a government-sponsored
enterprise (GSE). The security often is collateralized by loans that are
ineligible for purchase by a GSE.

Prudential
Regulation

Regulation aimed at ensuring the safe and sound operation of
financial institutions, set by both state and federal authorities.

Public Debt

Cumulative amounts borrowed by the Treasury Department or the
Federal Financing Bank from the public or from another fund or
account. The public debt does not include agency debt (amounts
borrowed by other agencies of the federal government).

Ratings Uplift

The difference between the stand-alone credit rating assigned by
a credit rating agency to an issuer, based on that issuer’s intrinsic
financial strength, and the higher credit rating that considers the
possibility of implicit external (e.g., government) support.

Real Estate
Mortgage
Investment
Conduit

A type of multiclass mortgage-backed security in which interest and
principal payments from the underlying mortgages are structured into
separately traded securities.

Receiver

A custodian appointed to maximize the value of the assets of a failed
institution or company, and to settle the liabilities.

Recourse
Obligation

An obligation for which the lender has a legal right to seek repayment
from a borrower if the collateral is insufficient to pay the debt in full.

Repurchase
Agreement
(Repo)

	

A credit rating agency that is registered with the SEC as an NRSRO.

A transaction in which one party sells a security to another party
while agreeing to repurchase it from the counterparty at some date in
the future, at an agreed price.

Glossary

159

Reserve
Requirements

The amount of funds that a depository institution must hold in reserve
against specified deposit liabilities. In the United States, within limits
specified by law, the Federal Reserve has authority over changes in
reserve requirements. Depository institutions must hold reserves in
the form of vault cash or deposits with Federal Reserve Banks.

Residential
MortgageBacked Security
(RMBS)

A security that is collateralized by a pool of noncommercial,
residential mortgage loans and makes payments that are based
primarily on the performance of those loans.

Revenue Bond

A type of municipal bond backed by revenue from the project the
bond finances.

Revolving Credit

A lending arrangement whereby a lender commits to provide a
certain amount of funding to a borrower on demand. The borrower
may generally borrow and repay the committed funding at any time
over the term of the agreement.

Risk-Based
Capital

An amount of capital, based on the risk-weighing of various asset
categories, that a financial institution should hold to protect against
adverse developments.

Secured Lending

Lending in which the borrower pledges collateral to the lender to
secure repayment of the loan.

Securities
Lending/
Borrowing

The temporary transfer of securities from one party to another for a
specified fee and term, in exchange for collateral in the form of cash
or securities.

Securitization

A financial transaction in which assets such as mortgage loans are
pooled, and securities representing interests in the pool are issued.

Self-Regulatory
Organization
(SRO)

An organization that has the authority to regulate its members
by establishing and enforcing rules and standards regarding its
members’ conduct.

Settlement Risk

The risk that settlement of a transaction in a transfer system will not
take place as expected. In foreign exchange, this is the risk that one
party will pay out the currency it sold but not receive the currency it
bought. This risk may comprise both credit and liquidity risk. In the
settlement process, this term is typically associated with exchangefor-value transactions when there is a lag between the final settlement
of the various legs of a transaction (i.e. the absence of delivery versus
payment).

160

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Short-Term
Wholesale
Funding

Structured Note

An unsecured debt instrument that has a derivative element. The
return on structured notes is based in part on the performance of one
or more underlying reference assets, such as equities, commodities,
or interest rates. Structured notes remain recourse obligations of the
issuer and are subject to default risk.

Stub Quote

An offer to buy or sell a stock at a price so far away from the
prevailing market price that it is not intended to be executed, such as
an order to buy at a penny or an offer to sell at $100,000.

Supervisory
Capital
Assessment
Program (SCAP)

A stress test, conducted from February to May 2009, designed to
estimate the capital needs of U.S. bank holding companies with
assets exceeding $100 billion under an adverse macroeconomic
scenario; it was administered by the Federal Reserve, OCC, and
FDIC.

Synthetic
Collateralized
Debt Obligation

A collateralized debt obligation, issued by an entity that holds credit
default swaps on reference assets (rather than holding the reference
assets themselves), that allows investors to gain exposure to those
reference assets.

System Open
Market Account
(SOMA)

The SOMA consists of the Federal Reserve’s domestic and foreign
portfolios, which include both dollar-denominated and euro and yendenominated assets, in addition to reciprocal currency arrangements
made with foreign institutions. The Federal Open Market Committee
(FOMC) has selected the Federal Reserve Bank of New York to
execute open market transactions, using the SOMA portfolio, to
implement monetary policy and foreign exchange intervention at the
direction of the FOMC.

Systemic Risk
Determination

Upon the written recommendation of two-thirds of the FDIC Board
and two-thirds of the Federal Reserve Board, the Secretary of
the Treasury (in consultation with the President) determines that
conformance with least-cost resolution would have serious adverse
effects on economic conditions or financial activity before the FDIC
is allowed to take action other than least-cost resolution or provide
assistance as necessary to avoid or mitigate such effects.

Temporary
Liquidity
Guarantee
Program (TLGP)

	

Large-value, short-term funding instruments, exceeding deposit
insurance limits, that are typically issued to institutional investors.
Examples include large checkable and time deposits, financial open
market paper, and repurchase agreements.

A program implemented in October 2008 by the FDIC through
a systemic risk determination to provide liquidity to the banking
industry by restoring banks’ access to funding markets and by
stabilizing bank deposits. The program had two components: the
Debt Guarantee Program and the Transaction Account Guarantee
Program.

Glossary

161

Tender Option
Bond (TOB)

An obligation, also known as a “put bond” or “puttable security,” that
grants the bondholder the right to require the issuer or a specified
third party acting as agent for the issuer (such as a tender agent) to
purchase the bond, usually at par, at a certain time or times prior to
maturity or upon the occurrence of specified events or conditions.

Term AssetBacked
Securities Loan
Facility (TALF)

A Federal Reserve funding facility that issued loans with terms of
up to five years to holders of eligible asset-backed securities (ABS).
TALF was intended to assist the financial markets in accommodating
the credit needs of consumers and businesses by facilitating the
issuance of ABS collateralized by a variety of consumer and business
loans. TALF was also intended to improve the market conditions
for ABS more generally. The program was announced in November
2008. The facility ceased making loans collateralized by newly issued
commercial mortgage-backed securities on June 30, 2010, and loans
collateralized by all other types of TALF-eligible newly issued and
legacy ABS on March 31, 2010.

Term Auction
Facility (TAF)

The program in which the Federal Reserve made term funds, at either
28- or 84-day maturity, available to all eligible depository institutions
through a regular auction that determined the interest rate. The
facility was announced in December 2007, and the final auction was
held in March 2010.

Term Loan

A loan granted by a commercial bank, insurance company, or
commercial finance company for a fixed term.

Thrift

A financial institution that ordinarily possesses the same depository,
credit, financial intermediary, and account transactional functions as a
bank, but that is chiefly organized and primarily operates to promote
savings and home mortgage lending rather than commercial lending.
Also known as a savings bank, a savings association, or a savings
and loan association.

Time Deposits

Deposits which the depositor, generally, does not have the right to
withdraw funds before a designated maturity date without paying an
early withdrawal penalty. A certificate of deposit is a time deposit.

Trading
Securities

An accounting term for debt and equity securities that are bought
and held principally for the purpose of selling them in the near term.
Trading securities are accounted for at fair value, with unrealized
gains and losses included in earnings.

Tranche

A claim on a portion of the cash flows from an underlying asset or
pool of assets defined by its risk, maturity, or other characteristics.

Transaction
Account
Guarantee
Program (TAGP)

One of two components of the FDIC’s Temporary Liquidity Guarantee
Program. The TAGP provided liquidity by guaranteeing all funds held
in certain noninterest-bearing transaction accounts at participating
insured depository institutions through December 31, 2010.

162

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Tri-Party Repo

Troubled Asset
Relief Program
(TARP)

A government program to address the financial crisis, authorized
by the Emergency Economic Stabilization Act of 2008, allowing the
government to purchase or insure up to $700 billion in assets and
equity from financial institutions.

Underwriting
Standards

Terms, conditions, and criteria used to determine the extension of
credit in the form of a loan or bond.

Yield Curve

	

A repurchase agreement in which a third party agent, such as a
clearing bank, acts as an intermediary to facilitate the exchange of
cash and collateral between the two counterparties. In addition to
providing operational services to participants, the tri-party agents in
the U.S. tri-party repo market extend large amounts of intraday credit
to facilitate the daily settlement of tri-party repos.

A curve mapping the relationship between bond yields and their
respective maturities.

Glossary

163

Abbreviations

ABCP
ABS

Asset-Backed Security

ACH

Automated Clearing House

AFS

Available-for-Sale

AMLF

ABCP Money Market Mutual Fund Liquidity Facility

ANPR

Advance Notice of Proposed Rulemaking

ARM

Adjustable-Rate Mortgage

ARS

Auction Rate Security

ASC

Accounting Standards Codification

BAB

Build America Bonds

BAC

Bank of America

BCBS

Basel Committee on Banking Supervision

BEA

Bureau of Economic Analysis

BHC

Bank Holding Company

BIS

Bank for International Settlements

BLS

Bureau of Labor Statistics

C

Citigroup

C&I (Loans)

Commercial and Industrial (Loans)

CBO

Congressional Budget Office

CCAR

Comprehensive Capital Analysis and Review

CDO

	

Asset-Backed Commercial Paper

Collateralized Debt Obligation

Abbreviations

165

CDS

Credit Default Swap

CFPB

Bureau of Consumer Financial Protection

CFTC

Commodity Futures Trading Commission

CHIPS

Clearing House Interbank Payments System

CLS

CLS Bank International

CMBS

Commercial Mortgage-Backed Security

CP

Commercial Paper

CPFF

Commercial Paper Funding Facility

CPSS

Committee on Payment and Settlement Systems

CRE

Commercial Real Estate

DCE

Designated Clearing Entity

DGP

Debt Guarantee Program

DIF

Deposit Insurance Fund

DTCC

Depository Trust and Clearing Corporation

DVP

Delivery Versus Payment

EFSF

European Financial Stability Facility

EFSM

European Financial Stability Mechanism

EME

Emerging Market Economies

ESM

European Stability Mechanism

ETF

Exchange Traded Fund

ETN

Exchange Traded Note

EU

European Union

FBO

Foreign Banking Organization

FDIC

Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation

FHA

Federal Housing Administration

FHFA

Federal Housing Finance Agency

166

2011 FSOC Annual Report

FHLB
FICO

Fair Isaac Corporation

FIO

Federal Insurance Office

FMU

Financial Market Utility

FOMC

Federal Open Market Committee

FRB

Federal Reserve Board

FRBNY

Federal Reserve Bank of New York

FSB

Financial Stability Board

FSOC

Financial Stability Oversight Council

FY

Fiscal Year

G.O. (Bond)

General Obligation (Bond)

G-20

The Group of Twenty Finance Ministers and Central Bank Governors

GDP

Gross Domestic Product

GS

Goldman Sachs

GSE

Government-Sponsored Enterprise

HTM

Held-to-Maturity

IMF

International Monetary Fund

IOSCO

International Organization of Securities Commissions

JPM

JPMorgan Chase

LBO

Leveraged Buyout

LCFI

Large Complex Financial Institution

LEI

Legal Entity Identifier

LIBOR

London Interbank Offered Rate

LTV

Loan-to-Value Ratio

M&A

Mergers and Acquisitions

MBS

	

Federal Home Loan Bank

Mortgage-Backed Security

Abbreviations

167

MMF

Money Market Fund

MMIFF

Money Market Investor Funding Facility

MS

Morgan Stanley

NAIC

National Association of Insurance Commissioners

NAICS

North American Industry Classification System

NAV

Net Asset Value

NBER

National Bureau of Economic Research

NCUA

National Credit Union Administration

NFIB

National Federation of Independent Business

NFNR

Nonfarm Nonresidential

NMLS

Nationwide Mortgage Licensing System and Registry

NPR

Notice of Proposed Rulemaking

NRSRO

Nationally Recognized Statistical Rating Organization

NSA

Not Seasonally Adjusted

NSCC

National Securities Clearing Corporation

OCC

Office of the Comptroller of the Currency

OECD

Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development

OFR

Office of Financial Research

OIS

Overnight Indexed Swap

OLA

Orderly Liquidation Authority

OTC

Over-the-Counter

OTS

Office of Thrift Supervision

PDCF

Primary Dealer Credit Facility

REIT

Real Estate Investment Trust

Repo

Repurchase Agreement

RMBS

Residential Mortgage-Backed Security

168

2011 FSOC Annual Report

RTGS
RWA

Risk-Weighted Assets

S&P

Standard & Poor’s

SA

Seasonally Adjusted

SAAR

Seasonally Adjusted Annual Rate

SCAP

Supervisory Capital Assessment Program

SCOOS

Senior Credit Officer Opinion Survey

SEC

Securities and Exchange Commission

SLOOS

Senior Loan Officer Opinion Survey

SOMA

System Open Market Account

SPV

Special Purpose Vehicle

SRC

Systemic Risk Committee

SRO

Self-Regulatory Organization

TAF

Term Auction Facility

TAGP

Transaction Account Guarantee Program

TALF

Term Asset-Backed Securities Loan Facility

TARP

Troubled Asset Relief Program

TIPS

Treasury Inflation Protected Securities

TLGP

Temporary Liquidity Guarantee Program

TOB

Tender Option Bond

TOP

Term Securities Lending Facility Options Program

TSLF

Term Securities Lending Facility

VA

Department of Veterans Affairs

WFC

	

Real-Time Gross Settlement

Wells Fargo

Abbreviations

169

Notes on the Data

Except as otherwise indicated, data cited in this report is as of July 18, 2011.
Glossary of certain government data sources:
FFIEC 002: Federal Financial Institutions Examination Council report of balance sheet and off–
balance sheet information for U.S. branches and agencies of foreign banks.
Flow of Funds: Data release compiled and published by the Federal Reserve.
FR 2004: Report of market activity for primary dealers in U.S. government securities published
by the Federal Reserve.
FR G-19: Statistical release published by the Federal Reserve.
FR Y-9C: Consolidated financial statement for domestic bank holding companies published by
the Federal Reserve.
SCOOS: Survey of senior credit officers on availability and terms of credit conducted and
published by the Federal Reserve Board.
SLOOS: Survey of senior loan officers on bank lending practices conducted and published by
the Federal Reserve Board.
Papers cited in this report:
Brunnermeier, Markus and Lasse Pedersen. “Market Liquidity and Funding Liquidity,” Review
of Financial Studies, 2009, 22(6): 2201-2238, by permission of Oxford University Press.
Copeland, Adam M., Antoine Martin, and Michael Walker. “The Tri-Party Repo Market before
the 2010 Reforms,” Federal Reserve Bank of New York Staff Reports, 2010, No. 477.
Cordell, Larry, Yilin Huang, and Meredith Williams. “Collateral Damage: Sizing and Assessing
the Subprime CDO Crisis,” Federal Reserve Bank of Philadelphia Working Paper, 2011.
“White Paper on Tri-Party Repo Infrastructure Reform,” Federal Reserve Bank of New York,
published online on May 17, 2010.
“The 2010 Federal Reserve Payment Study: Noncash Payment Trends in the United States:
2006-2009.” Federal Reserve System, April 5, 2011.
Other:
Certain data was obtained through Haver Analytics.
Moody’s data provided by Moody’s Investors Service.
Bloomberg data: © 2011 Bloomberg Finance L.P. All rights reserved. Used with permission.
NAR data: Copyright National Association of REALTORS®. Used with permission.
Tri-Party Repo Infrastructure Reform Task Force: Industry working group sponsored by the
Federal Reserve Bank of New York to address vulnerabilities in the tri-party repo market.

	

Notes on the Data

171

List of Charts

Chart 4.0.1 Real GDP Growth and the Unemployment Rate	

17	

Chart 4.0.2 Real GDP Growth and Its Components	

17		

Chart 4.0.3 United States Nonfinancial Net Debt Flows	

18	

Chart 4.0.4 Euro Area Nonfinancial Net Debt Flows	

18	

Chart 4.1.1 Net Debt Outstanding as a Percent of GDP	

18	

Chart 4.1.2 Bank Business Lending Standards and Demand	

19	

Chart 4.1.3 Corporate Bond Market Issuance	

19	

Chart 4.1.4 Corporate Bond Spreads	

19	

Chart 4.1.5 North American Completed LBOs	

20	

Chart 4.1.6 Proxy for Small Business Lending	

20	

Chart 4.1.7 Nonmortgage Consumer Credit Flows	

20	

Chart 4.1.8 Credit Card Limit and Outstanding Balance	

21	

Chart 4.1.9 Single-Family New Home Starts and Sales	

21	

Chart 4.1.10 Distressed Sales Share of Total Home Sales	

21

Chart 4.1.11 Net Consumer Sector Credit Flows	

22

Chart 4.1.12 National Repeat Sales Home Price Indexes	

22

Chart 4.1.13 Housing Affordability Index	

22

Chart 4.1.14 Median Credit Score at Mortgage Origination	

23

Chart 4.1.15 Commercial Property Price Indexes	

23

Chart 4.1.16 CMBS New Issuance	

23

Chart 4.1.17 Private-Label RMBS Gross Issuance	

24

Chart 4.1.18 GSE and Private-Label RMBS Gross Issuance	

24

Chart 4.1.19 OTC Derivatives	

25

Chart 4.1.20 OTC Derivatives Growth	

25

Chart 4.1.21 Distribution of OTC Derivatives	

25

	

List of Charts

173

Chart 4.1.22 Private-Label Residential MBS Exposures	

26

Chart 4.1.23 Ownership of Investment Grade Subordinates in RMBS and
ABS CDOs (June 2007)	

26

Chart 4.1.24 ABS Structured Finance CDO Issuance	

26

Chart 4.1.25 Impaired MBS and CDO Securities	

27

Chart 4.1.26 Noncash Retail Payments: 2006	

27

Chart 4.1.27 Noncash Retail Payments: 2009	

27

Chart 4.1.28 Money Market Funds and Checking Deposits	

28

Chart 4.2.1 Corporate Credit Market Debt to Net Worth	

29

Chart 4.2.2 Financial Ratios for Nonfinancial Corporations	

29

Chart 4.2.3 Nonfinancial Corporate Bond Default Rate	

29

Chart 4.2.4 Noncorporate Assets	

30

Chart 4.2.5 Noncorporate Credit Market Debt to Net Worth	

30

Chart 4.2.6 Household and Nonprofit Balance Sheets	

31

Chart 4.2.7 Share of Owners’ Equity in Household Real Estate	

31

Chart 4.2.8 Household Debt Service Ratio	

32

Chart 4.2.9 Household Financial Obligations Ratio	

32

Chart 4.2.10 Outstanding Balances of Consumer Loans	

32

Chart 4.3.1 Total Treasury Market Turnover	

33

Chart 4.3.2 Federal Government Debt Held by the Public	

33

Chart 4.3.3 Outlays and Revenues Using CBO Projections	

33

Chart A.1 U.S. Dollar Share of Allocated Reserves	

34

Chart A.2 Currencies in Allocated Global Reserves	

34

Chart 4.3.4 Interest Rate Payer Skew	

35

Chart 4.3.5 Interest Outlays and Average Maturity	

35

Chart 4.3.6 Outright Holdings of Domestic Assets in the SOMA	

35

Chart 4.3.7 Municipal Liabilities as a Percent of GDP	

36

Chart 4.3.8 State Tax Revenue	

37

Chart 4.3.9 City General Fund Revenues and Expenditures	

37

Chart 4.3.10 City General Fund Tax Receipts	

37

174

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart B.1 Issuance by Tax Status	

38

Chart B.2 ARS and VRDO Funding of Long-Term Muni Bonds	

38

Chart B.3 Municipal Bond Flows	

39

Chart B.4 Municipal Tax-Exempt Bond Ratios	

39

Chart 4.4.1 Indebtedness and Leverage in Selected Advanced Economies (April 2011)	

40

Chart 4.4.2 Real GDP Growth	

40

Chart 4.4.3 Emerging Markets: Public Debt to GDP	

40

Chart 4.4.4 Emerging Markets: Current Account	

41

Chart 4.4.5 Private Capital Flows to Emerging Markets	

41

Chart 4.4.6 EM Foreign Exchange Reserves Coverage	

41

Chart C.1 2009 Gross General Government Debt & Deficits	

42

Chart C.2 European Sovereign 10-year Spreads	

43

Chart 5.0.1 The Financial Crisis in the Interbank Market	

45

Chart 5.1.1 Federal Reserve Balance Sheet: Assets	

46

Chart 5.1.2 Federal Reserve Facilities	

46

Chart 5.1.3 US$ FX Swap Facility Usage Since Inception	

46

Chart 5.1.4 EUR-US$ FX Implied Basis Spreads	

47

Chart 5.1.5 CPFF Support of Commercial Paper Market	

47

Chart 5.1.6 30-Day CP Rates Less 1-Month OIS Rates	

47

Chart 5.1.7 Nonmortgage ABS Issuance	

48

Chart 5.1.8 ABS Issuance	

48

Chart 5.1.9 Securitized Auto ABS Spreads	

48

Chart 5.1.10 CMBS AAA Spread	

49

Chart 5.1.11 Debt Spreads vs. 3-year U.S. Treasury Securities	

49

Chart 5.1.12 Total Debt Outstanding for TLGP Firms	

49

Chart D.1 Money Market Fund Assets	

50

Chart D.2 Money Market Fund Sponsor Support	

51

Chart 5.1.13 Prime Money Market Fund Assets	

52

Chart 5.1.14 The Financial Panic in the Interbank Market	

52

Chart 5.1.15 Price-to-Book Ratio of 6 Large Complex BHCs	

52

	

List of Charts

175

Chart 5.1.16 CDS Spreads of 6 Large Complex BHCs	

53

Chart 5.1.17 Aggregate Large BHC Total Equity Capital	

53

Chart 5.1.18 Fannie Mae Option-Adjusted Spreads	

54

Chart 5.1.19 GSE: Net Income and Losses	

54

Chart 5.1.20 FHLB Bank Advances	

54

Chart 5.2.1 Origin of Private Nonfinancial Debt Outstanding	

55

Chart 5.2.2 Bank vs. Market Intermediated Credit Outstanding	

55

Chart 5.2.3 Large Bank Holding Company Pre-Tax Income	

56

Chart 5.2.4 Independent Broker-Dealer Assets	

56

Chart 5.2.5 SCAP Bank Noninterest Income	

56

Chart 5.2.6 Assets of Foreign Bank Branches and Agencies	

57

Chart 5.2.7 Asset Distribution of FDIC-Insured Institutions	

57

Chart 5.2.8 Assets of the Ten Largest Depository Institutions	

57

Chart 5.2.9 Largest 4 Banking Institutions as Percent of GDP	

58

Chart 5.2.10 Commercial Bank and Thrift Pre-Tax Income	

58

Chart 5.2.11 FDIC-Insured Failed Institutions	

58

Chart 5.2.12 Large Bank Pre-Tax Income	

59

Chart 5.2.13 Community Bank Pre-Tax Income	

59

Chart 5.2.14 Federally Insured Credit Union Income	

59

Chart 5.2.15 Assets of the Ten Largest Credit Unions	

60

Chart 5.2.16 Finance Company Mortgage Assets	

60

Chart 5.2.17 Real Estate Investment Trust (REIT) Assets	

60

Chart 5.2.18 Consumer Loans Outstanding	

61

Chart 5.2.19 Business Loans Outstanding	

61

Chart 5.2.20 Finance Company Liabilities	

61

Chart 5.2.21 Property and Casualty Insurance: Assets	

62

Chart 5.2.22 Life Insurance: Assets	

62

Chart 5.2.23 Property and Casualty Insurance: Capital and Income	

62

Chart 5.2.24 Life and Other Insurance: Capital and Income	

63

Chart 5.2.25 Household Financial Assets	

63

176

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 5.2.26 Household Equity Holdings	

63

Chart 5.2.27 Investment Management Industry	

64

Chart 5.2.28 U.S. Mutual Fund and ETF Assets	

64

Chart 5.2.29 Retirement Funds by Type	

64

Chart 5.2.30 Pension Fund Assets Allocated to Equities	

65

Chart 5.2.31 State and Local Government Pension Plans	

65

Chart 5.2.32 Private Defined Benefit Pension Plans	

65

Chart E.1 U.S. Exchange Traded Funds (ETFs)	

66

Chart E.2 Major ETF Divergence From Net Asset Value (NAV)	

66

Chart 5.2.33 Private Defined Contribution Pension Plans	

68

Chart 5.2.34 Public and Private Pension Funding Level	

68

Chart 5.2.35 Private Equity	

68

Chart 5.2.36 Change in Hedge Fund AUM	

69

Chart 5.2.37 Hedge Fund Performance By Strategy	

69

Chart 5.2.38 Distribution of Net Asset Flows by Size of Fund	

69

Chart 5.2.39 Retail Deposits vs. Short-Term Wholesale Funding	

70

Chart 5.2.40 Composition of Short-Term Wholesale Funding	

70

Chart 5.2.41 FBO Share of US$ Short-Term Wholesale Debt	

70

Chart 5.2.42 Short-Term Collateralized Debt	

71

Chart 5.2.43 Estimated Size of Repo Market	

71

Chart 5.2.44 Bilateral vs. Tri-party Repo Market	

74

Chart 5.2.45 Estimated Value of the Tri-party Repo Market	

74

Chart 5.2.46 Tri-party Repo Collateral	

74

Chart 5.2.47 Tri-party Repo Collateral Distribution	

75

Chart 5.2.48 Wholesale Cash Investors	

75

Chart 5.2.49 Securities Lending Cash Reinvestment	

75

Chart 5.2.50 U.S. Futures and Options Trading	

76

Chart 5.2.51 Trading Venues for U.S. Equities by Market Share	

76

Chart 5.2.52 OTC and Exchange Traded Derivatives Growth	

76

Chart 5.2.53 OTC and Exchange Traded Derivatives	

77

	

List of Charts

177

Chart 5.2.54 Exchange Traded Derivatives	

77

Chart 5.2.55 U.S. Regulated Derivatives Central Counterparties	

77

Chart 5.2.56 Bilateral Execution	

78

Chart 5.2.57 Execution Through Central Clearing	

78

Chart 5.2.58 Average Daily US$ Payment Flows in 2010	

78

Chart 5.2.59 U.S. Financial Infrastructure	

79

Chart 5.2.60 Annual Payment Clearing Volumes	

79

Chart 5.2.61 Annual Payment Clearing Values	

79

Chart 5.2.62 Collateralized Commercial Paper Market	

80

Chart 5.2.63 Global Structured Note Issuance	

80

Chart 5.2.64 US$ Structured Notes by Asset Class	

80

Chart 5.2.65 Non-US$ Structured Notes by Asset Class	

81

Chart 5.3.1 Financial to Private Sector Gross Liabilities	

81

Chart 5.3.2 Financial Sector Gross Liabilities to GDP	

81

Chart 5.3.3 Change in Tier 1 Common Ratios for Large BHCs	

82

Chart 5.3.4 Large BHC Dividends and Repurchases	

82

Chart 5.3.5 Change in Tier 1 Common Ratios for Large BHCs	

83

Chart 5.3.6 Aggregate Large BHC Capital Ratios	

83

Chart 5.3.7 Tier 1 Common at the 100 Largest BHCs	

83

Chart G.1 Return on Risk-Weighted Assets: 99th Percentile	

84

Chart G.2 Percentile of the Distribution of After-Tax Net Income to RWA for U.S. BHCs	

85

Chart 5.3.8 Core Deposits as a Percent of Total Liabilities	

86

Chart 5.3.9 Short-Term Wholesale Funding at Large BHCs	

87

Chart 5.3.10 Domestic vs. Foreign US$ Bank Debt Issuance	

87

Chart 5.3.11 Foreign Bank Issuance of US$ Short-Term Debt	

87

Chart 5.3.12 Reserves Held by Foreign Bank Branches	

90

Chart 5.3.13 Average Daily Value of CLS Transfers	

91

Chart 5.3.14 Average Daily Volume of CLS Transfers	

91

Chart 5.3.15 Globex CME September 13, 2010 Incident	

93

Chart 5.3.16 Current Tri-party Repo High Level Process Flow	

94

178

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Chart 5.3.17 Tri-party Concentration by Asset Class	

94

Chart 5.3.18 Tri-party Repo Aggregate Median Haircut	

95

Chart 5.3.19 Lehman Tri-party Repo Assets in 2008	

95

Chart 5.3.20 Lehman Tri-party Repo Cash Investors in 2008	

95

Chart 5.3.21 Residential Mortgage Foreclosure Starts Rate	

97

Chart 5.3.22 Residential Mortgage Delinquency Rate	

98

Chart 5.3.23 S&P 500 and VIX on May 6, 2010	

99

Chart 5.3.24 Citi FX/Equity Realized Correlation Index	

100

Chart 5.3.25 S&P 500 Implied Correlation Index	

100

Chart 5.4.1 Dow Jones U.S. Total Stock Market Index	

101

Chart 5.4.2 Price-to-Earnings Ratio for Corporate Equities	

101

Chart 5.4.3 High-Yield Credit Risk Premium	

102

Chart 5.4.4 Correlation of Stock Prices and Treasury Returns	

103

Chart 5.4.5 Price-to-Rent Ratio for Residential Property	

103

Chart 5.4.6 Capitalization Rate and Spread	

104

Chart 5.4.7 Farm Land Prices	

104

Chart 5.4.8 Agricultural Real Estate Debt Outstanding	

104

Chart 5.4.9 Syndicated Leveraged Loan Market	

105

Chart 5.4.10 Composition of Leveraged Loan Investors	

105

Chart 5.4.11 All in Cost of Leveraged Loans	

105

Chart 5.4.12 Leveraged Loan New Issuance Metrics	

106

Chart 5.4.13 Leveraged Loan New Issuance Characteristics	

106

Chart 5.4.14 Commodity Prices	

106

Chart 5.4.15 Middle East Producers: Production and Capacity	

107

Chart 5.4.16 Oil Market Price and Net Long Positions	

107

Chart 5.4.17 BHC Systemic Uplift	

108

Chart 5.4.18 S&P Current Actual & Market Implied Rating	

108

Chart 5.4.19 Current Long-Term Ratings and Uplift	

108

Chart 5.4.20 Current Short-Term Ratings	

109

Chart 5.4.21 Interest Expense as a Percent of Total Liabilities	

109

	

List of Charts

179

Chart 5.4.22 Noninterest-Bearing Liabilities to Total Liabilities	

109

Chart 5.4.23 Value Added Share of Financial Sector	

110

Chart 5.4.24 Financial Sector Share of Nonfarm Payroll	

110

Chart 5.4.25 Financial Sector Share of Corporate Profits	

110

Chart 5.4.26 Financial Sector Wages to All Wages	

111

Chart 5.4.27 Investment Banking Wages to All Wages	

111

Chart 5.4.28 Compensation Share of Industry Value Added	

111

Chart I.1 Complex Financial Institutions in 2007	

112

Chart J.1 Average Risk Measures Across the 5 Largest BHCs	

132

Chart 7.1.1 Real GDP Growth in Recoveries	

136

Chart 7.1.2 Percent of Mortgages with Negative Equity	

136

Chart 7.1.3 Real Estate Exposure as a Percent of Assets	

136

Chart 7.1.4 House Prices Under Supervisory Scenarios	

137

Chart 7.1.5 Securities and Reserves as a Percent of Assets	

137

Chart 7.1.6 Large BHC Treasury and Agency Debt Holdings	

137

Chart 7.1.7 European Sovereign 5-year CDS Spreads	

138

Chart 7.1.8 Insurance Industry Exposure to Europe	

138

Chart 7.1.9 Short-Term Wholesale Funding	

138

Chart L.1 Number of New Loan Modifications	

139

Chart L.2 Changes in Demand for Securities Financing	

140

Chart 7.1.10 Less-Stable Funding Sources at 6 Largest BHCs	

142

Chart 7.1.11 Potential BHC Ratings Without Support Uplift	

142

Chart 7.1.12 U.S. Prime MMF Exposure by Country and Type	

142

Chart 7.1.13 U.S. Prime MMF European Exposures	

143

Chart 7.1.14 VIX: A Measure of Financial Market Volatility	

143

Chart 7.1.15 Sharp Jumps in Market Volatility	

143

Chart 7.1.16 Emerging Market Bond Issuance	

144

Chart 7.1.17 Market and Funding Liquidity Spirals	

145

180

2011 FSOC Annual Report

Financial Stability Oversight Council
1500 Pennsylvania Avenue, NW
Washington, D.C. 20220
www.fsoc.gov